KEMBAR78
Sw flowsimulation 2009 tutorial | PDF
SolidWorks Flow Simulation 2009 
Tutorial
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
Contents 
Open the SolidWorks Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 
Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 
Define the Engineering Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 
Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 
Monitor the Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 
Adjust Model Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 
Cut Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 
Surface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 
Isosurface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 
Flow Trajectory Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 
XY Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 
Surface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 
Analyze a Design Variant in the SolidWorks Ball part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 
Clone the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 
Analyze a Design Variant in the Flow Simulation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial i
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
Open the SolidWorks Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 
Preparing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 
Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 
Define the Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 
Define the Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 
Define the Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 
Create a New Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 
Define the Solid Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 
Define the Engineering Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 
Specifying Volume Goals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 
Specifying Surface Goals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 
Specifying Global Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 
Changing the Geometry Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 
Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 
Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 
Flow Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 
Cut Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 
Surface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 
ii Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
First Steps - Porous Media 
Open the SolidWorks Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 
Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 
Define the Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 
Create an Isotropic Porous Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 
Define the Porous Medium - Isotropic Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 
Specifying Surface Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 
Define the Equation Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 
Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 
Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 
Flow Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 
Clone the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 
Create a Unidirectional Porous Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 
Define the Porous Medium - Unidirectional Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 
Compare the Isotropic and Unidirectional Catalysts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Model Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 
Specifying Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 
Specifying Surface Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 
Running the Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 
Monitoring the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 
Cloning the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 
Creating a Cut Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 
Working with Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 
Creating a Goal Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 
Working with Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 
Changing the Geometry Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial iii
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 
Specifying 2D Plane Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 
Specifying a Global Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 
Specifying an Equation Goal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 
Cloning a Project and Creating a New Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 
Changing Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 
Changing the Equation Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 
Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 
Creating a Project from the Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 
Solving a Set of Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 
Getting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Open the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 
Symmetry Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 
Specifying a Fluid Subdomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 
Specifying Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 
Specifying Solid Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 
Specifying a Volume Goal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 
Running the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 
Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 
Creating a Cut Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 
Displaying Flow Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 
Computation of Surface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 
Calculating the Heat Exchanger Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 
Specifying the Parameter Display Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 
iv Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
Mesh Optimization 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 
Manual Specification of the Minimum Gap Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 
Switching off the Automatic Mesh Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 
Specifying Control Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 
Creating a Second Local Initial Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 
Two Ways of Solving the Problem with Flow Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 
The EFD Zooming Approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 
First Stage of EFD Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 
Project for the First Stage of EFD Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 
Second Stage of EFD Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 
Project for the Second Stage of EFD Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 
Changing the Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 
Clone Project to the Existing Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 
The Local Initial Mesh Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 
Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No1) . . . .8-16 
Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No2) . . . .8-20 
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial v
Textile Machine 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 
Specifying Rotating Walls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 
Initial Conditions - Swirl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 
Specifying Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 
Results - Smooth Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 
Displaying Particles Trajectories and Flow Streamlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 
Modeling Rough Rotating Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 
Adjusting Wall Roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 
Results - Rough Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 
Specifying Non-Newtonian Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 
Specifying Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 
Comparison with Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 
Changing Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 
Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 
Project Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 
Definition of the Computational Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 
Adjusting Automatic Mesh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 
Definition of Radiative Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 
Specifying Bodies Transparent to the Heat Radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 
vi Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
Heat Sources and Goals Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 
Case 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 
Changing the Radiative Surface Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 
Goals Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 
Specifying Initial Condition in Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 
Case 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 
Rotating Impeller 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2 
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2 
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 
Specifying Stationary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 
Impeller’s Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 
Specifying Project Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 
CPU Cooler 
Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1 
SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1 
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2 
Computational Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2 
Rotating Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 
Specifying Stationary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 
Solid Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 
Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 
Initial Mesh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 
Specifying Project Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9 
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial vii
viii Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
Features List 
Below is the list of the physical and interface features of Flow Simulation as they appear 
in the tutorial examples. To learn more about the usage of a particular feature, read the 
corresponding example. 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
DIMENSIONALITY 
2D flow 9 
3D flow 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1
2 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
ANALYSIS TYPE 
External analysis 99 999 99 
Internal analysis 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
PHYSICAL FEATURES 
Steady state analysis 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Time-dependent (transient) 
9 
analysis 
Liquids 99 999 999 999 99 
Gases 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Non-Newtonian liquids 9 
Multi-species flows (or more than 
99 99 
one fluid in the analysis) 
Fluid Subdomains 9 
Heat conduction in solids 99 999 999 999 99 
Heat conduction in solids only 9 
Gravitational effects 9
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Laminar only flow 9 
Porous media 99 99 
Radiation 9 
Roughness 9 
Two-phase flows (fluid flows with 
9 
particles or droplets) 
Rotation 
Global rotating reference frame 9 
Local rotating regions 9 
CONDITIONS 
Computational domain 99 999 999 99 
Symmetry 99 99 
Initial and ambient conditions 
Velocity parameters 9 
Dependency 9 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3
4 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Thermodynamic parameters 99 99 
Turbulence parameters 9 
Concentration 9 
Solid parameters 9 
Boundary conditions 
Flow openings 
Inlet mass flow 99 999 99 
Inlet volume flow 99 999 99 
Outlet volume flow 9 
Inlet velocity 99 999 99 
Pressure openings 
Static pressure 99 999 999 999 99 
Environment pressure 99 999 999 999 99 
Wall 
Real wall 99 999 99
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Boundary condition parameters 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Transferred boundary conditions 9 
Fans 99 99 
Volume conditions 
Fluid Subdomain 9 
Initial conditions 
Velocity parameters 9 
Dependency 9 
Solid parameters 9 
Solid material 99 999 999 999 99 
Porous medium 99 99 
Heat sources 
Surface sources 
Heat generation rate 99 99 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5
6 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Volume sources 
Temperature 9 
Heat generation rate 99 999 99 
Radiative surfaces 
Blackbody wall 9 
Whitebody wall 9 
PROJECT DEFINITION 
Wizard and Navigator 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
From template 9 
Clone project 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
General settings 99 99 
Copy project’s features 9 
GOALS 
Global goal 99 999 999 999 99 
Surface goal 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Volume goal 99 999 999 999 99 
Point goal 9 
Equation goal 99 999 999 999 99 
MESH SETTINGS 
Initial mesh 
Automatic settings 
Level of initial mesh 99 99 
Minimum gap size 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Minimum wall thickness 99 999 99 
Manual adjustments 
Control planes 99 99 
Solid/fluid interface 99 99 
Narrow channels 99 99 
Local initial mesh 
Manual adjustments 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7
8 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
Refining cells 9 
Narrow channels 99 99 
TOOLS 
Dependency 99 99 
Custom units 99 99 
Engineering database 
User-defined items 99 999 999 99 
Check geometry 9 
Gasdynamic calculator 9 
Toolbars 9 
Filter faces 99 999 99 
Component control 99 999 999 999 99 
Radiation transparent bodies 9 
CALCULATION CONTROL OPTIONS 
Result resolution level 99 999 999 99
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler 
RUNNING CALCULATION 
Batch run 99 999 99 
MONITORING CALCULATION 
Goal plot 9 
Preview 9 
GETTING RESULTS 
Cut plot 99 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Surface plot 99 99 
Isosurfaces 9 
Flow trajectories 99 999 999 999 99 
Particle study 9 
XY plot 9 
Surface parameters 99 99 
Goal plot 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 
Display parameters 9 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9
10 
Display mode 
Show/Hide model geometry 99 999 99 
Transparency 99 99 
Apply lighting 9 
View settings 
Contours 99 999 999 99 
Vectors 99 999 99 
Flow trajectories 9 
Isosurfaces 9 
OPTIONS 
Use CAD geometry 9 
Display mesh 9 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
First Steps - Porous Media 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Mesh Optimization 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Textile Machine 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Rotating Impeller 
CPU Cooler
1 
First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
This First Steps tutorial covers the flow of water through a ball valve assembly before and 
after some design changes. The objective is to show how easy fluid flow simulation can be 
using Flow Simulation and how simple it is to analyze design variations. These two factors 
make Flow Simulation the perfect tool for engineers who want to test the impact of their 
design changes. 
Open the SolidWorks Model 
1 Copy the First Steps - Ball Valve folder into your working directory and ensure that 
the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. 
Run Flow Simulation. 
2 Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the 
Ball Valve.SLDASM assembly located in the 
First Steps - Ball Valve folder and click Open (or 
double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag 
and drop the Ball Valve.SLDASM file to an empty 
area of SolidWorks window. Make sure, that the default 
configuration is the active one. 
	 This is a ball valve. Turning the handle closes or opens 
the valve. The mate angle controls the opening angle. 
3 Show the lids by clicking the features in the 
FeatureManager design tree (Lid <1> and Lid <2>). 
	 We utilize this model for the Flow Simulation simulation without many significant 
changes. The user simply closes the interior volume using extrusions we call lids. In 
this example the lids are made semi-transparent so one may look into the valve. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-1
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
Create a Flow Simulation Project 
1-2 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, 
Wizard. 
2 Once inside the Wizard, select Create 
new in order to create a new 
configuration and name it Project 1. 
	 Flow Simulation will create a new 
configuration and store all data in a 
new folder. 
Click Next. 
3 Choose the system of units (SI for this 
project). Please keep in mind that after 
finishing the Wizard you may change 
the unit system at any time by clicking 
Flow Simulation, Units. 
	 Within Flow Simulation, there are 
several predefined systems of units. You 
can also define your own and switch 
between them at any time. 
Click Next. 
4 Leave the default Internal analysis type. 
Do not include any physical features. 
	 We want to analyze the flow through the 
structure. This is what we call an internal 
analysis. The alternative is an external 
analysis, which is the flow around an 
object. In this dialog box you can also 
choose to ignore cavities that are not 
relevant to the flow analysis, so that Flow 
Simulation will not waste memory and 
CPU resources to take them into account. 
	 Not only will Flow Simulation calculate the fluid flow, but can also take into account 
heat conduction within the solid(s) including surface-to-surface radiation. Transient 
(time dependent) analyses are also possible. Gravitational effects can be included for 
natural convection cases. Analysis of rotating equipment is one more option available. 
We skip all these features, as none of them is needed in this simple example. 
Click Next.
5 In the Fluids tree expand the Liquids item 
and choose Water as the fluid. You can 
either double-click Water or select the 
item in the tree and click Add. 
	 Flow Simulation is capable of calculating 
fluids of different types in one analysis, 
but fluids must be separated by the walls. 
A mixing of fluids may be considered only 
if the fluids are of the same type. 
	 Flow Simulation has an integrated database containing several liquids, gases and 
solids. Solids are used for conduction in conjugate heat conduction analyses. You can 
easily create your own materials. Up to ten liquids or gases can be chosen for each 
analysis run. 
	 Flow Simulation can calculate analyses with any flow type: Turbulent only, Laminar 
only or Laminar and Turbulent. The turbulent equations can be disregarded if the flow 
is entirely laminar. Flow Simulation can also handle low and high Mach number 
compressible flows for gases. For this demonstration we will perform a fluid flow 
simulation using a liquid and will keep the default flow characteristics. 
Click Next. 
6 Click Next accepting the default wall 
conditions. 
	 Since we did not choose to consider heat 
conduction within the solids, we have an 
option of defining a value of heat 
conduction for the surfaces in contact with 
the fluid. This step is the place to set the 
default wall type. Leave the default 
Adiabatic wall specifying the walls are 
perfectly insulated. 
	 You can also specify the desired wall roughness value applied by default to all model 
walls. To set the roughness value for a specific wall, you can define a Real Wall 
boundary condition. The specified roughness value is the Rz value. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-3
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-4 
7 Click Next accepting the default for the 
initial conditions. 
	 On this step we may change the default 
settings for pressure, temperature and 
velocity. The closer these values are set 
to the final values determined in the 
analysis, the quicker the analysis will 
finish. Since we do not have any 
knowledge of the expected final values, 
we will not modify them for this 
demonstration. 
8 Accept the default for the Result 
Resolution. 
	 Result Resolution is a measure of the desired level of accuracy of the results. It controls 
not only the resolution of the mesh, but also sets many parameters for the solver, e.g. 
the convergence criteria. The higher the Result Resolution, the finer the mesh will be 
and the stricter the convergence criteria will be set. Thus, Result Resolution determines 
the balance between results precision and computation time. Entering values for the 
minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness is important when you have small 
features. Setting these values accurately ensures your small features are not “passed 
over” by the mesh. For our model we type the value of the minimum flow passage as the 
minimum gap size. 
Click the Manual specification of the minimum gap size box. Enter the value 
0.0093 m for the minimum flow passage. 
Click Finish. 
Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow Simulation data 
attached. 
Click on the Configuration Manager to show the new configuration. 
	 Notice the name of the new configuration 
has the name you entered in the Wizard.
Go to the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree and open all the icons. 
	 We will use the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree to define 
our analysis, just as the FeatureManager design tree is 
used to design your models. The Flow Simulation 
analysis tree is fully customizable; you can select which 
folders are shown anytime you work with Flow 
Simulation and which folders are hidden. A hidden 
folder become visible when you add a new feature of 
corresponding type. The folder remains visible until the 
last feature of this type is deleted. 
Right-click the Computational Domain icon and select 
Hide to hide the black wireframe box. 
	 The Computational Domain icon is used to modify the 
size and visualization of the volume being analyzed. 
The wireframe box enveloping the model is the 
visualization of the limits of the computational domain. 
Boundary Conditions 
A boundary condition is required anywhere fluid enters or exits the system and can be 
set as a Pressure, Mass Flow, Volume Flow or Velocity. 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree, 
right-click the Boundary Conditions icon 
and select Insert Boundary Condition. 
2 Select the inner face of the Lid <1> part as 
shown. (To access the inner face, right-click 
the Lid <1> in the graphics area and choose 
Select Other , hover the pointer over 
items in the list of items until the inner face 
is highlighted, then click the left mouse 
button). 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-5
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-6 
3 Select Flow Openings and Inlet Mass Flow. 
4 Set the Mass Flow Rate Normal to Face to 0.5 kg/s. 
5 Click OK . The new Inlet Mass Flow 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
	 With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening 0.5 
kilogram of water per second is flowing into the valve. Within this dialog box we can 
also specify a swirl to the flow, a non-uniform profile and time dependent properties to 
the flow. The mass flow at the outlet does not need to be specified due to the 
conservation of mass; mass flow in equals mass flow out. Therefore another different 
condition must be specified. An outlet pressure should be used to identify this 
condition. 
6 Select the inner face of the Lid <2> part as 
shown. (To access the inner face, right-click 
the Lid <2> in the graphics area and choose 
Select Other , hover the pointer over items 
in the list of items until the inner face is 
highlighted, then click the left mouse button). 
7 In the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree, right-click 
the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition.
8 Select Pressure Openings and Static Pressure. 
9 Keep the defaults in Thermodynamic Parameters, 
Turbulence Parameters, Boundary Layer and Options group boxes. 
10 Click OK . The new Static Pressure 1 item appears in 
the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
	 With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening the fluid 
exits the model to an area of static atmospheric pressure. Within this dialog box we can 
also set time dependent properties to the pressure. 
Define the Engineering Goal 
1 Right-click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree 
Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-7
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-8 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click 
the Inlet Mass Flow 1 item to select the face where it is 
going to be applied. 
3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in 
the Static Pressure row. Already selected Use 
for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check 
box means that the created goal will be used for 
convergence control. 
	 If the Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence 
Control) check box is not selected for a goal, it will not influence the task stopping 
criteria. Such goals can be used as monitoring parameters to give you additional 
information about processes occurring in your model without affecting the other 
results and the total calculation time. 
4 Click OK . The new SG Av Static Pressure 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
	 Engineering goals are the parameters which the user is interested in. Setting goals is in 
essence a way of conveying to Flow Simulation what you are trying to get out of the 
analysis, as well as a way to reduce the time Flow Simulation needs to reach a 
solution. By setting a variable as a project goal you give Flow Simulation information 
about variables that are important to converge upon (the variables selected as goals) 
and variables that can be less accurate (the variables not selected as goals) in the 
interest of time. Goals can be set throughout the entire domain (Global Goals), within 
a selected volume (Volume Goals), in a selected surface area (Surface Goals), or at 
given point (Point Goals). Furthermore, Flow Simulation can consider the average 
value, the minimum value or the maximum value for goal settings. You can also define
an Equation Goal that is a goal defined by an equation involving basic mathematical 
functions with existing goals as variables. The equation goal allows you to calculate 
the parameter of interest (i.e., pressure drop) and keeps this information in the project 
for later reference. 
Click File, Save. 
Solution 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 
	 The already selected Load results check box means 
that the results will be automatically loaded after 
finishing the calculation. 
2 Click Run. 
	 The solver should take less than a minute to run on a 
typical PC. 
Monitor the Solver 
	 This is the solution 
monitor dialog box. On 
the left is a log of each 
step taken in the solution 
process. On the right is an 
information dialog box 
with mesh information and 
any warnings concerning 
the analysis. Do not be 
surprised when the error 
message “A vortex crosses 
the pressure opening” 
appear. We will explain 
this later during the 
demonstration. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-9
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-10 
1 After the calculation has started and several first iterations has passed (keep your eye 
on the Iterations line in the Info window), click the Suspend button on the 
Solver toolbar. 
	 We employ the Suspend option only due to extreme simplicity of the current example, 
which otherwise could be calculated too fast, leaving you not enough time to perform 
the subsequent steps of result monitoring. Normally you may use the monitoring tools 
without suspending the calculation. 
2 Click Insert Goal Plot on the Solver toolbar. The Add/Remove Goals dialog 
box appears. 
3 Select the SG Average Static Pressure 1 in the 
Select goals list and click OK. 
	 This is the Goals dialog box and 
each goal created earlier is listed 
above. Here you can see the current 
value and graph for each goal as 
well as the current progress towards 
completion given as a percentage. 
The progress value is only an 
estimate and the rate of progress 
generally increases with time. 
4 Click Insert Preview on the Solver toolbar.
5 This is the Preview Settings dialog box. 
Selecting any SolidWorks plane from the 
Plane name list and pressing OK will 
create a preview plot of the solution in 
that plane. For this model Plane2 is a 
good choice to use as the preview plane. 
	 The preview allows one to look at 
the results while the calculation is 
still running. This helps to 
determine if all the boundary 
conditions are correctly defined 
and gives the user an idea of how 
the solution will look even at this 
early stage. At the start of the run 
the results might look odd or 
change abruptly. However, as the run progresses these changes will lessen and the 
results will settle in on a converged solution. The result can be displayed either in 
contour-, isoline- or vector-representation. 
6 Click the Suspend button again to let the solver go on. 
7 When the solver is finished, close the monitor by clicking File, Close. 
Adjust Model Transparency 
Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Transparency 
and set the model transparency to 0.75. 
	 The first step for results is to generate a transparent view 
of the geometry, a ‘glass-body’. This way you can easily 
see where cut planes etc. are located with respect to the 
geometry. 
Cut Plots 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Cut 
Plots icon and select Insert. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-11
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-12 
2 Specify a plane. Choose Plane 2 as 
the cut plane. To do this, in the flyout 
FeatureManager design tree select 
Plane 2. 
3 Click OK . 
This is the plot you should see. 
	 A cut plot displays any result on any SolidWorks plane. 
The results may be represented as a contour plot, as 
isolines, as vectors, or as arbitrary combination of the 
above (e.g. contours with overlaid vectors). 
	 If you want to access additional options 
for this and other plots, you may either 
double-click on the color scale or right-click 
the Results icon in the Flow 
Simulation Analysis tree and select View 
Settings. 
Within the View Settings dialog box you 
have the ability to change the global 
options for each plot type. Some options 
available are: changing the parameter being displayed and the number of colors used 
for the scale. The best way to learn each of these options is thorough experimentation. 
4 Change the contour cut plot to a vector cut plot. To do 
this, right-click the Cut Plot 1 icon and select Edit 
Definition.
5 Clear Contours and select Vectors . 
6 Click OK . 
This is the plot you should see. 
	 The vectors can be made larger from the Vectors tab in 
the View Setting dialog box. The vector spacing can also 
be controlled from the Settings tab in the Cut Plot dialog 
box. Notice how the flow must navigate around the 
sharp corners on the Ball. Our design change will focus 
on this feature. 
Surface Plots 
Right-click the Cut Plot 1 icon and select Hide. 
1 Right-click the Surface Plots icon and select Insert. 
2 Select the Use all faces check box. 
	 The same basic options are available for Surface Plots 
as for Cut Plots. Feel free to experiment with different 
combinations on your own. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-13
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-14 
3 Click OK and you get the following picture: 
	 This plot shows the pressure distribution on all faces of 
the valve in contact with the fluid. You can also select 
one or more single surfaces for this plot, which do not 
have to be planar. 
Isosurface Plots 
Right-click the Surface Plot 1 icon and select Hide. 
1 Right-click the Isosurfaces icon and select Show. 
This is the plot that will appear. 
	 The Isosurface is a 3-Dimensional surface created by 
Flow Simulation at a constant value for a specific 
variable. The value and variable can be altered in the 
View Settings dialog box under the Isosurfaces tab. 
2 Right-click the Results icon and select View Settings to 
enter the dialog. 
3 Go to Isosurfaces tab. 
4 Examine the options under this dialog box. 
Try making two changes. The first is to 
click in the Use from contours so that the 
isosurface will be colored according to the 
pressure values, in the same manner as the 
contour plot. 
5 Secondly, click at a second location on the 
slide bar and notice the addition of a 
second slider. This slider can later be 
removed by dragging it all the way out of 
the dialog box. 
6 Click OK.
You should see something similar to this image. 
	 The isosurface is a useful way of determining the exact 
3D area, where the flow reaches a certain value of 
pressure, velocity or other parameter. 
Flow Trajectory Plots 
Right-click the Isosurfaces icon and select Hide. 
1 Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select Insert. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-15
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-16 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and then 
click the Static Presuure 1 item to select the inner 
face of the Lid <2>. 
3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 16.. 
4 Click OK and your model should look like the 
following: 
	 Using Flow trajectories you can show the flow 
streamlines. Flow trajectories provide a very good image 
of the 3D fluid flow. You can also see how parameters 
change along each trajectory by exporting data into 
Excel. Additionally, you can save trajectories as 
SolidWorks reference curves. 
	 For this plot we selected the outlet lid (any flat face or 
sketch can be selected) and therefore every trajectory crosses that selected face. The 
trajectories can also be colored by values of whatever variable chosen in the View 
Settings dialog box. Notice the trajectories that are entering and exiting through the
exit lid. This is the reason for the warning we received during the calculation. Flow 
Simulation warns us of inappropriate analysis conditions so that we do not need to be 
CFD experts. When flow both enters and exits the same opening, the accuracy of the 
results will worsen. In a case like this, one would typically add the next component to 
the model (say, a pipe extending the computational domain) so that the vortex does not 
occur at opening. 
XY Plots 
Right-click the Flow Trajectories 1 icon and select Hide. 
We want to plot pressure and velocity along the valve. We 
have already created a SolidWorks sketch containing 
several lines. 
This sketch work does not have to be done ahead of time 
and your sketch lines can be created after the analysis has 
finished. Take a look at Sketch1 in the FeatureManager 
design tree. 
1 Right-click the XY Plots icon and select Insert. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-17
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-18 
2 Choose Velocity and Pressure as 
physical Parameters. Select Sketch1 
from the flyout FeatureManager design 
tree. 
Leave all other options as defaults. 
3 Click OK. MS Excel will 
open and generate two 
columns of data points 
together with two charts for 
Velocity and for Pressure, 
respectively. One of these 
charts is shown below. You 
will need to toggle between 
different sheets in Excel to 
view each chart. 
	 The XY Plot allows you to 
view any result along 
sketched lines. The data is 
put directly into Excel. 
8 
7 
6 
5 
4 
3 
2 
1 
0 
-1 
0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 
Curve Length (m) 
Velocity (m/s)
Surface Parameters 
Surface Parameters is a feature used to determine pressures, forces, heat fluxes as well as 
many other variables on any face within your model contacting the fluid. For this type of 
analysis, a calculation of the average static pressure drop from the valve inlet to outlet 
would probably be of some interest. 
1 Right-click the Surface Parameters icon and select 
Insert. 
2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis 
Tree, click the Inlet Mass Flow1 item 
to select the inner face of the inlet 
Lid <1> part. 
3 Click Evaluate. 
4 Select the Local tab. 
	 The average static pressure at the inlet face 
is shown to be 128478 Pa. We already know 
that the outlet static pressure is 101325 Pa 
since we have specified it previously as a 
boundary condition. So, the average static 
pressure drop through the valve is about 
27000 Pa. 
5 Close the Surface Parameters dialog box. 
Analyze a Design Variant in the SolidWorks Ball part 
	 This section is intended to show you how easy it is to analyze design variations. The 
variations can be different geometric dimensions, new features, new parts in an 
assembly – whatever! This is the heart of Flow Simulation and this allows design 
engineers to quickly and easily determine which designs have promise, and which 
designs are unlikely to be successful. For this example, we will see how filleting two 
sharp edges will influence the pressure drop through the valve. If there is no 
improvement, it will not be worth the extra manufacturing costs. 
Create a new configuration using the SolidWorks Configuration Manager Tree. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-19
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-20 
1 Right-click the root item in the SolidWorks 
Configuration Manager and select Add 
Configuration. 
2 In the Configuration Name box type 
Project 2. 
3 Click OK . 
4 Go to FeatureManager design tree, right-click the 
Ball item and select Open Part . A new 
window Ball.SLDPRT appears. 
Create a new configuration using the SolidWorks 
Configuration Manager Tree.
1 Right-click the root item in the SolidWorks 
Configuration Manager and select Add 
Configuration. 
2 Name the new configuration as 
1,5_fillet Ball. 
3 Click OK . 
4 Add a 1,5 mm 
fillet to the 
shown face. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-21
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-22 
5 Switch back to the assembly 
window and select Yes in the 
message dialog box that appears. In 
the FeatureManager design tree 
right-click the Ball item and select 
Component Properties. 
6 At the bottom of the Component 
Properties dialog box, under 
Referenced configuration change 
the configuration of the Ball part to 
the new filleted one. 
7 Click OK to confirm and close the dialog. 
Now we have replaced the old ball with our new 
1.5_fillet Ball. All we need to do now is re-solve 
the assembly and compare the results of the two 
designs. In order to make the results comparable 
with the previous model, it would be necessary to 
adjust the valve angle to match the size of the flow 
passage of the first model. In this example, we will 
not do this. 
8 Activate Project 1 by using the 
Configuration Manager Tree. Select Yes 
for the message dialog box that appears.
Clone the Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 
2 Select Add to existing. 
3 In the Existing configuration list select Project 2. 
4 Click OK. Select Yes for each message dialog box that 
appears after you click OK. 
	 Now the Flow Simulation project we have chosen is added to the SolidWorks project 
which contains the geometry that has been changed. All our input data are copied, so 
we do not need to define our openings or goals again. The Boundary Conditions can be 
changed, deleted or added. All changes to the geometry will only be applied to this new 
configuration, so the old results are still saved. 
Please follow the previously described steps for solving and for viewing the results. 
Analyze a Design Variant in the Flow Simulation Application 
	 In the previous sections we examined how you could compare results from different 
geometries. You may also want to run the same geometry over a range of flow rates. 
This section shows how quick and easy it can be to do that kind of parametric study. 
Here we are going to change the mass flow to 0.75 kg/s. 
Activate the Project 1 configuration. 
1 Create a copy of the Project 1 project by clicking 
Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 
2 Type Project 3 for the new project name and click 
OK. 
Flow Simulation now creates a new configuration. All our input data are copied, so we do 
not need to define our openings or goals again. The Boundary Conditions can be changed, 
deleted or added. All changes to the geometry will only be applied to this new 
configuration, so the old results remain valid. After changing the inlet flow rate value to 
0.75 kg/s you would be ready to run again. Please follow the previously described steps 
for solving and for viewing the results. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-23
Chapter 1 First Steps - Ball Valve Design 
1-24 
Imagine being the designer of this ball valve. How would you make decisions concerning 
your design? If you had to determine whether the benefit of modifying the design as we 
have just done outweighted the extra costs, how would you do this? Engineers have to 
make decisions such as this every day, and Flow Simulation is a tool to help them make 
those decisions. Every engineer who is required to make design decisions involving fluid 
and heat transfer should use Flow Simulation to test their ideas, allowing for fewer 
prototypes and quicker design cycles.
2 
First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
This First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial covers the basic steps to set up a flow 
analysis problem including heat conduction in solids. This example is particularly 
pertinent to users interested in analyzing flow and heat conduction within electronics 
packages although the basic principles are applicable to all thermal problems. It is 
assumed that you have already completed the First Steps - Ball Valve Design tutorial 
since it teaches the basic principles of using Flow Simulation in greater detail. 
Open the SolidWorks Model 
1 Copy the First Steps - Electronics Cooling folder into your working directory and 
ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to 
these files. Click File, Open. 
2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM assembly 
located in the First Steps - Electronics Cooling folder and click Open (or 
double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the 
Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-1
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
Preparing the Model 
2-2 
In a typical assembly there may be many features, parts or sub-assemblies that are not 
necessary for the analysis. Prior to creating an Flow Simulation project, it is a good 
practice to check the model to find components that can be removed from the analysis. 
Excluding these components reduces the computer resources and calculation time 
required for the analysis. 
The assembly consists of the following components: enclosure, motherboard and two 
smaller PCBs, capacitors, power supply, heat sink, chips, fan, screws, fan housing, and 
lids. You can highlight these components by clicking on the them in the FeatureManager 
design tree. In this tutorial we will simulate the fan by specifying a Fan boundary 
condition on the inner face of the inlet lid. The fan has a very complex geometry that may 
cause delays while rebuilding the model. Since it is outside the enclosure, we can exclude 
it by suppressing it. 
1 In the FeatureManager design tree, select 
the Fan-412, and all Screws components 
(to select more than one component, hold 
down the Ctrl key while you select). 
2 Right-click any of the selected 
components and select Suppress .. 
Inlet Fan 
PCBs 
Small Chips 
Main Chip 
Capacitors 
Power Supply 
Mother Board 
Heat Sink
Suppressing fan and its screws leaves open five holes in the enclosure. We are going to 
perform an internal analysis, so all holes must be closed with lids. It can be done with 
the lid creation tool avalilable under Flow Simulation, Tools, Create Lids. 
To save your time, we created the lids and included them to the model. You just need to 
unsupress them.. 
3 In the FeatureManager design tree, 
select the Inlet Lid, Outlet Lid and 
Screwhole Lid components and 
patterns DerivedLPattern1 and 
LocalLPattern1 (these patterns contain 
cloned copies of the outlet and 
screwhole lids). 
4 Right-click any of the selected 
components and select 
Unsuppress . 
Now you can start with Flow Simulation. 
Create a Flow Simulation Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 
2 Once inside the Wizard, select Create new 
in order to create a new configuration and 
name it Inlet Fan. 
Click Next. 
Now we will create a new system of units 
named USA Electronics that is better 
suited for our analysis. 
3 In the Unit system list select the USA 
system of units. Select Create new to 
add a new system of units to the 
Engineering Database and name it 
USA Electronics. 
	 Flow Simulation allows you to work with 
several pre-defined unit systems but often 
it is more convenient to define your own 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-3
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-4 
custom unit system. Both pre-defined and custom unit systems are stored in the 
Engineering Database. You can create the desired system of units in the Engineering 
Database or in the Wizard. 
	 By scrolling through the different groups in the Parameter tree you can see the units 
selected for all the parameters. Although most of the parameters have convenient units 
such as ft/s for velocity and CFM (cubic feet per minute) for volume flow rate we will 
change a couple units that are more convenient for this model. Since the physical size 
of the model is relatively small it is more convenient to choose inches instead of feet as 
the length unit. 
4 For the Length entry, double-click its cell 
in the Units column and select Inch. 
5 Next expand the Heat group in the 
Parameter tree. 
Since we are dealing with electronic 
components it is more convenient to 
specify Total heat flow and power and 
Heat flux in Watt and Watt/m2 
respectively. 
Click Next. 
6 Set the analysis type to Internal. Under 
Physical Features select the Heat 
conduction in solids check box. 
	 Heat conduction in solids was selected 
because heat is generated by several 
electronics components and we are 
interested to see how the heat is dissipated 
through the heat sink and other solid parts 
and then out to the fluid. 
Click Next.
7 Expand the Gases folder and double-click 
Air row. Keep default Flow 
Characteristics. 
Click Next. 
8 Expand the Alloys folder and click Steel 
Stainless 321 to assign it as a Default 
solid. 
	 In the Wizard you specify the default solid 
material applied to all solid components 
in the Flow Simulation project. To specify 
a different solid material for one or more 
components, you can define a Solid 
Material condition for these components 
after the project is created. 
Click Next. 
9 Select Heat transfer coefficient as 
Default outer wall thermal condition and 
specify the Heat transfer coefficient 
value of 5.5 W/m^2/K and External fluid 
temperature of 50°F. The entered value 
of heat transfer coefficient is 
automatically coverted to the selected 
system of units (USA Electronics). 
	 In the Wall Conditons dialog box of the 
Wizard you specify the default conditions 
at the model walls. When Heat 
conduction in solids is enabled, the Default outer wall thermal condition 
parameter allows you to simulate heat exchange between the outer model walls and 
surrounding environment. In our case the box is located in an air-conditioned room 
with the air temperature of 50°F and heat transfer through the outer walls of the 
enclosure due to the convection in the room can significantly contribute to the 
enclosure cooling. 
Click Next. 
Although the initial temperature is more important for transient calculations to see how 
much time it takes to reach a certain temperature, in a steady-state analysis it is useful 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-5
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-6 
to set the initial temperature close to the anticipated final solution to speed up 
convergence. In this case we will set the initial air temperature and the initial 
temperature of the stainless steel (which represents the material of enclosure) to 50°F 
because the box is located in an air-conditioned room. 
10 Set the initial fluid Temperature and the 
Initial solid temperature to 50°F. 
Click Next. 
11 Accept the default for the Result 
resolution and keep the automatic 
evaluation of the Minimum gap size and 
Minimum wall thickness. 
	 Flow Simulation calculates the default 
minimum gap size and minimum wall 
thickness using information about the 
overall model dimensions, the 
computational domain, and faces on which 
you specify conditions and goals. Prior to 
starting the calculation, we recommend that you check the minimum gap size and 
minimum wall thickness to ensure that small features will be recognized. We will 
review these again after all the necessary conditions and goals will be specified. 
Click Finish. Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow 
Simulation data attached. 
	 We will use the Flow Simulation Analysis tree to define our analysis, just as the 
FeatureManager design tree is used to design your models. 
Right-click the Computational Domain icon and select 
Hide to hide the wireframe box. 
Define the Fan 
	 A Fan is a type of flow boundary condition. You can specify Fans at selected solid 
surfaces, free of Boundary Conditions and Sources. At model openings closed by lids 
you can specify Inlet or Outlet Fans. You can also specify fans on any faces within the
flow region as Internal Fans. A Fan is considered as an ideal device creating a flow 
with a certain volume (or mass) flow rate, which depends on the difference between the 
inlet and outlet pressures on the selected faces. 
If you analyze a model with a fan, you sholud know the fan's characteristics. In this 
example we use one of the pre-defined fans available in the Engineering Database. If you 
cannot find an appropriate fan in the Engineering Database, you can create your own fan in 
accordance with the fan’s specification. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Fan. The Fan dialog box appears. 
2 Select the inner face of the Inlet 
Lid part as shown. (To access 
the inner face, right-click the 
Inlet Lid in the graphics area 
and choose Select Other, hover 
the pointer over items in the list 
of features until the inner face is 
highlighted, then click the left 
mouse button). 
3 Select External Inlet Fan as fan 
Type. 
4 In the Fan list select the Papst 
412 item under Pre-Defined, Axial, Papst. 
5 Under Thermodynamic Parameters check that the 
Ambient Pressure is the atmospheric pressure. 
6 Accept Face Coordinate System as the reference 
Coordinate System . 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-7
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-8 
	 Face coordinate system is created automatically in the center of a planar face when 
you select this face as the face to apply the boundary condition or fan. The X axis of 
this coordinate system is normal to the face. The Face coordinate system is created 
when only one planar face is selected. 
7 Accept X as the Reference axis. 
8 Click OK . The new Fans folder and the External 
Inlet Fan 1 item appear in the Flow Simulation Analysis 
tree. 
	 Now you can edit the External Inlet Fan1 item or add a new fan 
using Flow Simulation Analysis tree. This folder remains visible 
until the last feature of this type is deleted. You can also make a 
feature’s folder to be initially available in the tree. Right-click the 
project name item and select Customize Tree to add or remove 
folders. 
	 Since the outlet lids of the enclosure are at ambient atmospheric pressure, the pressure 
rise produced by the fan is equal to the pressure drop through the electronics 
enclosure. 
Define the Boundary Conditions 
A boundary condition is required at any place where fluid enters or exits the model, 
excluding openings where a fan is specified. A boundary condition can be set in form of 
Pressure, Mass Flow, Volume Flow or Velocity. You can also use the Boundary 
Condition dialog for specifying an Ideal Wall condition that is an adiabatic, frictionless 
wall or a Real Wall condition to set the wall roughness and/or temperature and/or heat 
conduction coefficient at the model surfaces. For internal analyses with Heat conduction 
in solids enabled, you can also set thermal wall condition on outer model walls by 
specifying an Outer Wall condition. 
1 In the Flow Simulation analysis tree, right-click the 
Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert 
Boundary Condition.
2 Select the inner faces of all outlet 
lids as shown. 
3 Select Pressure Openings 
and Environment Pressure. 
4 Click OK . The new Environment Pressure 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
	 The Environment pressure condition is interpreted as a 
static pressure for outgoing flows and as a total pressure 
for incoming flows. 
Define the Heat Source 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Volume Source. 
2 Select the Main Chip from the 
flyout FeatureManager design 
tree tree as the component to 
apply the volume source. 
3 Select the Heat Generation 
Rate as Parameter. 
4 Enter 5 W in the Heat Generation Rate box. 
5 Click OK . 
6 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree click-pause-click the 
new VS Heat Generation Rate 1 item and rename it to 
Main Chip. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-9
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-10 
	 Volume Heat Sources allow you to specify the heat generation rate (in Watts) or the 
volumetric heat generation rate (in Watts per volume) or a constant temperature 
boundary condition for the volume. It is also possible to specify Surface Heat Sources 
in terms of heat transfer rate (in Watts) or heat flux (in Watts per area). 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection. 
1 In the Flow Simulation analysis tree, right-click the Heat Sources icon and select 
Insert Volume Source. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager 
design tree select all Capacitor 
components. 
3 Select Temperature and 
enter 100 °F in the Temperature 
box. 
4 Click OK . 
5 Click-pause-click the new VS 
Temperature 1 item and rename 
it to Capacitors. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
6 Following the same procedure as 
above, set the following volume 
heat sources: all chips on PCBs 
(Small Chip) with the total heat 
generation rate of 4 W, 
Power Supply with 
the temperature of 120 °F. 
7 Rename the source applied to the chips to Small Chips and 
the source for the power supply to Power Supply. 
Click File, Save. 
Create a New Material 
The real PCBs are made of laminate materials consisting of several layers of thin metal 
conductor interleaved with layers of epoxy resin dielectric. As for most laminate 
materials, the properties of a typical PCB material can vary greatly depending on the 
direction - along or across the layers, i.e. they are anisotropic. The Engineering Database 
contains some predefined PCB materials with anisotropic thermal conductivity. 
In this tutorial example anisotropic thermal conductivity of PCBs does not affect the 
overall cooling performance much, so we will create a PCB material having the same 
thermal conductivity in all directions to learn how to add a new material to Engineering 
Database and assign it to a part. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-11
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-12 
2 In the Database tree select Materials, Solids, User Defined. 
3 Click New Item on the toolbar. 
The blank Item Properties tab appears. Double-click the 
empty cells to set the corresponding properties values. 
4 Specify the material properties 
as follows: 
Name = Tutorial PCB, 
Comments = Isotropic PCB, 
Density = 1120 kg/m^3, 
Specific heat = 1400 J/(kg*K), 
Conductivity type = Isotropic 
Thermal conductivity = 10 W/(m*K), 
Melting temperature = 390 K. 
We also need to add a new material simulating thermal conductivity and other thermal 
properties of the chips material. 
5 Switch to the Items tab and click New Item on the toolbar. 
6 Specify the properties 
of the chips material: 
Name = Tutorial 
component package, 
Comments = 
Component package, 
Density = 2000 kg/m^3, 
Specific heat = 120 J/(kg*K), 
Conductivity type = Isotropic 
Thermal conductivity = 0.4 W/(m*K), 
Melting temperature = 1688.2 K. 
7 Click Save . 
8 Click File, Exit to exit the database.
You can enter the material properties in any unit system you want by typing the unit 
name after the value and Flow Simulation will automatically convert the entered value 
to the SI system of units. You can also specify temperature dependent material 
properties using the Tables and Curves tab. 
Define the Solid Materials 
Solid Materials are used to specify the materials for solid parts in the assembly. 
1 Right-click the Solid Materials icon and select Insert Solid Material. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager 
design tree select 
MotherBoard, PCB<1> and 
PCB<2> components. 
3 In the Solid list expand User 
Defined and select Tutorial 
PCB. 
4 Click OK . 
5 Following the same procedure, specify solid materials for other components: 
• for the main chip and all small chips assign the new Tutorial component package 
material (available under User Defined); 
• the heat sink is made of Aluminum (available under Pre-Defined, Metals); 
• the lids (Inlet Lid, Outlet Lid, Screwhole Lid and all lids in both the 
DerivedLPattern1 and LocalLPattern1 patterns) are made of the Insulator 
material (available under Pre-Defined, Glasses and Minerals). 
To select a part, click it in the FeatureManager design tree or SolidWorks graphics 
area. 
6 Change the name of each assigned solid material. The new, 
descriptive names should be: 
PCB - Tutorial PCB, 
Chips - Tutorial component package, 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-13
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-14 
Heat Sink - Aluminum, 
Lids - Insulator. 
Click File, Save. 
Define the Engineering Goals 
Specifying Volume Goals 
1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Volume 
Goals. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager design 
tree select all Small Chip 
components. 
3 In the Parameter table select the 
Max check box in the Temperature 
of Solid row. 
4 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use 
for Convergence Control) check 
box to use this goal for convergence 
control. 
5 Click OK . The new VG Max 
Temperature of Solid 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation 
Analysis tree.
6 Change the name of the new item to 
VG Small Chips Max Temperature. You 
can also change the name of the item using the 
Feature Properties dialog that appears if you 
right-click the item and select Properties. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the 
selection. 
7 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert 
Volume Goals. 
8 Select the Main Chip item in the 
flyout FeatureManager design tree. 
9 In the Parameter table select the 
Max check box in the Temperature 
of Solid row. 
10 Click OK . 
11 Rename the new VG Max 
Temperature of Solid 1 item to 
VG Chip Max Temperature. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area 
to clear the selection. 
Specifying Surface Goals 
1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface 
Goals. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-15
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-16 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab 
and click the External Inlet Fan 1 item to 
select the face where the goal is going to be 
applied. 
3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box 
in the Static Pressure row. 
4 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for 
Convergence Control) check box to use this 
goal for convergence control. 
	 For the X(Y, Z) - Component of Force and X(Y, 
Z) - Component of Torque surface goals you 
can select the Coordinate system in which these 
goals will be calculated. 
5 Under Name Template, located at the bottom 
of the PropertyManager, click Inlet and then remove 
the <Number> field from the Name Template box. 
6 Click OK . The new SG Inlet Av Static Pressure goal 
appears. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
7 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert 
Surface Goals. 
8 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab 
and click the Environment Pressure 1 item to 
select the faces where the goal is going to be 
applied. 
9 In the Parameter table select the first check 
box in the Mass Flow Rate row. 
10 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for 
Convergence Control) check box to use this 
goal for convergence control. 
11 Under Name Template, located at the bottom 
of the PropertyManager, click Outlet and 
then remove the <Number> field from the 
Name Template. 
12 Click OK - the SG Outlet Mass Flow Rate goal appears. 
Specifying Global Goals 
1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Global Goals. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-17
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-18 
2 In the Parameter table select the Av 
check boxes in the Static Pressure and 
Temperature of Fluid rows and accept 
selected Use for Conv. (Use for 
Convergence Control) check box to use 
these goals for convergence control. 
3 Remove the <Number> field from the 
Name Template and click OK - GG Av 
Static Pressure and GG Av Temperature of 
Fluid goals appear. 
In this tutorial the engineering goals are set to determine the maximum temperature of the 
heat generating components, the temperature rise in air and the pressure drop and mass 
flow rate through the enclosure. 
Click File, Save. 
Next let us check the automatically defined geometry resolution settings for this project.
Changing the Geometry Resolution 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 
2 Select the Manual specification of the 
minimum gap size check box. 
3 Enter 0.1 in for the Minimum gap size (i.e. passage 
between the fins of the heat sink). 
	 Entering values for the minimum gap size and minimum 
wall thickness is important when you have small 
features. Setting these values accurately ensures that 
the small features are not "passed over" by the mesh. 
The minimum wall thickness should be specified only if there are fluid cells on either 
side of a small solid feature. In case of internal analyses, there are no fluid cells in the 
ambient space outside of the enclosure. Therefore boundaries between internal flow 
and ambient space are always resolved properly. That is why you should not take into 
account the walls of the steel cabinet. Both the minimum gap size and the minimum 
wall thickness are tools that help you to create a model-adaptive mesh resulting in 
increased accuracy. However the minimum gap size setting is the more powerful one. 
The fact is that the Flow Simulation mesh is constructed so that the specified Level of 
initial mesh controls the minimum number of mesh cells per minimum gap size. And 
this number is equal to or greater than the number of mesh cells generated per 
minimum wall thickness. That's why even if you have a thin solid feature inside the 
flow region it is not necessary to specify minimum wall thickness if it is greater than or 
equal to the minimum gap size. Specifying the minimum wall thickness is necessary if 
you want to resolve thin walls smaller than the smallest gap. 
Click OK. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-19
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
Solution 
2-20 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 
2 Click Run. 
The solver takes about twenty to thirty minutes to 
run on a typical PC. 
	 You may notice that different goals take different 
number of iterations to converge. 
The goal-oriented philosophy of Flow Simulation 
allows you to get the answers you need in the shortest amount of time. 
For example, if you were only interested in the temperature of fluid in the enclosure, 
Flow Simulation would have provided the result more quickly then if the solver was 
allowed to fully converge on all of the parameters. 
Viewing the Goals 
1 Right-click the Goals icon under Results and select Insert. 
2 Click Add All in the Goals dialog. 
3 Click OK.
An Excel spreadsheet with the goal results will open. The first sheet will show a table 
summarizing the goals. 
Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM [Inlet Fan (original)] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence 
GG Av Static Pressure [lbf/in^2] 14.69678696 14.69678549 14.69678314 14.69678772 100 Yes 
SG Inlet Av Static Pressure [lbf/in^2] 14.69641185 14.69641047 14.69640709 14.69641418 100 Yes 
GG Av Temperature of Fluid [°F] 61.7814683 61.76016724 61.5252449 61.86764155 100 Yes 
SG Outlet Mass Flow Rate [lb/s] -0.007306292 -0.007306111 -0.007306913 -0.007303663 100 Yes 
VG Small Chips Max Temp [°F] 91.5523903 90.97688632 90.09851988 91.5523903 100 Yes 
VG Chip Max Temperature [°F] 88.51909612 88.43365626 88.29145322 88.57515562 100 Yes 
You can see that the maximum temperature in the main chip is about 88 °F, and the 
maximum temperature over the small chips is about 91 °F. 
	 Goal progress bar is a qualitative and quantitative characteristic of the goal 
convergence process. When Flow Simulation analyzes the goal convergence, it 
calculates the goal dispersion defined as the difference between the maximum and 
minimum goal values over the analysis interval reckoned from the last iteration and 
compares this dispersion with the goal's convergence criterion dispersion, either 
specified by you or automatically determined by Flow Simulation as a fraction of the 
goal's physical parameter dispersion over the computational domain. The percentage 
of the goal's convergence criterion dispersion to the goal's real dispersion over the 
analysis interval is shown in the goal's convergence progress bar (when the goal's real 
dispersion becomes equal or smaller than the goal's convergence criterion dispersion, 
the progress bar is replaced by word "Achieved"). Naturally, if the goal's real 
dispersion oscillates, the progress bar oscillates also, moreover, when a hard problem 
is solved, it can noticeably regress, in particular from the "achieved" level. The 
calculation can finish if the iterations (in travels) required for finishing the calculation 
have been performed, or if the goal convergence criteria are satisfied before 
performing the required number of iterations. You can specify other finishing 
conditions at your discretion. 
To analyze the results in more detail let us use the various Flow Simulation 
post-processing tools. The best method for the visualization of how the fluid flows inside 
the enclosure is to create flow trajectories. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-21
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
Flow Trajectories 
2-22 
1 Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select 
Insert. 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and 
then click the External Inlet Fan1 item to select 
the inner face of the Inlet Lid. 
3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 200. 
4 Keep Reference in the Start Points group. 
	 If Reference is selected, then the trajectory start 
points are taken from the specified face. 
5 Under Options set Draw Trajectories As to 
Bands. 
6 Click View Settings. 
7 In the View Settings dialog box, change the 
Parameter from Pressure to Velocity. 
8 Go to the Flow Trajectories tab and notice 
that the Use from contours option is 
selected.
This setting defines how trajectories are 
colored. If Use from contours is selected 
then the trajectories are colored with the 
distribution of the parameter specified on 
the Contours tab (Velocity in our case). If 
you select Use fixed color then all flow 
trajectories have the same color that you 
specify on the Settings tab of the Flow 
Trajectories dialog box. 
9 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. 
10 In the Flow Trajectories dialog click OK . The new Flow Trajectories 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
This is the picture you should see. 
Notice that there are only a few 
trajectories along the adjacent to the wall 
PCB<2> and this may cause problems 
with cooling of the chips placed on this 
PCB. Additionally the blue color 
indicates low velocity in front of this 
PCB<2> . 
Right-click the Flow Trajectories 1 item 
and select Hide. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the 
selection. 
Let us examine the velocity distribution in more 
detail. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-23
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
Cut Plots 
2-24 
1 Right-click the Cut Plots icon and select Insert. 
2 Keep the Front plane as the section plane. 
3 Click View Settings. 
4 Change the Min and Max values to 0 and 
10 respectively. The specified integer 
values produce a palette where it is more 
easy to determine the value. 
5 Set the Number of colors to about 30. 
6 Click OK. 
7 In the Cut Plot dialog box click OK . 
The new Cut Plot 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
8 Select the Top view on the Standard Views toolbar.
Let us now look at the fluid temperature. 
9 Double-click the palette bar in the upper left corner of the graphics area. The 
View Settings dialog appears. 
10 Change the Parameter from Velocity to Fluid Temperature. 
11 Change the Min and Max values to 50 and 
120 respectively. 
12 Click the Vectors tab and change the 
Arrow size to 0.2 by typing the value in the 
box under the slider. 
	 Notice that you can specify a value that is 
outside of the slider's range. 
13 Set the Max value to 1 ft/s. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-25
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-26 
	 By specifying the custom Min and Max values you can control the vector length. The 
vectors whose velocity exceeds the specified Max value will have the same length as 
the vectors whose velocity is equal to Max. Likewise, the vectors whose velocity is less 
than the specified Min value will have the same length as the vectors whose velocity is 
equal to Min. We have set 1 ft/s to display areas of low velocity. 
14 Click OK. 
15 Right-click the Cut Plot 1 item and select Edit 
Definition. 
16 Click Vectors 
17 Change the Offset to -0.30 in. 
18 Expand the Vectors group box. Using the slider set the 
Vector Spacing to ~ 0.18 in. 
19 Click OK .
Right-click the Cut Plot 1 item and select Hide. Let us now display solid temperature. 
Surface Plots 
1 Right-click the Surface Plots item and select Insert. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-27
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-28 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree click the Main 
Chip, Heat Sink and all Small Chip components to select 
their surfaces. 
3 Click View Settings. 
4 In the View Settings dialog box, change 
the Parameter to Solid Temperature. 
5 Change the Min and Max values to 50 and 
120 respectively. 
6 Click OK. 
7 In the Surface Plot dialog box click OK . The creation of the surface plot may 
take some time because many faces need to be colored. 
8 Repeat steps 1 and 2 and select the Power Supply and all Capacitors components, 
then click OK . 
9 On the View toolbar click Wireframe to show the face outlines.
You can view and analyze the results further with the post-processing tools that were 
shown in the First Steps - Ball Valve Design tutorial. Flow Simulation allows you to 
quickly and easily investigate your design both quantitatively and qualitatively. 
Quantitative results such as the maximum temperature in the component, pressure drop 
through the cabinet, and air temperature rise will allow you to determine whether the 
design is acceptable or not. By viewing qualitative results such as air flow patterns, and 
heat conduction patterns in the solid, Flow Simulation gives you the necessary insight to 
locate problem areas or weaknesses in your design and provides guidance on how to 
improve or optimize the design. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-29
Chapter 2 First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 
2-30
3 
First Steps - Porous Media 
In this tutorial we consider flow in a section of an automobile exhaust pipe, whose exhaust 
flow is resisted by two porous bodies serving as catalysts for transforming harmful carbon 
monoxide into carbon dioxide. When designing an automobile catalytic converter, the 
engineer faces a compromise between minimizing the catalyst's resistance to the exhaust 
flow while maximizing the catalyst's internal surface area and duration that the exhaust 
gases are in contact with that surface area. Therefore, a more uniform distribution of the 
exhaust mass flow rate over the catalyst's cross sections favors its serviceability. The 
porous media capabilities of Flow Simulation are used to simulate each catalyst, which 
allows you to model the volume that the catalyst occupies as a distributed resistance 
instead of discretely modeling all of the individual passages within the catalyst, which 
would be impractical or even impossible. Here, as a Flow Simulation tutorial example we 
consider the influence of the catalysts' porous medium permeability type (isotropic and 
unidirectional media of the same resistance to flow) on the exhaust mass flow rate 
distribution over the catalysts' cross sections. We will observe the latter through the 
behavior of the exhaust gas flow trajectories distributed uniformly over the model's inlet 
and passing through the porous catalysts. Additionally, by coloring the flow trajectories 
by the flow velocity the exhaust gas residence time in the porous catalysts can be 
estimated, which is also important from the catalyst effectiveness viewpoint. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-1
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
Open the SolidWorks Model 
3-2 
1 Click File, Open. 
2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the 
Catalyst.SLDASM assembly located in 
the First Steps - Porous Media folder 
and click Open (or double-click the 
assembly). Alternatively, you can drag 
and drop the Catalyst.SLDASM file to 
an empty area of SolidWorks window. 
Create a Flow Simulation Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 
Once inside the Wizard, select Create 
new in order to create a new 
configuration and name it Isotropic. 
The project Wizard guides you through the definition of the project’s properties 
step-by-step. Except for two steps (steps to define the project fluids and default solid), 
each step has some pre-defined values, so you can either accept these values (skipping 
the step by clicking Next) or modify them to your needs. 
These pre-defined settings are: 
unit system – SI, 
analysis type – internal, no additional physical capabilities are considered, 
wall condition – adiabatic wall 
initial conditions – pressure - 1 atm, temperature - 293.2 K. 
result and geometry resolution – level 3, 
For this project these default settings suit perfectly and all what we need to do is just to 
select Air as the project fluid. To avoid passing through all steps we will use Navigator 
pane that provides a quick access to the Wizard’s pages. 
2 Click an arrow at the right. 
Inlet 
Outlet 
Porous catalysts
3 In the Navigator pane click 
Fluids. 
4 Open the Gases folder, click 
Air, then click Add. 
5 Since we do not need to change other properties we can close the Wizard. 
Click Finish in the Navigator pane. 
	 You can click Finish at any moment, but if you attempt to close Wizard without 
specifying all obligatory properties (such as project fluds), the Wizard will not close 
and the page where you need to define a missing property will be marked by the 
exclamation icon . 
Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow Simulation data 
attached. 
In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Computational Domain icon and 
select Hide to hide the black wireframe box. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-3
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
Define the Boundary Conditions 
3-4 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, 
right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. 
2 Select the inner face of the inlet lid as shown. 
3 Select Flow Openings and Inlet Velocity. 
4 Set the Velocity Normal to Face to 10 m/s. 
5 Click OK . 
	 With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation 
that at this opening air is flowing into the catalyst with a 
velocity of 10 m/s.
6 Select the inner face of the outlet lid as shown. 
7 Right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. 
8 Select Pressure Openings and Static 
Pressure. 
9 Click OK . 
	 With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation 
that at this opening the fluid exits the model to an area of 
static atmospheric pressure. 
Now we can specify porous media in this project. To define a porous medium, first we 
need to specify the porous medium’s properties (porosity, permeability type, etc.) in the 
Engineering Database and then apply the porous medium to a component in the 
assembly. 
Create an Isotropic Porous Medium 
The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under 
the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of porous material and select the 
pre-defined "Isotropic" material from the Engineering database when you will assign the 
porous material to a component later in this tutorial. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 
2 In the Database tree select Porous Media, 
User Defined. 
3 Click New Item on the toolbar. The blank Item Properties tab 
appears. Double-click the empty cells to set the corresponding 
property values. 
4 Name the new porous medium Isotropic. 
5 Under Comment, click the button and type the desired comments for this porous 
medium. The Comment property is optional, you can leave this field blank. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-5
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-6 
6 Set the medium’s Porosity to 0.5. 
	 Porosity is the effective porosity of the porous medium, defined as the volume fraction 
of the interconnected pores with respect to the total porous medium volume; here, the 
porosity is equal to 0.5. The porosity will govern the exhaust flow velocity in the porous 
medium channels, which, in turn, governs the exhaust gas residence in the porous 
catalyst and, therefore, the catalyst efficiency. 
7 Choose Isotropic as the Permeability type. 
	 First of all let us consider an Isotropic permeability, i.e, a medium with permeability 
not depending on the direction within the medium. Then, as an alternative, we will 
consider a Unidirectional permeability, i.e., the medium permeable in one direction 
only. 
8 Choose Pressure drop, Flowrate, Dimensions as the Resistance calculation 
formula. 
	 For our media we select the Pressure Drop, Flowrate, Dimensions medium 
resistance to flow, i.e., specify the porous medium resistance as k = ΔP×S /(m×L) (in 
units of s-1), where the right-side parameters are referred to a tested parallelepiped 
sample of the porous medium, having the S cross-sectional area and the L length in the 
selected sample direction, in which the mass flow rate through the sample is equal to m 
under the pressure difference of ΔP between the sample opposite sides in this 
direction. 
In this project we will specify ΔP = 20 Pa at m = 0.01 kg/s (and ΔP = 0 Pa at 
m=0 kg/s), S = 0.01 m2, L = 0.1m. Therefore, k = 200 s-1. 
Knowing S and L of the catalyst inserted into the model and m of the flow through it, 
you can approximately estimate the pressure loss at the model catalyst from 
ΔP = k×m×L/S. 
9 For the Pressure drop vs. 
flowrate choose Mass Flow 
Rate. Click the button to 
switch to the Tables and 
Curves tab.
10 In the Property table specify the 
linear dependency of pressure drop 
vs. mass flow rate as shown. 
11 Go back to the Item Properties tab. 
12 Set Length to 0.1 m and Area to 
0.01 m2. 
13 Click Save . 
14 Click File, Exit to exit the database. 
Now we will apply the specified porous 
medium to the model components 
representing the porous bodies. 
A porous medium can be applied only to 
a component that is not treated by Flow Simulation as a solid. To consider a model’s 
component as not belonging to a solid region, you need to disable the component in the 
Component Control dialog box. Components are automatically disabled when you assign 
a porous media to them by creating the Porous Medium condition, so you do not need to 
disable them manually. 
Define the Porous Medium - Isotropic Type 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Porous Medium. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager 
design tree select the 
Monolith<1> and Monolith<2> 
components. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-7
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-8 
3 Expand the list of the User Defined porous media and 
select Isotropic. If you skipped the definition of porous 
medium, use the Isotropic material available under 
Pre-Defined. 
4 Click OK to complete the definition of porous 
media and exit the Porous Medium dialog. 
To obtain the total pressure drop between the model inlet and 
outlet we will set an Equation Goal. For this, we need to 
specify the corresponding Surface Goals first. 
Specifying Surface Goals 
1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface 
Goals.
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab 
and click the Inlet Velocity 1 item to select the 
inner face of the inlet lid. 
3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box 
in the Total Pressure row. 
4 Accept the selected Use for Conv. (Use for 
Convergence Control) check box to use this 
goal for convergence control. 
5 Under Name Template, located at the bottom 
of the PropertyManager, click Inlet . 
6 Click OK - the new 
SG Inlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal 
appears. 
7 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-9
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-10 
8 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab 
and click the Static Pressure 1 item to select 
the inner face of the outlet lid. 
9 In the Parameter table select the Av check box 
in the Total Pressure row. 
10 Accept the selected Use for Conv. (Use for 
Convergence Control) check box to use this 
goal for convergence control. 
11 Under Name Template, located at the bottom 
of the PropertyManager, click Outlet . 
12 Click OK - the new 
SG Outlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal 
appears. 
Define the Equation Goal 
	 Equation Goal is a goal defined by an analytical function of the existing goals and/or 
parameters of input data conditions. This goal can be viewed as equation goal during 
the calculation and while displaying results in the same way as the other goals. As 
variables, you can use any of the specified goals, including another equation goals, 
except for goals that are dependent on other equation goals, and parameters of the 
specified project’s input data features (general initial or ambient conditions, boundary 
conditions, fans, heat sources, local initial conditions). You can also use constants in 
the definition of the equation goal.
1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Equation 
Goal. 
2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select the 
SG Inlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal. It appears in the Expression box. 
3 Click the minus "-" button in the calculator. 
4 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select the SG Outlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal. 
	 You can use goals (including previously specified Equation Goals), parameters of 
input data conditions and constants in the expression defining an Equation Goal. If the 
constants in the expression represent some physical parameters (i.e. length, area, etc.), 
make sure that they are specified in the project’s system of units. Flow Simulation has 
no information about the physical meaning of the constants you use, so you need to 
specify the Equation Goal dimensionality by yourself. 
5 Keep the default Pressure & Stress in the Dimensionality list. 
6 Click OK. The new Equation Goal 1 
item appears in the tree. 
Solution 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 
2 Click Run. 
After the calculation has finished, close the Monitor 
dialog box. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-11
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
Viewing the Goals 
3-12 
1 Right-click the Goals icon under Results and select Insert. 
2 Select the Equation Goal 1 in the Goals 
dialog box. 
3 Click OK. 
An Excel spreadsheet with the goal results will 
open. The first sheet will contain a table 
presenting the final values of the goal. 
You can see that the total pressure drop is about 120 Pa. 
Catalyst.SLDASM [Isotropic] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence 
Equation Goal 1 [Pa] 120.0326909 121.774802 120.0326909 124.432896 100 Yes 
To see the non-uniformity of the mass flow rate distribution over a catalyst’s cross section, 
we will display flow trajectories with start points distributed uniformly across the inlet.
Flow Trajectories 
1 Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select 
Insert. 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and then 
click the Inlet Velocity 1 item. This selects the inner 
face of the inlet lid. 
3 Under Options set Draw Trajectories As to 
Bands. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-13
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-14 
4 Click View Settings. 
5 In the View Settings dialog box, change the 
Parameter from Pressure to Velocity. 
6 Set the Max value to 12. 
7 Click OK to save the changes and exit the 
View Settings dialog box. 
8 In the Flow Trajectories dialog click OK . 
To see trajectories inside the porous media we will apply some transparency to the model. 
9 Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Transparency 
and set the model transparency to 0.75. 
This is the picture you should see. 
To compare the effectiveness of a unidirectional porous catalyst to an isotropic catalyst, let 
us calculate the project with a porous medium of unidirectional type. 
Clone the Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project.
2 Enter Unidirectional as the Configuration name. 
3 Click OK. 
Create a Unidirectional Porous Medium 
The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under 
the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of porous material and select the 
pre-defined "Unidirectional" material from the Engineering database when you will assign 
the porous material to a component later in this tutorial. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 
2 In the Database tree select Porous Media, User Defined. 
3 On the Items tab select the Isotropic item. 
4 Click Copy . 
5 Click Paste . The new Copy of Isotropic (1) item appears in the list. 
6 Select the Copy of 
Isotropic (1) item and click the 
Item Properties tab. 
7 Rename the item to 
Unidirectional. 
8 Change the Permeability type 
to Unidirectional. 
9 Save the database and exit. 
Now we can apply the new porous medium to the monoliths. 
Define the Porous Medium - Unidirectional Type 
1 Right-click the Porous Medium 1 icon and select Edit Definition. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-15
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-16 
2 Expand the list of User Defined porous medium and 
select Unidirectional. If you skipped the definition of the 
unidirectional porous medium, use the Unidirectional 
material available under Pre-Defined. 
3 In the Direction select the Z axis of the Global 
Coordinate System. 
	 For porous media having unidirectional permeability, we 
must specify the permeability direction as an axis of the 
selected coordinate system (axis Z of the Global 
coordinate system in our case). 
4 Click OK . 
Since all other conditions and goals remain the same, we can 
start the calculation immediately 
Compare the Isotropic and Unidirectional Catalysts 
When the calculation is finished, create the goal plot for the Equation Goal 1. 
Catalyst.SLDASM [Unidirectional] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence 
Equation Goal 1 [Pa] 117.0848512 118.6235708 117.0761518 121.5639633 100 Yes 
Display flow trajectories as described above. 
Comparing the trajectories passing through the isotropic and unidirectional porous 
catalysts installed in the tube, we can summarize:
Due to the asymmetric position of the inlet tube with respect to the larger tube in which 
the catalyst bodies are installed, the incoming flow is non-uniform. Since the incoming 
flow is non-uniform, the flow inside the first catalyst body is non-uniform also. It is seen 
that the catalyst type (isotropic or unidirectional) affects both the incoming flow 
non-uniformity (slightly) and, more substantially, the flow within the catalysts (especially 
the first catalyst body). In both the cases the gas stream mainly enters the first catalyst 
body-closer to the wall opposite to the inlet tube. For the isotropic case, the gas flows into 
the first body nearer to the wall than for the case of the unidirectional catalyst. As a result, 
the flow in the initial (about one-third of the body length) portion of the first catalyst body 
is noticeably more non-uniform in the isotropic catalyst. Nevertheless, due to the isotropic 
permeability, the main gas stream expands in the isotropic catalyst and occupies a larger 
volume in the next part of the body than in the unidirectional catalyst, which, due to its 
unidirectional permeability, prevents the stream from expanding. So, the flow in the last 
two-thirds of the first catalyst body is less non-uniform in the isotropic catalyst. Since the 
distance between the two porous bodies installed in the tube is rather small, the gas stream 
has no time to become more uniform in the volume between the catalyst bodies, although 
in the unidirectional case a certain motion towards uniformity is perceptible. As a result, 
the flow non-uniformity occurring at the first catalyst body's exit passes to the second 
catalyst body. Then, it is seen that the flow non-uniformity does not change within the 
second catalyst body. 
Let us now consider the flow velocity inside the catalyst. This is easy to do since the flow 
trajectories' colors indicate the flow velocity value in accordance with the specified 
palette. To create the same conditions for comparing the flow velocities in the isotropic 
and unidirectional catalysts, we have to specify the same velocity range for the palette in 
both the cases, since the maximum flow velocity governing the value range for the palette 
by default is somewhat different in these cases. It is seen that, considering the catalyst on 
the whole, the flow velocities in the isotropic and unidirectional catalysts are practically 
the same. Therefore, from the viewpoint of gas residence in the catalyst, there is no 
difference between the isotropic and unidirectional catalysts. 
We can conclude that the isotropic catalyst is more effective than the unidirectional 
catalyst (of the same resistance to uniform flows), since the flow in it, as a whole, is more 
uniform. In spite of specifying the same resistance of the catalysts to flow, the overall 
pressure loss is lower by about 2% in the case of employing the unidirectional catalyst. 
This difference is due to the different flow non-uniformity both in the catalyst bodies and 
out of them. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-17
Chapter 3 First Steps - Porous Media 
3-18
4 
Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
In engineering practice the hydraulic loss of pressure head in any piping system is 
traditionally split into two components: the loss due to friction along straight pipe sections 
and the local loss due to local pipe features, such as bends, T-pipes, various cocks, valves, 
throttles, etc. Being determined, these losses are summed to form the total hydraulic loss. 
Generally, there are no problems in engineering practice to determine the friction loss in a 
piping system since relatively simple formulae based on theoretical and experimental 
investigations exist. The other matter is the local hydraulic loss (or so-called local drag). 
Here usually only experimental data are available, which are always restricted due to their 
nature, especially taking into account the wide variety of pipe shapes (not only existing, 
but also advanced) and devices, as well as the substantially complicated flow patterns in 
them. Flow Simulation presents an alternative approach to the traditional problems 
associated with determining this kind of local drag, allowing you to predict 
computationally almost any local drag in a piping system within good accuracy. 
Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Valve.SLDPRT model located in 
the Tutorial 1 - Hydraulic Loss folder and click Open (or double-click the part). 
Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Valve.SLDPRT file to an empty area of the 
SolidWorks window. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-1
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Model Description 
4-2 
This is a ball valve. Turning the handle closes or 
opens the valve. 
The local hydraulic loss (or drag) produced by a ball 
valve installed in a piping system depends on the 
valve turning angle or on the minimum flow passage 
area governed by it. The latter depends also on a ball 
valve geometrical parameter, which is the ball-to-pipe 
diameter ratio governing the handle angle at which 
the valve becomes closed: 
= sin  
θ arc 2 
Dball 
Dpipe 
 ------------- 
The standard engineering convention for determining local drag is by calculating the 
difference between the fluid dynamic heads measured upstream of the local pipe feature 
(ball valve in our case) and far downstream of it, where the flow has become uniform 
(undisturbed) again. In order to extract the pure local drag the hydraulic friction loss in the 
straight pipe of the same length must be subtracted from the measured dynamic head loss. 
In this example we will obtain pressure loss (local drag) in the ball valve whose handle is 
turned by an angle of 40o. The Valve analysis represents a typical Flow Simulation internal 
analysis. 
	 Internal flow analyses deal with flows inside pipes, tanks, HVAC systems, etc. The fluid 
enters a model at the inlets and exits the model through outlets. 
To perform an internal analysis all the model openings must be closed with lids, which are 
needed to specify inlet and outlet flow boundary conditions on them. In any case, the 
internal model space filled with a fluid must be fully closed. You simply create lids as 
additional extrusions covering the openings. In this example the lids are semi-transparent 
allowing a view into the valve.
To ensure the model is fully closed click Flow Simulation, Tools, 
Check Geometry. Then click Check to calculate the fluid and 
solid volumes of the model. If the fluid volume is equal to zero, the 
model is not closed. 
Click Fluid Volume to see the volume that will be occupied by 
fluid in the analysis. 
Uncheck Fluid Volume. Close the Check Geometry dialog box. 
	 The Check Geometry tool allows you to calculate the total fluid 
and solid volumes, check bodies for possible geometry 
problems (i.e. invalid contact) and visualize the fluid area and 
solid body as separate models. 
The first step is to create a new Flow Simulation project. 
Creating a Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. The project wizard guides you through the 
definition of a new Flow Simulation project. 
2 In the Project Configuration dialog box, 
click Use current. Each Flow Simulation 
project is associated with a SolidWorks 
configuration. You can attach the project 
either to the current SolidWorks 
configuration or create a new SolidWorks 
configuration based on the current one. 
Click Next. 
3 In the Unit System dialog box you can 
select the desired system of units for both 
input and output (results). 
For this project use the International 
System SI by default. 
Click Next. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-3
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-4 
4 In the Analysis Type dialog box you can 
select either Internal or External type of 
the flow analysis. 
To disregard closed internal spaces not 
involved in the internal analysis, you 
select Exclude cavities without flow 
conditions. 
The Reference axis of the global 
coordinate system (X, Y or Z) is used 
for specifying data in a tabular or 
formula form in a cylindrical coordinate 
system based on this axis. 
This dialog also allows you to specify advanced physical features you may want to take 
into account (heat conduction in solids, gravitational effects, time-dependent problems, 
surface-to-surface radiation, rotation). 
Specify Internal type and accept the other default settings. 
Click Next. 
5 Since we use water in this project, open 
the Liquids folder and double-click the 
Water item. 
	 Engineering Database contains 
numerical physical information on a wide variety of gas, liquid and solid substances as 
well as radiative surfaces. You can also use the Engineering Database to specify a 
porous medium. The Engineering Database contains pre-defined unit systems. It also 
contains fan curves defining volume or mass flow rate versus static pressure difference 
for selected industrial fans. You can easily create your own substances, units, fan 
curves or specify a custom parameter you want to visualize. 
Click Next.
6 Since we do not intend to calculate heat 
conduction in solids, in the Wall 
Conditions dialog box you can specify 
the thermal wall boundary conditions 
applied by default to all the model walls 
contacting with the fluid. 
For this project accept the default 
Adiabatic wall feature denoting that all 
the model walls are heat-insulated. 
In this project we will not consider rough 
walls. 
Click Next. 
7 In the Initial Conditions dialog box specify 
initial values of the flow parameters. For 
steady internal problems, the specification of 
these values closer to the expected flow field 
will reduce the analysis convergence time. 
	 For steady flow problems Flow Simulation 
iterates until the solution converges. For unsteady (transient, or time-dependent) 
problems Flow Simulation marches in time for a period you specify. 
For this project use the default values. 
Click Next. 
8 In the Results and Geometry Resolution 
dialog box you can control the analysis 
accuracy as well as the mesh settings and, 
through them, the required computer 
resources (CPU time and memory). 
For this project accept the default result 
resolution level 3. 
	 Result Resolution governs the solution accuracy via mesh settings and conditions of 
finishing the calculation that can be interpreted as resolution of calculation results. 
The higher the Result Resolution, the finer the mesh and the stricter the convergence 
criteria. Naturally, higher Result Resolution requires more computer resources (CPU 
time and memory). 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-5
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-6 
Geometry Resolution (specified through the minimum gap size and the minimum wall 
thickness) governs proper resolution of geometrical model features by the 
computational mesh. Naturally, finer Geometry Resolution requires more computer 
resources. 
Select the Manual specification of the minimum 
gap size check box and enter 0.04 m for the 
Minimum gap size. 
	 Flow Simulation calculates the default minimum gap 
size and minimum wall thickness using information 
about the overall model dimensions, the 
computational domain, and faces on which you 
specify conditions and goals. However, this 
information may be insufficient to recognize 
relatively small gaps and thin model walls. This may 
cause inaccurate results. In these cases, the 
Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness must 
be specified manually. 
Click Finish. 
	 The Flow Simulation Analysis tree provides a convenient specification of project 
data and view of results. You also can use the Flow Simulation Analysis tree to modify 
or delete the various Flow Simulation features. 
At the same time, a computational domain appears in the SolidWorks graphics area as a 
wireframe box. 
	 The Computational Domain is a rectangular 
prism embracing the area inside which the flow 
and heat transfer calculations are performed. 
The next step is specifying Boundary Conditions. Boundary Conditions are used to 
specify fluid characteristics at the model inlets and outlets in an internal flow analysis or 
on model surfaces in an external flow analysis.
Specifying Boundary Conditions 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary Condition. 
2 Select the Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). 
The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the 
Boundary Condition list. 
3 In the Type of Boundary Condition list, select the Inlet 
Velocity item. 
4 Click the Velocity Normal to Face box and set its 
value equal to 1 m/s (type the value, the units will 
appear automatically). 
5 Accept all the other parameters and click OK . 
This simulates the water flow which enters the valve with the velocity of 1.0 m/s. 
6 Select the Outlet Lid inner face. 
7 In the graphics area, right-click outside 
the model and select Insert Boundary 
Condition. The Boundary Condition 
dialog box appears with the selected 
face in the Faces to apply the 
boundary condition list. 
	 Before the calculation starts, Flow 
Simulation checks the specified 
boundary conditions for mass flow rate 
balance. The specification of boundary conditions is incorrect if the total mass flow 
rate on the inlets is not equal to the total mass flow rate on the outlets. In such case the 
calculation will not start. Also, note that the mass flow rate value is recalculated from 
the velocity or volume flow rate value specified on an opening. To avoid problems with 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-7
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-8 
specifying boundary conditions, we recommend that you specify at least one Pressure 
opening condition since the mass flow rate on a Pressure opening is automatically 
calculated to satisfy the law of conservation of mass. 
8 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type of 
Boundary Condition list select the Static Pressure 
item. 
9 Accept the default values for Static Pressure 
(101325 Pa), Temperature (293.2 K) and all the other 
parameters. 
10 Click OK . 
By specifying this condition we define that at the ball valve pipe exit the water has a static 
pressure of 1 atm. 
The hydraulic losses are calculated through the outlet and inlet total pressure difference 
ΔP from the following formula: 
ξ ΔP 
= ----------------- 
ρV2 ⁄ 2 
where ρ is the water density, and V is water velocity. Since we already know the water 
velocity (specified by us as 1 m/s) and the water density (998.1934 kg/m3 for the specified 
temperature of 293.2 K), then our goal is to determine the total pressure value at the 
valve’s inlet and outlet. The easiest and fastest way to find the parameter of interest is to 
specify the corresponding engineering goal. 
Specifying Surface Goals 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the 
Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. 
2 Select the inner faces of the inlet lid and the outlet lid.
3 Select Create a separate goal for each surface 
check box to create two separate goals, i.e. one 
for each of the selected faces. 
4 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in 
the Total Pressure row. 
5 Accept selected Use for Conv. check box to use 
the goals being created for convergence control. 
6 Click OK . The new SG Av Total Pressure 1 
and SG Av Total Pressure 2 items appear in the 
Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
Now the Flow Simulation project is ready for the 
calculation. Flow Simulation will finish the 
calculation when the steady-state average value of total pressure calculated at the valve 
inlet and outlet are reached. 
Running the Calculation 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. The Run dialog box appears. 
2 Click Run to start the calculation. 
Flow Simulation automatically 
generates a computational mesh. The 
mesh is created by dividing the 
computational domain into slices, 
which are further subdivided into cells. 
The cells are refined as necessary to 
properly resolve the model geometry. 
During the mesh generation procedure, 
you can see the current step and the 
mesh information in the Mesh 
Generation dialog box. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-9
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
Monitoring the Calculation 
4-10 
After the calculation starts, the Solver 
Monitor dialog provides you with the 
current status of the solution. You can 
also monitor the goal changes and view 
preliminary results at selected planes. 
In the bottom pane of the Info window 
Flow Simulation notifies you if 
inappropriate results may occur. In our 
case, the message “A vortex crosses 
the pressure opening” appears to 
inform you that there is a vortex 
crossing the opening surface at which 
you specified the pressure boundary 
condition. In this case the vortex is broken into incoming and outgoing flow components. 
When flow both enters and exits an opening, the accuracy of the results is diminished. 
Moreover, there is no guarantee that convergence (i.e., the steady state goal) will be 
attained at all. Anyway, in case a vortex crosses a pressure opening the obtained results 
become suspect. If this warning persists we should stop the calculation and lengthen the 
ball valve outlet pipe to provide more space for development of the vortex. It is also 
expedient to attach the ball valve inlet pipe to avoid the flow disturbance caused by the 
valve’s obstacle to affect the inlet boundary condition parameters. 
Since the warning persists, click File, Close to terminate the calculation and exit the 
Solver Monitor. 
You can easily extend the ball valve inlet and outlet sections by changing the offset 
distance for the Inlet Plane and Outlet Plane features. Instead, we shall clone the project 
to the pre-defined 40 degrees - long valve configuration. 
Cloning the Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 
2 Click Add to existing. 
3 In the Existing configuration list, select 40 degrees - 
long valve. 
4 Click OK. 
5 Flow Simulation has detected that the model was 
modified. Confirm the both warning messages with Yes. 
The new Flow Simulation project, attached to the 40 degrees - long valve configuration, 
has the same settings as the old one attached to the 40 degrees - short valve so you can 
start the calculation immediately.
In the Flow Simulation analysis tree, right-click the root 
40 degrees - long valve item and select Run. Then click 
Run to start the calculation. 
When the calculation is finished, close the Solver 
Monitor dialog box. 
Let us now see the vortex notified by Flow Simulation 
during the calculation, as well as the total pressure loss. 
Creating a Cut Plot 
1 Right-click the Cut Plots icon and select Insert. The 
Cut Plot dialog box appears. 
	 The Cut Plot displays results of a selected parameter in a selected view section. To 
define the view section, you can use SolidWorks planes or model planar faces (with the 
additional shift if necessary). The parameter values can be represented as a contour 
plot, as isolines, as vectors, or in a combination (e.g. contours with overlaid vectors). 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager design 
tree, expand the Valve item and select 
Plane2. Its name appears in the Section 
Plane or Planar Face list. 
3 In the Cut Plot dialog box, in addition to 
displaying Contours , select 
Vectors . 
4 In the Vectors group box, using the 
slider set the Vector Spacing to approximately 0.012. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-11
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-12 
5 Click View Settings to specify the parameter which values to show at the contour plot. 
	 The settings made in the View Settings dialog box refer to all Cut Plots, Surface 
Plots, Isosurfaces, and Flow Trajectories features. These settings are applied only for 
the active pane of the SolidWorks graphics area. For example, the contours in all cut 
and surface plots will show the same physical parameter selected in the View Settings 
dialog box. So, in the View Settings dialog box you specify the displayed physical 
parameter and the settings required for displaying it for each of the displaying options 
(contours, isolines, vectors, flow trajectories, isosurfaces) . The Contours settings can 
also be applied to Isolines, Vectors, Flow Trajectories, and Isosurfaces. If the Use 
from contours option is selected on the corresponding feature tab, the isolines, 
vectors, trajectories, isosurfaces are colored in accordance with values of the 
parameter selected on the Contours tab (in this case the color settings made in the 
specific dialog boxes are not used). 
6 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter box, 
select X-velocity. 
7 Click OK to save changes and exit the View 
Settings dialog box. 
8 In the Cut Plot dialog box click OK . 
The new Cut Plot 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
However, the cut plot cannot be seen through the model. In order to see the plot, you can 
hide the model by clicking Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Geometry. Alternatively, 
you can use the standard SolidWorks Section View option. 
9 Click View, Display, Section View. Under Section 1 
specify Plane2 as a Reference Section Plane/Face and 
click OK . 
10 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the 
Computational Domain icon and select Hide.
Now you can see a contour plot of the velocity and the velocity vectors projected on the plot. 
For better visualization of the vortex you can scale small vectors: 
11 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click 
the Results icon and select View Settings. 
12 In the View Settings dialog, click the 
Vectors tab and type 0.02 m the Arrow 
size box. 
13 Change the Min value to 2 m/s. 
	 By specifying the custom Min we change the vector length range so that the vectors in 
areas where velocity is less than the specified Min value will appear as if it is equal to 
Min. This allows us to visualize the low velocity area in more detail. 
14 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. Immediately the 
cut plot is updated. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-13
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-14 
You can easily visualize the vortex by displaying the flow relative to the X axis. For that, 
you can display the X-velocity component in a two-color palette and set the value, 
separating two colors, at zero. 
15 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Results icon and select View 
Settings. 
16 Using the slider set Number of colors to 2. 
17 In the Min box type -1. 
18 In the Max box type 1. 
19 Click OK. 
Now the distribution of the X-Velocity 
component is displayed in red-blue palette so that all the positive values are in red and all 
the negative values are in blue. This means that the blue area show the region of reverse 
flow, i.e. half of the vortex. 
Next, we will display the distribution of total pressure within the valve. 
Working with Parameter List 
By default the total pressure is not included in the list of parameters available to display. 
To enable or disable a physical parameter for displaying you can use Parameter List. 
1 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Results 
icon and select Parameter List. Select the 
Total Pressure check box or select 
parameter’s row and click Enable. 
2 Click OK to close the Display Parameters 
dialog box. 
Now you can apply the total pressure for the 
contour plot.
1 Double-click the palette bar in the upper left corner of the graphics area to 
open the View Settings dialog box. 
2 On the Contours tab, in the 
Parameter list select Total 
Pressure. 
3 Using the slider, set the Number 
of colors to about 30. 
4 Click OK to save the changes and 
exit the View Settings dialog box. 
Immediately the cut plot is updated to 
display the total pressure contour plot. 
The cut plot shows you the flow pattern. To obtain the exact value of the total pressure 
which is required to calculate the loss, we will use the surface goal plot. 
Creating a Goal Plot 
	 The Goal Plot allows you to study how the goal value changed in the course of 
calculation. Flow Simulation uses Microsoft Excel to display goal plot data. Each goal 
plot is displayed in a separate sheet. The converged values of all project goals are 
displayed in the Summary sheet of an automatically created Excel workbook. 
Click View, Display, Section View to hide the section. 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, under Results, right-click 
the Goals icon and select Insert. The Goals dialog 
box appears. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-15
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-16 
2 Click Add All. 
3 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is 
created. 
This workbook displays how the goal changed 
during the calculation. You can take the total 
pressure value presented at the Summary sheet. 
Valve.SLDPRT [40 degrees - long valve] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence 
SG Av Total Pressure 1 [Pa] 101833.4184 101833.8984 101833.3951 101834.7911 100 Yes 
SG Av Total Pressure 2 [Pa] 111386.6792 111389.5793 111384.8369 111399.0657 100 Yes 
In fact, to obtain the pressure loss it would be easier to specify an Equation goal with the 
difference between the inlet and outlet pressures as the equation goal’s expression. 
However, to demonstrate the wide capabilities of Flow Simulation, we will calculate the 
pressure loss with the Flow Simulation gasdynamic Calculator. 
	 The Calculator contains various formulae from fluid dynamics which can be useful for 
engineering calculations. The calculator is a very useful tool for rough estimations of 
the expected results, as well as for calculations of important characteristic and 
reference values. All calculations in the Calculator are performed only in the 
International system of units SI, so no parameter units should be entered, and Flow 
Simulation Units settings do not apply in the Calculator. 
Working with Calculator 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Calculator. 
2 Right-click the A1 cell in the Calculator sheet 
and select New Formula. The New Formula 
dialog box appears. 
3 In the Select the name of the new formula tree 
expand the Pressure and Temperature item 
and select the Total pressure loss check box.
4 Click OK. The total pressure loss formula 
appears in the Calculator sheet. 
In the Result (or A) column you see the formula 
name, in the next columns (B, C, etc.) you see 
names of the formula arguments (variables and 
constants). You can either type all the formula 
arguments’ values in cells under their names in 
the SI units, or copy and paste them from the 
goals Excel worksheet table obtained through the 
Goals dialog box. The result value appears in the 
Result column cell immediately when you enter 
all the arguments and click another cell. 
5 Specify the values in the cells as follows: 
Density = 998.1934 (the water density for the 
specified temperature of 293.2 K), 
Velocity = 1. 
6 Open the goals1 Excel workbook and copy the Value of SG Av Total Pressure 1 into 
the Clipboard. 
7 Go to the Calculator, click the B2 cell and press Ctrl+V to paste the goal value from 
the Clipboard. 
8 Return to Excel, copy the Value of SG Av Total Pressure 2. Go to the Calculator, 
click the C2 cell and press Ctrl+V. Click any free cell. Immediately the Total pressure 
loss value appears in the Result column. 
9 Click File, Save. 
10 In the Save As dialog box browse to the folder where the ball valve model used in this 
example is located, enter ball valve for the file name, and click Save. 
11 Click File, Exit to exit the Calculator. 
To obtain the pure local drag, it is necessary to subtract from the obtained value the total 
pressure loss due to friction in a straight pipe of the same length and diameter. To do that, 
we perform the same calculations in the ball valve model with the handle in the 0o angle 
position. You can do this with the 00 degrees - long valve configuration. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-17
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-18 
Since the specified conditions are the same for both 40 degrees - long valve and 00 
degrees - long valve configurations, it is useful to attach the existing Flow Simulation 
project to the 00 degrees - long valve configuration. 
Clone the current project to the 00 degrees - long valve 
configuration. 
Since at zero angle the ball valve becomes a simple straight pipe, there is no need to set the 
Minimum gap size value smaller than the default gap size which, in our case, is 
automatically set equal to the pipe’s diameter (the automatic minimum gap size depends 
on the characteristic size of the faces on which the boundary conditions are set). Note that 
using a smaller gap size will result in a finer mesh and, in turn, more computer time and 
memory will be required for calculation. To solve your task in the most effective way you 
should choose the optimal settings for the task. 
Changing the Geometry Resolution 
Check to see that the 00 degrees - long valve is the active configuration. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 
2 Clear the Manual specification of 
the minimum gap size check box. 
3 Click OK. 
Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 
Then click Run to start the calculation. 
After the calculation is finished, create 
the Goal Plot. The goals2 workbook is 
created. Go to Excel, then select the both 
cells in the Value column and copy them 
into the Clipboard. 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value 
SG Av Total Pressure 1 [Pa] 101805.2057 101804.8525 101801.4794 
SG Av Total Pressure 2 [Pa] 102023.7419 102054.9498 102022.7459
Now you can calculate the total pressure loss in a straight pipe. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Calculator. 
2 In the Calculator menu, click File, Open. Browse to the folder where you saved the 
calculator file earlier in this tutorial and select the ball valve.fwc file. Click Open. 
3 Click the B4 cell and in the Calculator toolbar click to paste data from the 
Clipboard. 
4 Save the existing value of the total pressure loss: click the A2 cell, click , then click 
the A7 cell and finally click . 
5 Double-click the Name7 
cell and type 40 degrees. 
6 Right-click the Total 
pressure at point 1 cell and select Add 
Relation. The cursor appears. 
7 Click the B4 cell. The value of total pressure is 
now taken from the B4 cell. 
8 Right-click the Total pressure at point 2 cell and select Add 
Relation. 
9 Click the B5 cell. The value of total pressure is now taken from the 
B5 cell. Immediately the total pressure value is recalculated. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-19
Chapter 4 Determination of Hydraulic Loss 
4-20 
Now you can calculate the local drag in the ball valve whose handle is set at 40o. 
Total Pressure loss (40 deg) Total Pressure loss (0 deg) Local Drag 
19.14 0.44 18.70
5 
Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Flow Simulation can be used to study flow around objects and to determine the resulting 
lift and drag forces on the objects due to the flow. In this example we use Flow Simulation 
to determine the drag coefficient of a circular cylinder immersed in a uniform fluid 
stream. The cylinder axis is oriented perpendicular to the stream. 
The computations are performed for a range of Reynolds numbers (1,1000,105), where 
, D is the cylinder diameter, U is the velocity of the fluid stream, ρ is the 
Re ρUD 
= ------μ---------- 
density, and μ is the dynamic viscosity. The drag coefficient for the cylinder is defined as: 
CD 
FD 
= ---------------------- 
1 
2 
--ρU 
2 
DL 
where FD is the total force in the flow direction (i.e. drag) acting on a cylinder of diameter 
D and length L. 
The goal of the simulation is to obtain the drag coefficient predicted by Flow Simulation 
and to compare it to the experimental data presented in Ref.1. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-1
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-2 
Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT part 
located in the Tutorial 2 - Drag Coefficientcylinder 0.01m folder and click Open (or 
double-click the part). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT 
file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. 
The Cylinder analysis represents a typical Flow Simulation External analysis. 
	 External flows analyses deal with flows over or around a model such as flows over 
aircrafts, automobiles, buildings, etc. For external flow analyses the far-field 
boundaries are the Computational Domain boundaries. You can also solve a combined 
external and internal flow problem in a Flow Simulation project (for example flow 
around and through a building). If the analysis includes a combination of internal and 
external flows, you must specify External type for the analysis. 
The first step is to create a new Flow Simulation project. 
Creating a Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. The project wizard guides you through the 
definition of a new Flow Simulation project. In this project we will analyze flow over 
the cylinder at the Reynolds number of 1. 
2 Select Create new. In the Configuration 
name box type Re 1. This is the name of 
the SolidWorks configuration that will be 
created for the associated Flow 
Simulation project. 
Click Next.
3 In the Unit System dialog box you can 
select the desired system of units for both 
input and output (results). 
In this project we will specify the 
International System SI by default. 
Click Next. 
4 In the Analysis Type dialog box select an 
External type of flow analysis. This dialog 
also allows you to specify advanced 
physical features you want to include in 
the analysis. In this project we will not use 
any of the advanced physical features 
	 To disregard closed internal spaces within the body you can select Exclude internal 
spaces; however no internal spaces exist within the cylinder in this tutorial. The 
Reference axis of the global coordinate system (X, Y or Z) is used for specifying data 
in a tabular or formula form with respect to a cylindrical coordinate system based on 
this axis. 
	 The flow over a cylinder is steady at a Reynolds number Re < 40 (see the cylinder Re 
definition above) and unsteady (time-dependent) at Re > 40. Since in this tutorial the 
first calculation is performed at Re=1, to accelerate the run, we perform a steady-state 
analysis. 
Click Next. 
5 Since we use water in this project, open 
the Liquids folder and double-click the 
Water item. 
Click Next. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-3
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-4 
6 In the Wall Conditions dialog box you 
may specify the default thermal wall 
conditions applied to all the model walls in 
contact with the fluid. 
In this project we keep the default 
Adiabatic wall setting, denoting that all the 
model walls are heat-insulated and accept 
the default zero wall roughness. 
Click Next. 
For a steady External problem, such as the 
cylinder in this tutorial, the Initial and Ambient Conditions dialog box asks you to 
specify the ambient flow conditions of the undisturbed free stream. Thus you will 
specify initial conditions inside the Computational Domain and boundary conditions 
at the Computational Domain boundaries. The ambient conditions are 
thermodynamic (static pressure and temperature by default), velocity, and turbulence 
parameters. 
In this project we consider the flow under the default thermodynamic conditions (i.e., 
the standard atmosphere at sea level), and set the incoming stream (X-component) 
velocity in accordance with the desired Reynolds number. 
For convenience we can use the 
Dependency box to specify the incoming 
flow velocity in terms of the Reynolds 
number. 
7 Click in the Velocity in X direction field. 
The Dependency button is enabled. 
8 Click Dependency. The Dependency 
dialog box appears. 
	 Using Dependency you can specify data in several ways: as a constant, as a tabular or 
formula dependency on x, y, z, r, θ, ϕ coordinates and time t (only for time-dependent 
analysis). The radius r is the distance from a point to the Reference axis selected from 
the reference coordinate system (the Global Coordinate System for all data set in the 
Wizard and General Settings dialog boxes), while θ and ϕ are the polar and 
azimuthal angles of spherical coordinate system, respectively. Therefore, by 
combination of r, θ, and ϕ coordinates you can specify data in cylindrical or spherical 
coordinate systems. 
9 In the Dependency type list select Formula Definition.
10 In the Formula box type the formula defining the flow 
velocity using the Reynolds number: 
1*(0.0010115/0.01/998.19). Here: 
1 – the Reynolds number (Re) 
0.0010115 (Pa*s) - the water dynamic viscosity (μ) at the 
specified temperature of 293.2 K 
0.01 (m) - the cylinder diameter (D) 
998.19 (kg/m3)- the water density (ρ) at the specified 
temperature of 293.2 K 
11 Click OK. You will return to the Initial and Ambient 
Conditions dialog box. 
For most flows it is difficult to have a good estimation of their turbulence a priori, so it 
is recommended that the default turbulence parameters be used. The default turbulence 
intensity values proposed by Flow Simulation are 0.1% for external analyses and 2% 
for internal analyses and these values are appropriate for most cases. In this project we 
will specify a turbulence intensity of 1%. 
12 Expand the Turbulence parameters item 
and in the Turbulence intensity box 
type 1. 
Click Next. 
13 In the Result and Geometry Resolution 
dialog box specify the result resolution 
level of 7 and accept the automatically 
defined minimum gap size and minimum 
wall thickness. 
Click Finish. The project is created and 
the 3D Computational Domain is 
automatically generated. 
In this tutorial we are interested in determining the drag coefficient of the cylinder only, 
without the accompanying 3D effects. Thus, to reduce the required CPU time and 
computer memory, we will perform a two-dimensional (2D) analysis in this tutorial. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-5
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
Specifying 2D Plane Flow 
5-6 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, expand the Input Data item. 
2 Right-click the Computational Domain icon and 
select Edit Definition. The Computational Domain 
dialog box appears. 
3 Click the Boundary Condition tab. 
4 In the 2D plane flow list select XY-Plane Flow 
(since the Z-axis is the cylinder axis). 
Automatically the Symmetry condition is 
specified at the Z min and Z max boundaries of 
the Computational Domain. 
Click the Size tab. You can see that the Z min and 
Z max boundaries are set automatically, basing on 
the model dimensions. 
Thus the reference cylinder length L in the cylinder drag (CD) formula presented above 
is equal to L = Z max-Z min = 0.002 m. 
	 For most cases, to study the flow field around an external body and to investigate the 
effects of design changes it is recommended to use the default Computational Domain 
size as determined by Flow Simulation. However, in this case we will compare the 
Flow Simulation results to experimental results and we would like to determine the 
drag coefficient with a high degree of accuracy. In order to eliminate any disturbances 
of the incoming flow at the Computational Domain boundaries due to the presence of 
the cylinder, we will manually set the boundaries farther away from the cylinder. The 
accuracy will be increased at the expense of required CPU time and memory due to the 
larger size of Computational Domain. 
5 Specify the coordinates of the 
Computational domain boundaries as 
shown on the picture to the right. 
6 Click OK. 
Since the incoming flow is aligned with the 
X-axis direction, the cylinder drag 
coefficient is calculated through the 
X-component of the force acting on the 
cylinder. 
The X-component of force can be determined easily by specifying the appropriate Flow 
Simulation goal. For this case you will specify the X - Component of Force as a Global 
Goal. This ensures that the calculation will not be finished until X - Component of Force 
in the entire computational domain (i.e. on the cylinder surface) is fully converged.
Specifying a Global Goal 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Global Goals. 
2 In the Parameter table select the first 
check box in the X - Component of 
Force row. 
3 Accept selected Use for Conv. check box 
to use this goal for convergence control. 
	 For the X(Y, Z) - Component of Force 
and X(Y, Z) - Component of Torque goals 
you can select the Coordinate system in 
which these goals are calculated. In this 
example the default Global Coordinate 
System meets the task. 
4 Click OK . The new GG X - Component of 
Force 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation 
Analysis tree. 
Specifying an Equation Goal 
When the calculation is finished, you will need to manually calculate the drag coefficient 
from the obtained force value. Instead, let Flow Simulation to make all the necessary 
calculations for you by specifying an Equation Goal. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, 
Equation Goal. 
2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree 
select the GG X - Component of 
Force 1 goal. It appears in the 
Expression box. 
3 Use buttons in the calculator or keyboard to complete the expression as follows: 
{GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.002*(1*0.0010115)^2)*(2*998.19*0.01). 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-7
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-8 
4 Select No units in the Dimensionality list and click OK. The new Equation Goal 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
5 Rename the Equation Goal 1 to Drag Coefficient. 
To compare the Flow Simulation results with the experimental curve taken from Ref.1, we 
will obtain the results at a Reynolds number of 1, 103 and 105. As with Re = 1, the 
Cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT is used to calculate the flow at the Reynolds number of 103. 
The Cylinder 1m.SLDPRT is used to calculate the flow at the Reynolds number of 105. 
Cloning a Project and Creating a New Configuration 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the top 
Re 1 icon and select Clone Project. 
2 In the Configuration name box, type Re 1000. 
3 Click OK. The new Re 1000 configuration is 
created with the Flow Simulation project 
attached. 
Since the new project is a copy of the Re 1 Flow Simulation project, you only need to 
change the flow velocity value in accordance with the Reynolds number of 1000. Use 
the General Settings dialog box to change the data specified in the Wizard, except the 
settings for Units and Result and Geometry Resolution. 
	 The General Settings always presents the current state of the project parameters. You 
can change General Settings to correct the settings made in the Wizard or to modify 
the project created with the Flow Simulation Template in accordance with the new 
project requirements.
Changing Project Settings 
1 Click Flow Simulation, General Settings. The General Settings dialog box appears. 
2 As it has been mentioned above, since 
the flow over a cylinder is unsteady at 
Re > 40, select the Time-dependent 
physical feature for this project. 
3 In the Navigator click Initial and 
ambient conditions. 
4 Click the Velocity in X direction field 
and then click Dependency. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-9
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-10 
5 In the Formula box, type the formula for the new Reynolds 
number: 
1e3*(0.0010115/0.01/998.19). 
6 Click OK to return to the General Settings dialog box. 
7 Click OK to save changes and close the General Settings 
dialog box. 
Changing the Equation Goal 
1 Right-click the Drag Coefficient icon under Goals and select Edit Definition. 
2 In the Expression box type the new formula for the new Reynolds number: 
{GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.002*(0.0010115*10^3)^2)*(2*998.19*0.01). 
3 Select No units in the Dimensionality list. 
4 Click OK to save changes and close the Equation Goal dialog box. 
In the experiments performed with one fluid medium, the Reynolds number’s large rise is 
usually obtained by increasing both the velocity and the model overall dimension (i.e. 
cylinder diameter) since it is difficult to increase only velocity by e.g. 105 times. Since our 
simulation is performed with water only, let us increase the cylinder diameter to 1 m to 
perform the calculation at a Reynolds number of 105. 
Cloning a project is convenient if you want to create similar projects for the same model. 
The easiest way to apply the same general project settings to another model is to use the 
Flow Simulation Template. 
	 Template contains all of the general project settings that can be used as a basis for a 
new project. These settings are: problem type, physical features, fluids, solids, initial 
and ambient flow parameters, wall heat condition, geometry and result resolution, and 
unit settings. Notice that Boundary Conditions, Fans, Initial Conditions, Goals and 
other features accessible from the Flow Simulation, Insert menu, as well as results are 
not stored in the template. Initially, only the New Project default template is available, 
but you can easily create your own templates.
Creating a Template 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Create Template. 
The Create Template dialog box appears. 
2 In the Template name box, type Cylinder Drag. 
3 Click Save. The new Flow Simulation template is 
created. 
	 All templates are stored as .fwp files in the <install_dir>/Template folder, so you can 
easily apply a template to any previously created models. 
4 Save the model. 
Next, create a new project based on the Cylinder Drag template. 
Creating a Project from the Template 
Open the Cylinder 1m.SLDPRT file located in the cylinder 1m folder. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, New. The New Flow 
Simulation Project dialog box appears. 
2 In the Configuration name box, type Re 1e5. 
3 In the List of templates, select Cylinder Drag. 
4 Click OK. 
The newly created project has the same settings as the Re 1000 project with the cylinder 
0.01m model. The only exceptions are Geometry Resolution and Computational 
Domain size, which are calculated by Flow Simulation in accordance with the new model 
geometry. 
Notice that the 2D plane flow setting and Global Goal are retained. Next, you can modify 
the project in accordance with the new model geometry. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-11
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-12 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Computational 
Domain and adjust the computational 
domain size as shown at the picture to 
the right. 
2 Click OK. 
3 Open the General Settings dialog box 
and click Initial and ambient 
conditions, click the Velocity in X 
direction field, then click Dependency. 
4 Change the velocity X component 
formula as follows: 
1e5*(0.0010115/1/998.19). 
Click OK to return to the General Settings dialog box. 
By default, Flow Simulation determines the default 
turbulence length basis equal to one percent of the model 
overall dimension (i.e. cylinder diameter). Since the Re 1e5 
project was created from the template, it inherited the 
turbulence length value calculated for the small cylinder (d = 0.01m). For the cylinder 
1m we need to change this value. 
5 In the General Settings dialog box 
expand the Turbulence parameters 
item. Type 0.01 m in the Turbulence 
length field. 
6 Click OK. 
7 Create the Equation Goal for the drag coefficient of the cylinder as it was described before. 
In the Expression box enter the formula: 
{GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.2*(0.0010115*10^5)^2)*(2*998.19*1). 
8 Select No units in the Dimensionality list. 
9 Click OK. Rename the Equation Goal 1 to Drag Coefficient. 
Now you can solve all of the projects created for both the cylinders.
Solving a Set of Projects 
Flow Simulation allows you to automatically solve a set of projects that exist in any 
currently opened document. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Batch Run. 
2 Select the Solve check 
box in the All projects 
row to select Solve for 
all projects (Re 1, 
Re 1000, Re 1e5). Also 
select the Close Monitor 
check box in the 
All projects row. When 
the Close Monitor check 
box is selected, Flow 
Simulation 
automatically closes the 
Solver Monitorwindow 
when the calculation 
finishes. 
3 Click Run. 
Getting Results 
After all calculations are complete, go to the cylinder 0.01m model and activate the Re 
1000 configuration. Create Goal Plot to obtain the Drag Coefficient value: 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Results, LoadUnload Results. 
2 In the Load Results dialog box, keep the default project’s results file (2.fld) and click 
Open. 
3 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, under 
Results, right-click the Goals icon and select 
Insert. The Goals dialog box appears. 
4 Click Add All. 
5 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is 
created. Switch to Excel to obtain the value. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-13
Chapter 5 Cylinder Drag Coefficient 
5-14 
cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT [Re 1000] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 
GG X - Component of Force [N] 0.000104929 9.71368E-05 8.75382E-05 0.000105358 
Drag Coefficient [ ] 1.023705931 0.94768731 0.85404169 1.027899399 
6 Activate the Re 1 configuration and load results. Create the goal plot for both the goals. 
cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT [Re 1] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 
GG X - Component of Force [N] 1.14448E-09 1.16764E-09 1.12756E-09 1.81674E-09 
Drag Coefficient [ ] 11.16575499 11.39179479 11.00070462 17.72455528 
7 Switch to the cylinder 1m part, activate the Re 1e5 configuration, load results and 
create the goal plot for both the goals. 
cylinder 1m .SLDPRT [Re 1e5] 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 
GG X - Component of Force [N] 0.482967811 0.478070888 0.465937059 0.491484755 
Drag Coefficient [ ] 0.471193865 0.46641632 0.454578294 0.47950318 
Even if the calculation is steady, the averaged value is more preferred, since in this case 
the oscillation effect is of less perceptibility. We will use the averaged goal value for the 
other two cases as well. 
You can now compare Flow Simulation results with the experimental curve. 
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 100000 
0 
Re 
1E+07 
Ref. 1 Roland L. Panton, “Incompressible flow” Second edition. John Wiley & sons Inc., 1995
6 
Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Flow Simulation can be used to study the fluid flow and heat transfer for a wide variety of 
engineering equipment. In this example we use Flow Simulation to determine the 
efficiency of a counterflow heat exchanger and to observe the temperature and flow 
patterns inside of it. With Flow Simulation the determination of heat exchanger efficiency 
is straightforward and by investigating the flow and temperature patterns, the design 
engineer can gain insight into the physical processes involved thus giving guidance for 
improvements to the design. 
A convenient measure of heat exchanger performance is its “efficiency” in transferring a 
given amount of heat from one fluid at higher temperature to another fluid at lower 
temperature. The efficiency can be determined if the temperatures at all flow openings are 
known. In Flow Simulation the temperatures at the fluid inlets are specified and the 
temperatures at the outlets can be easily determined. Heat exchanger efficiency is defined 
as follows: 
ε actual heat transfer 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------= - 
maximum possible heat transfer 
The actual heat transfer can be calculated as either the energy lost by the hot fluid or the 
energy gained by the cold fluid. The maximum possible heat transfer is attained if one of 
the fluids was to undergo a temperature change equal to the maximum temperature 
difference present in the exchanger, which is the difference in the inlet temperatures of the 
hot and cold fluids, respectively: . Thus, the efficiency of a counterflow 
( – inlet) 
inle t Tcold 
Thot 
ε 
inlet Thot 
Thot 
– out let 
heat exchanger is defined as follows: = ------------------------------------ 
- if hot fluid capacity rate is less 
inlet Tcold 
Thot 
– inlet 
ε 
outlet Tcold 
Tcold 
– inlet 
than cold fluid capacity rate or = ------------------------------------ 
- if hot fluid capacity rate is more than 
inlet Tcold 
Thot 
– inlet 
cold fluid capacity rate, where the capacity rate is the product of the mass flow and the 
specific heat capacity: C= (Ref.2) 
m · 
c 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-1
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-2 
The goal of the project is to calculate the efficiency of the counterflow heat exchanger. 
Also, we will determine the average temperature of the heat exchanger central tube’s wall. 
The obtained wall temperature value can be further used for structural and fatigue 
analysis. 
Open the Model 
Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Heat Exchanger.SLDASM 
assembly located in the Tutorial 3 - Heat Exchanger folder and click Open (or double-click 
the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Heat Exchanger.SLDASM 
file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. 
Warm water 
Creating a Project 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 
2 Select Create new. In the Configuration 
name box type Level 3. The ‘Level 3’ 
name was chosen because this problem 
will be calculated using Result 
Resolution level 3. 
Click Next. 
Cold water = 0.02 kg/s 
Tinlet = 293.2 K 
Air 
Steel 
Hot air = 10 m/s 
Tinlet = 600 K
3 In the Units dialog box select the desired 
system of units for both input and output 
(results). For this project we will use the 
International System SI by default. 
Click Next. 
4 In the Analysis Type dialog box among 
Physical features select Heat conduction 
in solids. 
	 By default, Flow Simulation will consider 
heat conduction not in solids, but only 
within the fluid and between the walls and 
the fluid (i.e., convection). Selecting the 
Heat conduction in solids option enables 
the combination of convection and 
conduction heat transfer, known as conjugate heat transfer. In this project we will 
analyze heat transfer between the fluids through the model walls, as well as inside the 
solids. 
Click Next. 
5 Since two fluids (water and air) are used 
in this project, expand the Liquids folder 
and add Water and then expand the 
Gases folder and add Air to the Project 
Fluids list. Check that the Default fluid 
type is Liquids. 
Click Next. 
6 Since we have selected the Heat conduction in solids option at the Analysis Type 
step of the Wizard, the Default Solid dialog box appears. In this dialog you specify the 
default solid material applied to all solid components. To assign a different material to 
a particular assembly component you need to create a Solid Material condition for this 
component. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-3
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-4 
If the solid material you wish to specify as 
the default is not available in the Solids 
table, you can click New and define a new 
substance in the Engineering Database. 
The tube and its cooler in this project are 
made of stainless steel. 
Expand the Alloys folder and click Steel 
Stainless 321 to make it the default solid 
material. 
Click Next. 
	 If a component has been previously assigned a solid material by the SolidWorks’ 
Materials Editor, you can import this material into Flow Simulation and apply this 
solid material to the component in the Flow Simulation project by using the Insert 
Material from Model option accessible under Flow Simulation, Tools. 
7 In the Wall Condition dialog box, select 
Heat transfer coefficient as Default outer 
wall thermal condition. 
	 This condition allows you to define the 
heat transfer from the outer model walls to 
an external fluid (not modeled) by 
specifying the reference fluid temperature 
and the heat transfer coefficient value. 
Set the Heat transfer coefficient value to 5 W/m2/K. 
In this project we do not consider walls roughness. 
Click Next. 
8 In the Initial Conditions dialog box under 
Thermodynamics parameters enter 
2 atm in the Value cell for the Pressure 
parameter. Flow Simulation automatically 
converts the entered value to the selected 
system of units. 
Click Next accepting the default values of 
other parameters for initial conditions.
9 In the Results and Geometry Resolution 
dialog box we accept the default result 
resolution level 3 and the default minimum 
gap size and minimum wall thickness. 
Click Finish. 
After finishing the Wizard you will complete the project definition by using the Flow 
Simulation Analysis tree. First of all you can take advantage of the symmetry of the heat 
exchanger to reduce the CPU time and memory required for the calculation. Since this 
model is symmetric, it is possible to “cut” the model in half and use a symmetry boundary 
condition at the plane of symmetry. This procedure is not required, but is recommended 
for efficient analyses. 
Symmetry Condition 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Computational Domain. 
2 In the X max box type 0. 
3 Click the Boundary Condition tab. 
4 In the At X max list select Symmetry. 
5 Click OK. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-5
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
Specifying a Fluid Subdomain 
6-6 
Since we have selected Liquids as the Default fluid type and Water as the Default fluid in 
the Wizard, we need to specify another fluid type and select another fluid (air) for the fluid 
region inside the tube through which the hot air flows. We can do this by creating a Fluid 
Subdomain. When defining a Fluid Subdomain parameters we will specify Gas as the 
fluid type for the selected region, Air as the fluid and the initial temperature of 600 K and 
flow velocity of 10 m/s as the initial conditions in the selected fluid region. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Fluid Subdomain. 
2 Select the Air Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the 
fluid). Immediately the fluid subdomain you are going 
to create is displayed in the graphics area as a body of 
blue color. 
	 To specify the fluid subdomain within a fluid region 
we must specify this condition on the one of the faces 
lying on the region’s boundary - i.e. on the boundary 
between solid and fluid substances. The fluid 
subdomain specified on the region’s boundary will be 
applied to the entire fluid region. You may check if the 
region to apply a fluid subdomain is selected properly 
by looking at the fluid subdomain visualization in the 
graphics area. 
3 Accept the default Coordinate System and the 
Reference axis. 
4 In the Fluid type list select Gases / Real Gases / Steam. 
Because Air was defined in the Wizard as one of the 
Project fluids and you have selected the appropriate fluid 
type, it appears as the fluid assigned to the fluid 
subdomain. 
	 In the Fluids group box, Flow Simulation allows you to 
specify the fluid type and/or fluids to be assigned for the 
fluid subdomain as well as flow characteristics, 
depending on the selected fluid type.
5 Under Flow Parameters in the Velocity in Z Direction 
box enter -10. 
	 Flow Simulation allows you to specify initial flow 
parameters, initial thermodynamic parameters, and 
initial turbulence parameters (after a face to apply the 
Fluid Subdomain is selected). These settings are applied 
to the specified fluid subdomain. 
6 Under Thermodynamic parameters in the Pressure 
box enter 1 atm. 
Flow Simulation automatically 
converts the entered value to the selected system of units. 
7 Under Thermodynamic parameters in the Temperature 
box enter 600. 
These initial conditions are not necessary and the 
parameters of the hot air inlet flow are defined by the 
boundary condition, but we specify them to improve 
calculation convergence. 
8 Click OK . The new Fluid Subdomain 1 item 
appears in the Analysis tree. 
9 To easily identify the specified condition you can 
give a more descriptive name for the Fluid 
Subdomain 1 item. Right-click the Fluid 
Subdomain 1 item and select Properties. In the 
Name box type Hot Air and click OK. 
	 You can also click-pause-click an item to rename it 
directly in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
Specifying Boundary Conditions 
1 Right-click the Boundary Conditions icon in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. The Boundary Condition dialog box appears. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-7
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-8 
2 Select the Water Inlet Lid 
inner face (in contact with 
the fluid). 
The selected face appears 
in the Faces to Apply the 
Boundary Condition 
list. 
3 Accept the default Inlet 
Mass Flow condition and 
the default Coordinate 
System and 
Reference axis 
. 
4 Click the numerical value in the Mass Flow Rate Normal 
to Face boxi and set it equal to 0.01 kg/s. Since the 
symmetry plane halves the opening, we need to specify a 
half of the actual mass flow rate. 
5 Click OK . The new Inlet Mass Flow 1 item appears 
in the Analysis tree. 
This boundary condition specifies that water enters the steel jacket of the heat exchanger 
at a mass flow rate of 0.02 kg/s and temperature of 293.2 K. 
6 Rename the Inlet Mass Flow 1 item to Inlet 
Mass Flow - Cold Water. 
Next, specify the water outlet Environment Pressure 
condition.
7 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click 
the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert 
Boundary Condition. 
8 Select the Water Outlet Lid inner face (in 
contact with the fluid). The selected face 
appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary 
Condition list. 
9 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type 
of Boundary Condition list select the Environment 
Pressure item. 
10 Accept the value of Environment Pressure (202650 
Pa), taken from the value specified at the Initial 
Conditions step of the Wizard, and the default values of 
Temperature (293.2 K) and all other parameters. 
11 Click OK . The new Environment Pressure 1 item 
appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 
12 Rename the Environment Pressure 1 item to 
Environment Pressure – Warm Water. 
Next we will specify the boundary conditions for the hot air flow. 
13 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-9
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-10 
14 Select the Air Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with 
the fluid). 
The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply 
the Boundary Condition list. Accept the 
default Coordinate System and Reference 
axis. 
15 Under Type select the Inlet Velocity condition. 
16 Click the numerical value in the the Velocity 
Normal to Face box and set it equal to 10 (type the 
value, the units will appear automatically). 
17 Expand the Thermodynamic Parameters item. The 
default temperature value is equal to the value specified as 
the initial temperature of air in the Fluid Subdomain 
dialog box. We accept this value. 
18 Click OK . The new Inlet Velocity 1 item appears in 
the Analysis tree. 
This boundary condition specifies that air enters the tube at the velocity of 10 m/s and 
temperature of 600 K. 
19 Rename the Inlet Velocity 1 item to Inlet Velocity – Hot Air. 
Next specify the air outlet Environment Pressure condition. 
20 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. The Boundary Condition dialog box appears.
21 Select the Air Outlet Lid inner face (in contact 
with the fluid). 
The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply 
the Boundary Condition list. 
22 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type of 
Boundary Condition list select the Environment 
Pressure item. 
23 Check the values of Environment Pressure (101325 
Pa) and Temperature (600 K). If they are different, 
correct them. Accept the default values of other 
parameters. 
Click OK . 
24 Rename the new item Environment Pressure 1 
to Environment Pressure – Air. 
This project involving analysis of heat conduction in solids. Therefore, you must specify 
the solid materials for the model’s components and the initial solid temperature. 
Specifying Solid Materials 
Notice that the auxiliary lids on the openings are solid. Since the material for the lids is the 
default stainless steel, they will have an influence on the heat transfer. You cannot 
suppress or disable them in the Component Control dialog box, because boundary 
conditions must be specified on solid surfaces in contact with the fluid region. However, 
you can exclude the lids from the heat conduction analysis by specifying the lids as 
insulators. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-11
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-12 
1 Right-click the Solid Materials 
icon and select Insert Solid 
Material. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager 
design tree, select all the lid 
components. As you select the lids, 
their names appear in the 
Components to Apply the Solid 
Material list. 
3 In the Solid group box expand the 
list of Pre-Defined materials and 
select the Insulator solid in the 
Glasses & Minerals folder. 
4 Click OK . Now all auxiliary 
lids are defined as insulators. 
	 The thermal conductivity of the Insulator substance is zero. Hence there is no heat 
transferred through an insulator. 
5 Rename the Insulator Solid Material 1 item to Insulators. 
Specifying a Volume Goal 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Goals icon and select Insert 
Volume Goals.
2 In the Flyout FeatureManager 
Design tree select the Tube part. 
3 In the Parameter table select the Av 
check box in the Temperature of 
Solid row. 
4 Accept the selected Use for Conv. 
check box to use this goal for 
convergence control. 
5 In the Name template type 
VG Av T of Tube. 
6 Click OK . 
Running the Calculation 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. The Run dialog box appears. 
2 Click Run. 
After the calculation finishes you can obtain the temperature of interest by creating the 
corresponding Goal Plot. 
Viewing the Goals 
In addition to using the Flow Simulation Analysis tree you can use Flow Simulation 
Toolbars and SolidWorks CommandManager to get fast and easy access to the most 
frequently used Flow Simulation features. Toolbars and SolidWorks CommandManager 
are very convenient for displaying results. 
Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation Results. 
The Flow Simulation Results toolbar appears. 
Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation 
Results Features. The Flow Simulation 
Results Features toolbar appears. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-13
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-14 
Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation Display. The 
Flow Simulation Display toolbar appears. 
The SolidWorks CommandManager is a dynamically-updated, context-sensitive toolbar, 
which allows you to save space for the graphics area and access all toolbar buttons from 
one location. The tabs below the CommandManager is used to select a specific group of 
commands and features to make their toolbar buttons available in the CommandManager. 
To get access to the Flow Simulation commands and features, click the Flow Simulation 
tab of the CommandManager. 
If you wish, you may hide the Flow Simulation toolbars to save the space for the graphics 
area, since all necessary commands are available in the CommandManager. To hide a 
toolbar, click its name again in the View, Toolbars menu. 
1 Click Goals on the Results Main toolbar or CommandManager. The Goals dialog 
box appears. 
2 Click Add All to select all goals of the project 
(actually, in our case there is only one goal) . 
3 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is 
created. 
You can view the average temperature of the tube on the Summary sheet. 
Heat Exchanger.SLDASM [Level 3] 
Goa l Name Unit Value Ave raged Va lue Minimum Va lue Ma x imum V alue Progre ss [%] Use In Convergence 
VG Av T of Tube [K] 328.4682387 327.4703038 324.7176733 328.4682387 100 Yes 
Iterations: 51 
Analysis in terval: 21 
Creating a Cut Plot 
1 Click Cut Plot on the Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar. The Cut Plot 
dialog box appears.
2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select Plane3. 
3 In the Cut Plot dialog box, in addition to displaying 
Contours , select Vectors . 
4 Click View Settings in order to specify the temperature as the parameter for the 
contour plot. By default the Pressure is specified. 
5 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter 
list, select Temperature. 
6 Using the slider set the Number of colors 
to maximum. 
7 In the View Settings dialog box, click the 
Vectors tab and set the Max velocity to 
0.004 m/s. 
8 Click OK to save the changes and return to 
the Cut Plot dialog box. 
9 Click OK . The cut plot is created but 
the model overlaps it. 
10 Click the Right view on the Standard Views toolbar. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-15
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-16 
11 Click Geometry on the Flow Simulation Display toolbar to hide the model. 
Let us now display the flow development inside the exchanger. 
Flow Simulation allows you to display results in all four possible panes of the SolidWorks 
graphics area. Moreover, for each pane you can specify different View Settings. 
12 Click Window, Viewport, Two View - Horizontal. 
13 To restore the view orientation in the top pane, click Right view on the 
Standard Views toolbar. 
14 Click the bottom pane and select the Isometric view on the Standard 
Views toolbar. 
The gray contour around the pane 
border indicates that the view is active. 
15 On the Flow Simulation Display 
toolbar, click Geometry , then 
on the View toolbar click Hidden 
Lines Visible to show the face 
outlines. Click the top pane and set 
the same display mode for it by 
clicking Hidden Lines Visible 
again. 
To see how the water flows inside the 
exchanger we will display the Flow 
Trajectories. Click the bottom pane to 
make it the active pane.
Displaying Flow Trajectories 
1 Click Flow Trajectories on the Flow 
Simulation Results Features toolbar. The 
Flow Trajectories dialog appears. 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis tree tab 
and select the Inlet Mass Flow – Cold Water 
item. 
This selects the inner face of the Water Inlet 
Lid to place the trajectories start points on it. 
3 Click View Settings. 
4 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter 
list, select Velocity. 
5 Set Max velocity to 0.004 m/s. 
6 Click OK to save changes and return to the 
Flow Trajectories dialog. 
7 Click OK . Trajectories are created 
and displayed. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-17
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-18 
By default the trajectories are colored in accordance 
with the distribution of the parameter specified in the 
Contours tab of the View Settings dialog box. This 
is controlled by the Use from contours option on 
the Flow Trajectories tab of the View Settings 
dialog box. Since you specified velocity for the 
contour plot, the trajectory color corresponds to the 
velocity value. 
	 Notice that in the top pane the temperature contours are still displayed. The different 
view settings for each pane allow you to display contour plots for different physical 
parameters simultaneously. 
Since we are more interested in the temperature distribution let us color the trajectories 
with the values of temperature. 
1 Right-click in the graphics area of the 
bottom pane and select View Settings. 
2 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter 
box, select Temperature. 
3 Click OK. Immediately the trajectories are 
updated.
The water temperature range is less than the default 
overall (Global) range (293 – 600), so all of the 
trajectories are the same blue color. To get more 
information about the temperature distribution in 
water you can manually specify the range of interest. 
Let us display temperatures in the range of inlet-outlet 
water temperature. 
The water minimum temperature value is close to 293 K. Let us obtain the values of air 
and water temperatures at outlets using Surface Parameters. You will need these values to 
calculate the heat exchanger efficiency and determine the appropriate temperature range 
for flow trajectories visualization. 
	 Surface Parameters allows you to display parameter values (minimum, maximum, 
average and integral) calculated over the specified surface. All parameters are divided 
into two categories: Local and Integral. For local parameters (pressure, temperature, 
velocity etc.) the maximum, minimum and average values are evaluated. 
Computation of Surface Parameters 
1 Click Surface Parameters on the Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar. 
The Surface Parameters dialog box appears. 
2 Click the Environment Pressure - 
Warm Water item to select the inner 
face of the Water Outlet Lid. 
3 Select Consider entire model to take 
into account the Symmetry condition 
to see the values of parameters as if the 
entire model, not a half of it, was 
calculated. This is especially convenient for such parameters as mass and volume flow. 
4 Click Evaluate. 
5 After the parameters are calculated click the Local tab. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-19
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-20 
You can see that the average water 
temperature at the outlet is about 
300 K. 
Now let us determine the temperature of air at the outlet. 
6 Switch back to the Definition tab. 
7 Click the Environment Pressure - 
Air item to select the inner face of the 
Air Outlet Lid. 
8 Click Evaluate. 
9 After the parameters are calculated 
click the Local tab. 
You can see that the average air 
temperature at the outlet is about 
584 K. 
10 Click the Integral tab. You can see 
that the mass flow rate of air is 
0.046 kg/s. This value is 
calculated with the Consider 
entire model option selected, i.e. 
taking into account the Symmetry 
condition. 
11 Click Cancel to close the dialog 
box.
Calculating the Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
The heat exchanger efficiency can be easily calculated, but first we must determine the 
fluid with the minimum capacity rate (C= m& c 
). In this example the water mass flow rate 
is 0.02 kg/s and the air mass flow rate is 0.046 kg/s. The specific heat of water at the 
temperature of 300 K is about five times greater than that of air at the temperature of 
584 K. Thus, the air capacity rate is less than the water capacity rate. Therefore, 
according to Ref.2, the heat exchanger efficiency is calculated as follows: 
inle t Thot 
ε Thot 
– out let 
= ------------------------------, 
inlet Tcold 
Thot 
– inlet 
Thot 
inlet Thot 
outlet 
where is the temperature of the air at the inlet, is the temperature of the 
air at the outlet and Tinlet 
cold 
is the temperature of the water at the inlet. 
We already know the air temperature at the inlet (600 K) and the water temperature at the 
inlet (293.2 K), so using the obtained values of water and air temperatures at outlets, we 
can calculate the heat exchanger efficiency: 
ε Thot 
inlet Thot 
– outlet 
------------------------------ 600 – 584 
= = ---------------------------- = 0.052 
Thot 
– inlet 
inlet Tcold 
600 – 293.2 
Specifying the Parameter Display Range 
1 Right-click in the graphics area of the 
bottom pane and select View Settings. 
2 On the Contours tab, set Max temperature 
to 300 K. 
3 Using the slider set the Number of colors 
to maximum. 
4 Click OK. Immediately the trajectories are 
updated. 
If you specify the range, it may be convenient to display the global (calculated over the 
Computational Domain) minimum and maximum values of the current contour plot 
parameter. 
5 Click Display Global Min Max on the Flow Simulation Display toolbar. The 
temperature global minimum and maximum values appear at the top. The points where 
the parameter value reaches its minimum or maximum will be highlighted in the 
graphics area by color dots. The blue dots display locations of the points, where 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-21
Chapter 6 Heat Exchanger Efficiency 
6-22 
parameter value is minimum, while the red ones display locations of the maximum 
parameter value points. of the active (bottom) pane 
As you can see, Flow Simulation is a powerful tool for heat-exchanger design 
calculations. 
Ref. 2 J.P. Holman. “Heat Transfer” Eighth edition.
7 
Mesh Optimization 
The goal of this tutorial example is to demonstrate various meshing capabilities of Flow 
Simulation allowing you to better adjust the computational mesh to the problem at hand. 
Although the automatically generated mesh is usually appropriate, intricate problems with 
thin and/or small, but important, geometrical and physical features can result in extremely 
high number of cells, for which the computer memory is too small. In such cases we 
recommend that you try the Flow Simulation options allowing you to manually adjust the 
computational mesh to the solved problem's features to resolve them better. This tutorial 
teaches you how to do this. 
The Ejector in Exhaust Hood example aims to: 
• Settle the large aspect ratio between the minimum gap size and the model size by 
adjusting the initial mesh manually. 
• Resolve small features by specifying local mesh settings. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-1
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
Problem Statement 
7-2 
The ejector model is shown on the picture. Note that the ejector orifice’s diameter is more 
than 1000 times smaller than the characteristic model size determined as the 
computational domain’s overall dimension. 
Baffles 
Ejector 
Opening 
Exhaust 
Ejected chlorine orifice
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
Copy the Tutorial 4 – Mesh Optimization folder into your working directory and ensure 
that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. 
Open the Ejector in Exhaust Hood.SLDASM assembly. 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project Configuration Use current 
Unit system USA 
Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions 
Physical features Gravity; Default gravity (Y component: 
-32.1850394 ft/s^2) 
Fluids substances Air, Chlorine 
Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls 
Initial Conditions Initial gas concentration: Air – 1, Chlorine - 0 
Result and Geometry Resolution Default result resolution level 3; 
Default geometry resolution: automatic minimum 
gap size and minimum wall thickness, other 
options by default 
	 When you enable gravitation, pay attention that the hydrostatic pressure is calculated 
with respect to the global coordinate system, as follows: 
Phydrostatic = ρ(gx*x + gy*y+ gz*z), where ρ − reference density, gi - component of the 
gravitational acceleration vector and x, y, z - coordinates in the global coordinate 
system. 
Conditions 
At first, let us specify all the necessary boundary conditions because they influence the 
automatic initial mesh through the automatic minimum gap size, which depends on the 
characteristic size of the faces on which the boundary conditions are set. 
	 Flow Simulation calculates the default minimum gap size using information about the 
faces where boundary conditions (as well as sources, fans) and goals are specified. 
Thus, it is recommended to set all conditions before you start to analyze the mesh. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-3
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-4 
The first two boundary conditions are imposed on the exhaust hood's inlet and outlet. 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Environment Pressure: 
Default values (14.6959 lbf/in2, gas 
substance – Air) of the Environment 
pressure and Temperature (68.09 °F) 
at the box’s Lid for Face Opening; 
Outlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Outlet Volume Flow: 
Outlet volume flow rate of 
1000 ft3/min at the box’s Exhaust Lid. 
If you open the Initial Mesh dialog box (click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh) and select 
the Manual specification of the minimum gap size option, you can see that the current 
automatic minimum gap size is 0.5 ft, which is the width of the outlet opening (if you have 
opened the Initial Mesh dialog box, click Cancel to discard changes). 
The next inlet volume flow rate condition defines the gas ejected from the bottom of the 
Ejector component. 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Inlet Volume Flow: 
Inlet chlorine (Substance 
concentrations: Chlorine – 1; Air – 0) 
volume flow rate of 0.14 ft3/min at the 
lid that closes the orifice (make sure 
that you have selected the upper face 
of the lid).
If you now look at the automatic minimum gap size value (click Flow Simulation, Initial 
Mesh, Manual specification of the minimum gap size), you can see that it is close to the 
orifice diameter - 0.0044528 ft. 
	 The Minimum gap size is a parameter governing the computational mesh, so that a 
certain number of cells per the specified gap should be generated. To satisfy this 
condition the corresponding parameters governing the mesh are set by Flow 
Simulation (number of basic mesh cells, small solid features refinement level, narrow 
channel resolution, etc.). Note that these parameters are applied to the whole 
computational domain, resolving all its features of the same geometric characteristics 
(not only to a specific gap). 
Since the minimum gap size value influences the mesh in the entire computational 
domain, the large aspect ratio between the model and the minimum gap size value will 
produce a non-optimal mesh: not only will all small gaps be resolved, but there will also 
be many small cells in places where they are not necessary. As a result, an extremely large 
mesh will be produced, which may result in overly large computer memory requirements 
exceeding the computers' available resources. Moreover, if the aspect ratio between the 
model and the minimum gap size is more than 1000, Flow Simulation may not adequately 
resolve such models with the automatically generated mesh anyway. 
Finally, let us create the ejector’s porous media and apply it to the ejector’s top and side 
screens. 
The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under 
the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of the porous material, then when 
creating the porous condition, select the pre-defined "Screen Material" from the 
Engineering database. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-5
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-6 
Porous 
Media 
Screen material: 
Porosity: 0.5, 
Permeability type: 
Isotropic, 
Dependency on 
velocity: 
A = 0.07 kg/m4, 
B = 3e-008 kg/(s*m3). 
Components to apply: 
Top Screen 
Side Screen 
To see advantages of the local mesh and refinement options better, now let us try to 
generate the computational mesh governed by the automatic mesh settings. The resulting 
mesh consists of more than 1100000 cells, and cannot be processed by old computers due 
to the computer memory restriction (you may get a warning message about insufficient 
memory)
Manual Specification of the Minimum Gap Size 
We can distinguish two very different parts of the model: a relatively big cavity having 
several thin walls within and no small solid features, and the ejector’s region containing 
some very fine geometrical features. Therefore, the mesh required to properly resolve the 
ejector and the mesh appropriate for the rest of the model should be also very different. 
Since the ejector region is a part of the entire computational domain, we need to specify 
such settings for the automatic mesh generation that the model’s geometry outside the 
ejector’s region will be resolved without excessive mesh splitting. 
The minimum gap size value, automatically defined from the dimensions of the ejector’s 
Top Screen and Side Screen components, is too small and results in excessive mesh 
splitting. 
To define an appropriate minimum gap size we need to examine all narrow flow passages 
outside the ejector’s region: 
• Boundary conditions; 
• The passages connecting the ejector’s internal volume with the model’s cavity; 
• The narrow flow passages between the baffles. 
After reviewing the model we can accept the width of 
the gap between the middle and upper baffles as the 
minimum gap size. To avoid excessive mesh splitting, 
we will specify the same value for the minimum wall 
thickness. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 
2 Use the slider to set the Level of the initial mesh to 
5. 
3 Select the Manual specification of the minimum 
gap size checkbox and enter 0.067 ft in the 
Minimum gap size box. 
4 Select the Manual specification of the minimum 
wall thickness checkbox and enter 0.067 ft in 
the Minimum wall thickness box. 
0.067 ft 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-7
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-8 
5 Click OK. 
The resulting mesh has significantly less cells than the mesh generated automatically with 
the default values of Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness. The total number 
of cells is less than 200 000.
Switching off the Automatic Mesh Definition 
We have successfully reduced the number of cells, yet using the mesh of the higher level. 
The higher level mesh provides better refinement in the regions with small geometrical 
features. However, we actually do not need such a fine mesh in some regions where the 
flow field changes slowly. We can further decrease the number of cells by switching off 
the automatic definition of the mesh generation settings and adjusting these settings 
manually. The decreased number of cells will provide us a computer memory reserve 
needed to better resolve fine geometrical features of the ejector. 
Click Flow Simulation, Project, Rebuild. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. Switch off the automatic mesh settings by 
clearing the Automatic settings check box. The Initial Mesh dialog box controls the 
basic mesh and the initial mesh within the entire computational domain unless local 
initial mesh settings are specified. 
	 The mesh is named Initial since it is the mesh the calculation starts from and it could 
be further refined during the calculation if the solution-adaptive meshing is enabled. 
The initial mesh is constructed from the Basic mesh by refining the basic mesh cells in 
accordance with the specified mesh settings. The Basic mesh is formed by dividing the 
computational domain into slices by parallel planes which are orthogonal to the 
Global Coordinate System’s axes. 
The Initial Mesh’s parameters are currently set by Flow Simulation in accordance with the 
previously specified automatic mesh settings, including Minimum gap size and Minimum 
wall thickness. 
2 Go to the Narrow channel tab and set 
the Narrow channels refinement level 
to 1. This allows us to reduce the 
number of cells in the channels 
between the baffles and the wall of the 
Box. 
	 The Narrow channels refinement level 
specifies the smallest size of the cells in 
model’s flow passages with respect to 
the basic mesh cells. So if N = 0…7 is 
the specified Narrow channels 
refinement level, the minimum size of 
the cells obtained due to the mesh refinement is 2N times smaller (in each direction of 
the Global Coordinate System, or 8N times by volume) than the basic mesh cell’s size. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-9
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-10 
The resulting mesh is shown below. It has about 75 000 cells.
Using the Local Initial Mesh Option 
The ejector’s geometry is resolved reasonably well. However, if you generate the mesh 
and zoom in to the ejector’s orifice region, you will see that the gas inlet face is still 
unresolved. The resolution of the boundary condition surface is very important for 
correctly imposing the boundary condition. To resolve the gas inlet face properly we will 
use the Local Initial Mesh option. 
The local initial mesh option allows you to specify an initial mesh in a local region of the 
computational domain to better resolve the model geometry and/or flow peculiarities in 
this region. The local region can be defined by a component of the assembly, disabled in 
the Component Control dialog box, or specified by selecting a face, edge or vertex of the 
model. Local mesh settings are applied to all cells intersected by a component, face, edge, 
or a cell enclosing the selected vertex. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Local Initial Mesh. 
2 Select the inlet face of the ejector’s orifice or click the 
Inlet Volume Flow 1 boundary condition in the Flow 
Simulation Analysis tree to select the face on which 
this boundary condition is applied. 
3 Clear the Automatic settings check box 
and switch to the Refining cells tab. 
4 Select the Refine all cells checkbox and 
use the slider to set the Level of refining 
all cells to its maximum value of 7. 
5 Click OK. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-11
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-12 
Now we have specified to refine all cells at the ejector’s orifice inlet face up to the 
maximum level. The locally refined mesh is shown below. 
Specifying Control Planes 
The basic mesh in many respects governs the generated computational mesh. The proper 
basic mesh is necessary for the most optimal mesh. 
You can control the basic mesh in several ways: 
• Change number of the basic mesh cells along the X, Y, Z-axes. 
• Shift or insert basic mesh planes. 
• Stretch or contract the basic mesh cells locally by changing the relative distance 
between the basic mesh planes. 
	 The local mesh settings do not influence the basic mesh but are basic mesh sensitive: 
all refinement levels are set with respect to the basic mesh cell. 
You may notice that the mesh resolving the ejector’s orifice inlet face is not symmetric. It 
can has a negative effect on the specified boundary condition. We will add a control plane 
to shift the boundary between cells so that it will pass through the center of the inlet face. 
1 In the Initial Mesh dialog box, go to the Basic Mesh tab. 
2 Click Add Plane. The Create Control Planes dialog box 
appears. 
3 In the Creating mode list select Reference geometry. 
4 Under Parallel to select XY. 
5 Zoom in to the ejector’s orifice area and select edge of the 
inlet face in the graphics area. The control plane will pass 
through the middle of the edge parallel to the Global 
Coordinate System plane selected in the Parallel to group. 
Please check that the value of offset along the Z axis, 
appeared in the Control planes list, is equal to 0.703125 ft. If not, it means that you 
have mistakenly selected another geometry feature. In this case, right-click on the
Control planes list and select Delete All, then try to select the edge of the inlet face 
again. 
6 Click OK. The Z2 Control Plane appears in the Control planes table. 
	 You can visualize the basic mesh before solving the problem. To see the basic mesh, 
click Draw basic mesh in the Initial Mesh dialog box or click Flow Simulation, 
Project, Show Basic Mesh. 
7 Click OK to save changes and close the Initial Mesh dialog box. 
Then, generate the initial mesh to check whether the thin walls and the other geometry are 
resolved. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 
2 Clear the Solve check box in order to generate the 
mesh only. 
3 Clear the Load results check box. 
4 Click Run. 
Prior to visualizing the initial computational mesh, let 
us switch the Flow Simulation option to use the meshed geometry instead of the SW 
model's geometry to visualize the results. 
By default, Flow Simulation shows the SolidWorks model’s geometry when displaying 
the results. Depending on how exactly the model has been resolved with the 
computational mesh, the SolidWorks model’s geometry may differ from the geometry 
used in the calculation. To display the real captured geometry the Use CAD geometry 
option is reserved. 
5 Click Tools, Options, then click Third Party. 
6 On the Flow Simulation Options tab, under 
General Options, select the Display mesh 
check box. 
7 Under View Options clear the Use CAD 
geometry (Default) check box. 
8 Click OK. 
Next load the file with the initial computational 
mesh: right-click the Results icon and select Load 
Results, then select the 1.cpt file and click Open. 
Note that the total number of cells is about 75 000. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-13
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-14 
	 The calculation results, including the current 
computational mesh, are saved in the .fld files, 
whereas the initial computational mesh is 
saved separately in the .cpt files. Both of the 
files are saved in the project folder, whose 
numerical name is formed by Flow Simulation 
and must not be changed. 
Create a cut plot based on the CENTERLINE with the Mesh option selected. Create a 
second cut plot based on the ejector’s orifice inlet face with the Offset of -0.00025 ft 
relative to the selected face and the same settings as the first cut plot. 
Now you can see that the generated mesh is symmetrical relative to the center of the inlet 
face. 
Creating a Second Local Initial Mesh 
With the specified mesh settings the ejector’s geometry will be resolved properly. But we 
need to create the mesh successfully resolving not only fine geometrical features, but the 
small flow peculiarities as well. In the Ejector Analysis project such peculiarities can be 
found within the internal volume of the ejector, where the thin stream of chlorine is 
injected from the ejector’s orifice. Therefore the mesh within the ejector’s region must be 
split additionally. To refine the mesh only in this region and avoid excessive splitting of 
the mesh cells in other parts of the model, we apply a local initial mesh at the component 
surrounding this region. The component was created specially to specify the local initial 
mesh. 
Set to resolved the LocalMesh2 component. Click Close after Flow Simulation shows 
you a warning message. Note that this component was created so that there is a small 
distance between the boundaries of the component and the solid feature of interest (i.e., 
the ejector). Because the local settings are applied only to the cells whose centers lie 
within the selected model component, it is recommended to have the component's 
boundaries offset from the solid component's walls.
After resolving the LocalMesh2 component an error message appears informing you that 
the inlet volume flow condition is not in contact with the fluid region. The problem 
disappears after disabling the component in the Component Control dialog box to treat it 
as a fluid region. 
Click Flow Simulation, Component Control and disable the 
LocalMesh2 component. Click OK. 
Rebuild the project by clicking Flow Simulation, Project, 
Rebuild. 
	 You can also disable components directly from the Local 
Initial Mesh dialog box by selecting the Disable solid 
components option on the Region tab. 
Next specify the local mesh settings for the ejector’s region. 
1 Select the LocalMesh2 component. 
2 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Local 
Initial Mesh. 
3 Clear the Automatic settings check box 
and switch to the Narrow Channels tab. 
4 Specify the Characteristic number of 
cells across a narrow channel equal to 
15. 
5 Use the slider to set the Narrow 
channels refinement level to 3. 
6 Click OK. 
	 The settings on the Narrow Channels tab controls the mesh refinement in the model’s 
flow passages. Characteristic number of cells across a narrow channel box specify 
the number of initial mesh cells (including partial cells) that Flow Simulation will try 
to set across the model’s flow passages in the direction normal to solid/fluid interface . 
If possible, the number of cells across narrow channels will be equal to the specified 
characteristic number, otherwise it will be close to the characteristic number. If this 
condition is not satisfied, the cells lying in this direction will be split to satisfy the 
condition. 
Rebuild the project. Create the mesh again (without the following calculation) and load 
the 1.cpt file. 
Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Geometry to hide the model. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-15
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-16 
Finally, let us compare how the final mesh resolves the solid geometry and the fluid region 
within the ejector with only about 100 000 cells in contrast with 1 100 000 cells generated 
by the automatic mesh settings.
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-17
Chapter 7 Mesh Optimization 
7-18
8 
Application of EFD Zooming 
Problem Statement 
The Flow Simulation PE capability of EFD Zooming is demonstrated as an engineering 
tutorial1 example of selecting a better heat sink shape for a main chip taking into account 
other electronic components in an electronic enclosure. 
The assembly model of the electronic enclosure including the main chip’s heat sink under 
consideration is shown in picture. The fan installed at the enclosure inlet blows air 
through the enclosure to the outlet slots with the goal of cooling the heated electronic 
elements (having heat sources inside). The planar main chip is attached to a motherboard 
made of an insulator. To cool the main chip better, its opposite plane surface is covered by 
a heat sink cooled by the air stream from the fan. 
1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-1
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-2 
Inlet Fan 
PCB 
Small Chips 
Main Chip 
Heat Sink 
Capacitors 
Power Supply 
Mother Board 
Electronic 
enclosure 
The problem’s engineering aim is to determine the temperature of the main chip when 
using one of two heat sink designs. All other conditions within the enclosure will be 
invariable. As a result, we will find out the difference in cooling capability between these 
two competing shapes. 
No.1 
No.2 
The heat sink’s competing shapes (No.1 and No.2) 
As you can see, all components within the electronic enclosure except the main chip’s heat 
sink are specified as coarse shapes without small details, since they do not influence the 
main chip’s temperature which is the aim of the analysis (the enclosure model was 
preliminary simplified to this level on purpose). On the contrary, the heat sink of each 
shape is featured by multiple thin (thickness of 0.1 in) fins with narrow (gaps of 0.1 in) 
channels between them.
Two Ways of Solving the Problem with Flow Simulation 
Flow Simulation allows us to simplify the solution of this problem. Two possible 
techniques are listed below. 
In the first and more direct way, we compute the entire flow inside the whole electronic 
enclosure for each heat sink shape with using the Local Initial Mesh option for 
constructing a fine computational mesh in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins. 
Naturally, the Heat conduction in solids option is enabled in these computations. 
In the other, two-stage way (EFD Zooming using the Transferred Boundary Condition 
option), we solve the same problem in the following two stages: 
1 computing the entire flow inside the whole electronic enclosure at a low result 
resolution level without resolving the heat sink’s fine features (so, the parallelepiped 
envelope is specified instead of the heat sink’s comb shape) and disabling the Heat 
conduction in solids option; 
2 computing the flow over the real comb-shaped heat sink in a smaller computational 
domain surrounding the main chip, using the Transferred Boundary Condition option 
to take the first stage’s computation results as boundary conditions, specifying a fine 
computational mesh in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins to resolve them, 
and enabling the Heat conduction in solids option. 
The first stage’s computation is performed once and then used for the second stage’s 
computations performed for each of the heat sink’s shapes. 
The EFD Zooming Approach 
Let us begin from the second (EFD Zooming) approach employing the Transferred 
Boundary Condition option. Then, to validate the results obtained with this approach, we 
will solve the problem in the first way by employing the Local Initial Mesh option. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-3
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
First Stage of EFD Zooming 
8-4 
In accordance with the 1st stage of EFD Zooming aimed at computing the entire flow 
inside the electronic enclosure, it is not necessary to resolve the flow’s small features, i.e., 
streams between the heat sink’s fins, at this stage. Therefore, we suppress the heat sink’s 
comb shape feature in the assembly model, obtaining the parallelepiped envelope instead. 
A parallelepiped heat sink is used at the 1st stage of EFD Zooming. 
The model simplification at this stage allows us to compute the electronic enclosure’s flow 
by employing the automatic initial mesh settings with a lower level of initial mesh (we use 
4) and accepting the automatic settings for the minimum gap size and the minimum wall 
thickness. Moreover, at this stage it is also not necessary to compute heat conduction in 
solids, since we do not compute the main chip temperature at this stage. Instead, we 
specify surface heat sources of the same (5W) heat transfer rates at the main chip and heat 
sink (parallelepiped) faces and at the small chips’ faces (they are heated also in this 
example) to simulate heating of the air flow by the electronic enclosure. This is not 
obligatory, but removing the heat conduction in solids at this stage saves computer 
resources. As a result, the computer resources (memory and CPU time) required at this 
stage are substantially reduced. 
Project for the First Stage of EFD Zooming 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM 
assembly located in the Tutorial PE1 - EFD Zooming folder and click Open (or 
double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the 
Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Make sure 
that the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration is the active one. Note that heat sink 
(HeatSink.SLDPRT) is the parallelepiped obtained by suppressing the heat sink’s cuts.
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Use current: Zoom – Global - L4 
Unit system USA 
Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions 
Physical features No physical features are selected 
Fluid Air 
Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, Default smooth walls 
Initial Conditions Default conditions 
Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution level set to 4, other options are 
default 
For this project we use the automatic initial mesh and the default computational domain. 
	 Note that Level of initial mesh is set 
to 4 in accordance with the Result 
resolution level specified in the 
Wizard. The Result Resolution 
defines two parameters in the 
created project, namely, the Level of 
initial mesh and the Results 
resolution level. The Level of initial 
mesh is accessible from the Initial 
Mesh dialog box and governs the 
initial mesh only. The Results 
resolution level is accessible from 
the Calculation Control Options 
dialog box and governs the 
refinement of computational mesh during calculation and the calculation finishing 
conditions. The Geometry Resolution options, which also influence the initial mesh, 
can be changed in the Initial Mesh box, and/or their effects can be corrected in the 
Initial Mesh and Local Initial Mesh dialog boxes. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-5
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-6 
Unit System 
After passing the Wizard, first we will adjust the system of units. The new custom system 
of units is based on the selected USA pre-defined system, but uses Watts for power, and 
inches for length. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Units. 
2 Specify Inch for the Length and Watt for the 
Total heat flow & power. 
3 Click Save. 
4 In the Save to Database dialog box, expand the 
Units group and select the User Defined item. 
5 Name the new system of units Electronics. 
6 Click OK to return to the Unit System dialog box. 
7 Click OK. 
Conditions 
We specify External Inlet Fan at the inlet, Environment Pressure at three outlets. For more 
detailed explanation of how to set these conditions please refer to the First Steps - 
Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial. 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
External Inlet Fan: 
Pre-Defined Fan Curves 
PAPST DC-Axial Series 
400 405 405 with default 
settings (ambient pressure 
of 14.6959 lbf/in2, 
temperature of 68.09 °F) 
set at the Inlet Lid;
Outlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Heat Sources 
Environment Pressure: 
Default thermodynamic 
parameters (ambient 
pressure of 14.6959 lbf/in2, 
temperature of 68.09 °F) 
for the Environment 
pressure at the Outlet Lids. 
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, to simulate the flow heating by the electronic 
enclosure, we specify surface heat sources of the same (5W) heat transfer rates at the main 
chip and the heat sink (parallelepiped) faces and at the small chips’ faces. Since we do not 
consider heat conduction in solids in this project, the surface source can be applied only to 
faces in contact with fluid. Follow the steps below to create the sources on the necessary 
faces: 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Surface Source. 
In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree, select the Heat Sink and Main Chip 
components. Flow Simulation automatically selects all faces of the Heat Sink and 
Main Chip components. Faces that are not in contact with fluid must be removed from 
the Faces to Apply the Surface Source list. 
2 Click Filter Faces . Select Keep outer faces and 
faces in contact with fluid. 
3 Click Filter. 
	 It is convenient to select all faces of the component by 
selecting this component in the Flyout FeatureManager 
Design Tree, though finding and removing unnecessary 
faces from the selection manually (one by one) may 
require excessive time, especially when there are many 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-7
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-8 
faces to remove. The Filter allows you to remove unnecessary faces of specified type 
from the list of selected faces. 
4 Set the value of the source to 5 W. 
	 The specified heat source value (Heat Transfer Rate) is 
distributed among the selected faces in proportion to 
their areas. 
5 Click OK . 
Following the same procedure, create a surface 
source of the 5 W on the total surface of small chips. 
Goals 
Specify the surface goals of mass flow rate at the inlet and outlet. 
Run the calculation. After the calculation is finished you can start the second stage of EFD 
Zooming to focus on the main chip. 
Save the model.
Second Stage of EFD Zooming 
At the 2nd stage of EFD Zooming aimed at determining the main chip’s temperature, we 
compute the flow over the heat sink in a smaller computational domain surrounding the 
main chip, using the Transferred Boundary Condition option to take the first stage’s 
computation results as boundary conditions. To compute the solids temperature, we enable 
the Heat conduction in solids option. Since at this stage the computational domain is 
reduced substantially, a fine computational mesh with an affordable number of cells can 
be constructed in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins, even when considering 
heat conduction in solids during computation. 
Project for the Second Stage of EFD Zooming 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
Activate the Zoom - SinkNo1 - L4 configuration. Note that heat sink’s cuts are resolved 
now. 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Use current: Zoom - SinkNo1 - L4 
Unit system Electronics 
Analysis type Internal 
Physical features Heat conduction in solids is enabled 
Fluid Air 
Default solid Metals/Aluminum 
Wall Condition Default condition (Adiabatic); Default smooth 
walls (0 microinches) 
Initial Conditions Default initial conditions (in particular, the initial 
solid temperature is 68.09°F) 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-9
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-10 
Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution 
level set to 4; 
Minimum gap 
size = 0.1 in, 
automatic 
minimum wall 
thickness; 
other options are 
default. 
Here, we use the automatic initial mesh by specifying the Result resolution level (Level 
of initial mesh) of 4, but in contrast to the first stage’s computation, we specify manually 
the minimum gap size of 0.1 in to resolve the fine features of heat sink. 
Next, we will reduce the computational domain to focus on the main chip, i.e. perform 
EFD Zooming. 
Computational Domain 
When reducing the computational domain for EFD Zooming purposes, it is necessary to 
take into account that the first stage’s computation results will serve as the boundary 
conditions at this domain’s boundaries. Therefore, to obtain reliable results in the second 
stage’s computations, we have to specify computational domain boundaries (as planes 
parallel to the X-, Y-, Z-planes of the Global Coordinate system) satisfying the following 
conditions: 
1 the flow and solid parameters at these boundaries, taken from the first stage’s 
computation, must be as uniform as possible; 
2 the boundaries must not lie too close to the object of interest, since the object’s features 
were not resolved at the first stage’s computation. The computational domain must be 
large enough not to receive influence from more complex features of the newly added 
object; 
3 the boundary conditions transferred to or specified at the boundaries must be consistent 
with the problem’s statements (e.g., if in the problem under consideration the mother 
board is made of a heat-conducting material, then it is incorrect to cut the mother board 
with computational domain boundaries, since this will yield an incorrect heat flux from 
the chip through the mother board). 
In this project we specify the following computational domain boundaries satisfying the 
above-mentioned requirements. Click Flow Simulation, Computational Domain to adjust 
the computational domain size as follows: 
• Xmin = -2.95 in (entirely lies inside the electronic enclosure side wall made of 
aluminum, this material does not influence the main chip’s temperature since it is 
insulated from the chip by the heat-insulating mother board and the air flow, its
boundary condition is automatically specified as the 68.09 °F temperature specified 
as the initial condition for all solids), 
• Xmax = 0.7 in (the boundary conditions in the fluid region of this boundary are 
transferred from the first stage’s computation results, the same boundary conditions 
as at Xmin = -2.95 in are automatically specified at this boundary’s upper solid part 
lying in the electronic enclosure’s aluminum wall, and the same boundary 
conditions as at Zmin = -1 in are automatically specified at the lower solid part lying 
in the mother board), 
• Ymin = -1 in, Ymax = 4 in (the boundary conditions at these boundaries are specified 
in the same manner as at Xmax = 0.7 in, as well as at the boundaries’ side parts also 
lying in the aluminum wall), 
• Zmin = -1.1 in (entirely lies inside the mother board specified as a heat insulator, 
therefore the adiabatic wall boundary condition is automatically specified at this 
boundary), 
• Zmax = 1.2 in (entirely lies inside the electronic enclosure’s aluminum upper wall, 
therefore the same boundary condition, as at Xmin = -2.95 in, are automatically 
specified at this boundary). 
Conditions 
The reduced computational domain. 
First, we specify Transferred Boundary Conditions. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-11
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-12 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, 
Transferred Boundary Condition. 
2 Add the Xmax, Ymax and Ymin 
Computational Domain boundaries to 
the Boundaries to apply the transferred 
boundary condition list. To add a 
boundary, select it and click Add, or 
double-click a boundary. 
3 Click Next. 
4 At Step 2, click Browse to select the 
Flow Simulation project whose results 
will be used as boundary conditions for 
the current Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 project. 
	 You can select a calculated project of any 
currently open model, or browse for the 
results (.fld) file. 
5 In the Browse for Project dialog select the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration and 
click OK. 
6 Click Next. 
7 At Step 3, accept Ambient as the Boundary condition type. 
	 The Ambient boundary condition consists 
of specifying (by taking results of a 
previous calculation) flow parameters at 
the boundary's section lying in the fluid, 
so they will act during the calculation in 
nearly the same manner as ambient 
conditions in an external analysis. If Heat 
Conduction in Solids is enabled, then the 
solid temperature is specified at this 
boundary's section lying in the solid (by 
taking results of a previous calculation). 
The heat flux at this boundary, which will be obtained as part of the problem solution, 
can be non-zero. 
8 Click Finish. 
Specify the other conditions as follows:
Heat Sources 
Volume Source of 5W heat 
generation rate in the main chip; 
Solid Materials 
a) Main Chip is made of silicon 
(Pre-Defined/Semiconductors); 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-13
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-14 
b) MotherBoard and Enclosure are made of insulator 
(Pre-Defined/Glasses & Minerals); 
c) all other parts (e.g. the heat sink) are made of aluminum. 
Goals 
Specify the Volume Goals of maximum and average 
temperatures of the main chip and the heat sink. 
Run the calculation. 
The obtained computational results are presented in tables and pictures below. These 
results were obtained with the heat sink’s shape No.1. 
If you look at the computational mesh you can see that it has two cells for each of the heat 
sink’s channels, and two cells for each of the sink’s fins. 
The mesh cut plot obtained for the heat sink No.1 at Y=-0.3 in.
In fact, the Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness influence the same 
parameter, namely, the characteristic cell size. By default, Flow Simulation generates 
the basic mesh in order to have a minimum of two cells per the specified Minimum gap 
size. The number of cells per the Minimum gap size depends non-linearly on the Level 
of initial mesh and cannot be less than two. In turn, the Minimum wall thickness 
condition induces Flow Simulation to create the basic mesh having two cells (two cells 
are enough to resolve a wall) per the specified Minimum wall thickness (regardless of 
the specified initial mesh level). That’s why, if the Minimum wall thickness is equal to 
or greater than the Minimum gap size, then the former does not influence the resulting 
mesh at all. 
Changing the Heat Sink 
Let us now see how employing the heat sink’s shape No. 2 changes the computational 
results. To do this, we change the heat sink configuration to the No.2 version, whereas all 
the EFD Zooming Flow Simulation project settings of 2nd stage are retained. There is no 
need to perform the EFD Zooming computation of 1st stage again, as we may use its 
results in this project too. 
The easiest way to create the same Flow Simulation project for the new model 
configuration is to clone the existing project to this configuration. 
Clone Project to the Existing Configuration 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone 
Project. 
2 Click Add to existing. 
3 In the Existing configuration list select Zoom 
- SinkNo2 - L4. 
Click OK. After clicking OK, two warning 
messages appear asking you to reset the 
computational domain and to rebuild the 
computational mesh. Select No to ignore the 
resizing of computational domain, and Yes to 
rebuild the mesh. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-15
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-16 
After cloning the project you can start the calculation immediately. 
The obtained results are presented in tables and pictures below. It is seen that due to the 
new shape of the heat sink the main chip’s temperature is reduced by about 15 °F. That is 
caused by both the increased area of the heat sink’s ribs and streamlining the flow in the 
heat sink’s narrow channels between the ribs (in heat sink No.1 about half of the channel is 
occupied by a counterflow vortex). 
The Local Initial Mesh Approach 
To validate the results obtained with the EFD Zooming approach, let us now solve the 
same problems employing the Local Initial Mesh option. To employ this option, we add a 
parallelepiped surrounding the main chip to the model assembly and then disable it in the 
Component Control dialog box. This volume represents a fluid region in which we can 
specify computational mesh settings differing from those in the other computational 
domain, using the Local Initial Mesh option. 
The electronic enclosure configuration with the additional part for applying the Local Initial Mesh op 
Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No1) 
To create the project we clone the Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 to the existing LocalMesh – 
SinkNo1 - N2 configuration, but in contrast to the previous cloning we reset the 
computational domain to the default size so the computational domain encloses the entire 
model. 
Activate Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 configuration.
Open the Clone Project dialog, click Add to 
existing and, in the Existing configuration list 
select the LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 as the 
configuration to which Flow Simulation will attach 
the cloned project. 
After clicking OK, confirm with Yes both the 
appearing messages. 
Conditions 
First remove the inherited transferred boundary 
condition. Right-click the Transferred 
Boundary Condition1 item in the tree and select 
Delete. 
Next, copy the boundary conditions from the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration using the 
Copy Feature tool. 
1 ActivateZoom – Global - L4 configuration. 
2 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Copy Features. The 
Copy Features dialog box appears. 
3 Switch to the Flow Simulation analysis tree tab, hold 
down the Ctrl key and in the Flow Simulation Analysis 
tree select Environment Pressure 1 and External Inlet 
Fan 1 items. These features appear in the Features to 
copy list. 
4 Select LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 as the Target 
Project. 
5 Click OK . 
6 Activate LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 configuration. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-17
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-18 
Heat Sources 
To the already existing volume 
source of the 5W heat generation rate 
in the main chip, add the total 5W 
heat generation rate in the small 
chips. 
Solid Materials 
The following material definitions 
were inherited from the previous 
project so you do not need to create 
them again, but you need to edit the 
Silicon Solid Material 1 to include 
small chips and to edit Insulator Solid Material 1 to include inlet and outlet lids: 
a) the Main Chip and small chips are made of silicon; 
b) the MotherBoard, the Enclosure, the Inlet Lid and the Outlet Lids are made of 
insulator; 
c) PCB1 and PCB2 are made of user defined Tutorial PCB material, which is added to 
the Engineering Database in the First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial example. 
d) all other parts are made of the default aluminum. 
Goals 
Keep the cloned volume goals of maximum and average temperatures of the main chip 
and the heat sink. 
Level of Initial Mesh 
Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh to adjust the automatic initial mesh settings.
Set the Level of initial mesh to 3. Since heat 
conduction in solids is enabled, setting the Level of 
initial mesh to 4 together with the local mesh settings 
will produce large number of cells resulting in longer 
CPU time. To decrease the calculation time for this 
tutorial example we decrease the Level of initial mesh 
to 3. Note that the Result resolution level is still equal 
to 4 as it was specified in the Wizard. To see the value 
of the result resolution level, click Flow Simulation, Calculation Control Options, and 
then click Reset. To close the Reset dialog box, click Cancel. 
Click Flow Simulation, Project, Rebuild. 
Specifying Local Initial Mesh Settings 
To apply the local mesh setting to a 
region we need a component 
representing this region to be disabled 
in the Component Control dialog box. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, 
Local Initial Mesh. 
2 In the FeatureManager Design Tree, 
select the LocalMesh component. 
3 Click the Disable solid 
components check box. 
4 Clear the Automatic settings check box. 
5 Go to the Narrow Channels tab and set the 
Characteristic number of cells across a 
narrow channel = 2 and Narrow channels 
refinement level = 4. 
6 Click OK. 
	 The Narrow Channels term is conventional and used for the definition of the model’s 
flow passages in the normal-to-solid/fluid-interface direction. The procedure of 
refinement is applied to each flow passage within the computational domain unless you 
specify for Flow Simulation to ignore the passages of a specified height with the 
Enable the minimum height of narrow channels and Enable the maximum height of 
narrow channels options. The Characteristic number of cells across a narrow 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-19
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
8-20 
channel (let us denote it as Nc) and Narrow channels refinement level (let us denote 
it as L) both influence the mesh in narrow channels in the following way: the basic 
mesh in narrow channels will be split to have the specified Nc number per a channel, if 
the resulting cells satisfy the specified L. In other words, whatever the specified Nc, a 
narrow channel’s cells cannot be smaller in 8L (2L in each direction of the Global 
Coordinate System) times than the basic mesh cell. This is necessary to avoid the 
undesirable mesh splitting in superfine channels that may cause increasing the number 
of cells to an excessive value. 
In our case, to ensure the 2 cells across a channel criterion, we increased the Narrow 
channels refinement level to 4. 
We perform these settings for both of the heat sinks under consideration. 
Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No2) 
Clone the active LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 to the 
existing LocalMesh – SinkNo2 - N2 configuration. 
While cloning confirm the message to rebuild the 
mesh. 
Using the Batch Run calculate both projects. 
Results 
The computational results obtained for both of the heat sinks are presented below in 
comparison with the results obtained with the EFD Zooming approach. It is seen that 
computations with the local mesh settings yield practically the same results as the EFD 
Zooming approach, therefore validating it. 
The computed maximum and average main chip and heat sink temperatures when 
employing the different heat sinks. 
He at sink N o.1 
Zoom - 
S inkN o1 - 
L4 
LocalMesh - 
S inkNo1 - 
N 2 
Heat s ink N o .2 
Zoom - 
SinkN o 2 - 
L4 
LocalMesh - 
SinkN o 2 - 
N 2 
Parameter 
tm ax, °F 111.1 114.1 96.4 99.4 
tav er, °F 110.8 113.8 96.1 99.2 
tm ax, °F 111 114.1 96.3 99.4 
Ma in chip 
He at sink ta v e r , °F 1 10.6 113.7 95. 9 99
EFD Zooming Local Mesh 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at Y=2.19 in (Top plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and 
Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at Z= -0.32 in (Front plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and 
Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at X= -1.53 in (Right plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and 
Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-21
Chapter 8 Application of EFD Zooming 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at Y=2.19 in (Top plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and 
Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at Z=-0.32 in (Front plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) 
and Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at X= -1.53 in (Right plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) an 
Local Mesh (right) approaches. 
8-22
9 
Textile Machine 
Problem Statement 
The simplified textile machine used by this tutorial is described as a closed hollow cylinder 
having a cylindrical stator with a narrow inlet tube. A thin-walled cone rotates at a very high 
speed. The air flows over the rotating cone before leaving through the outlet pipe. Due to the 
shear stress, the rotating cone swirls the air. The swirling air motion orients the fibers, for the 
correct formation of yarn. 
In this example1 a hollow cylinder with the following dimensions were used: 32 mm inner 
diameter and 20 mm inner height. Air is injected into an inlet tube of 1 mm diameter at a 
mass flow rate of 0.0002026 kg/s. The cone thickness is 1 mm and the cone's edge is 
spaced at 3 mm from the bottom of the main cylinder. The cone rotates at a speed of 
130000 RPM. The static pressure of 96325 Pa is specified at the cylinder's outlet tube exit. 
Flow Simulation analyzes the air flow without any fiber particles. The influence of the 
fiber particles on the air flow was assumed to be negligible. Small polystyrene particles 
were injected into the air stream using the postprocessor Flow Trajectory feature to study 
the air flows influence on the fibers. A 40 m/s tangential velocity of air is specified as an 
initial condition to speed up convergence and reduce the total CPU time needed to solve 
the problem. 
1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-1
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
Stator 
Outlet 
P = 96325 Pa 
Inlet mass flow rate of 
0.0002026 kg/s 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
9-2 
Housing 
Rotating wall 
ω = 130000 RPM 
1mm 
Copy the Tutorial Advanced 2 - Rotating Walls folder into your working directory and 
ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these 
files. Open the Textile Machine.SLDASM assembly.
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Create new: 130000rpm 
Unit system SI; select mm (Millimeter) for Length and RPM 
Analysis type Internal; 
Physical features No physical features are selected 
Fluid Air 
Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls 
Initial Conditions Default conditions 
Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution level set to 4; 
Conditions 
(Rotations Per Minute) for Angular Velocity 
under Loads&Motion 
Exclude cavities without flow conditions 
Minimum gap size = 1 mm, automatic minimum 
wall thickness, other options are default 
Specify the inlet and outlet boundary conditions as follows: 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Inlet Mass Flow = 0.0002026: 
Inlet mass flow rate of 
0.0002026 kg/s normal to the 
inlet face of the Stator; To do 
this, you may need to hide the 
Initial Velocity 1 and Initial 
Velocity 2 components. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-3
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
Outlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Specifying Rotating Walls 
9-4 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and 
select Insert Boundary Condition. 
2 Select Wall , 
then Real Wall. 
3 In the Flyout 
FeatureManager 
Design Tree select 
the Rotor 
component. All the 
rotor’s faces are 
selected. However, 
the top face is out of 
the computational 
domain and must be 
excluded. 
4 Click Filter Faces . Select Remove faces out of 
computational domain . 
5 Click Filter. 
Outlet Static Pressure = 
96325 Pa: 
Static pressure of 96325 Pa at 
the outlet face of the Housing 
(the other parameters are 
default).
6 Select Wall Motion. 
7 Specify the Angular Velocity of 130000 RPM. 
8 Select Y as the rotation Axis. 
9 Click OK and rename the new Real Wall 1 item to 
Rotating Wall = 130 000 rpm. 
Initial Conditions - Swirl 
To speed up the convergence, a 40 m/s tangential velocity of air is specified as an initial 
condition within the housing. The Initial Velocity 1 and Initial Velocity 2 auxiliary 
components are used to define a fluid domain. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Initial Condition. 
2 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the 
Initial Velocity 1 and Initial Velocity 2 components. 
3 Select the Disable solid components option. Flow 
Simulation will treat these components as a fluid region. 
4 Select Y in the Reference axis list. 
5 Under Flow Parameters, click Dependency to 
the right of the Velocity in X direction box. The 
Dependency dialog box appears. 
6 In the Dependency type list, select Formula 
Definition. 
7 In the Formula box, type the formula defining the 
velocity in X direction: 40*cos(phi). 
Here phi is the polar angle ϕ defined as shown on the 
picture below. 
ϕ 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-5
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
9-6 
8 Click OK. You will return to the Initial Condition PropertyManager. 
9 Click Dependency to the right of the 
Velocity in Z direction box and specify 
formula for the Z component of velocity: 
-40*sin(phi). 
10 Click OK. 
11 Under Thermodynamic Parameters click 
the Pressure box and type 99800 Pa. 
12 Click OK . 
13 Click-pause-click the new Initial Condition1 item and 
rename it to vel = 40 ms. 
Specifying Goals 
Since the rotating cone swirls the air, it make sense to specify the air velocity as a goal to 
ensure the calculation stops when the velocity is converged. In addition, let us specify the 
static pressure surface goal at the inlet and the mass flow rate surface goal at the outlet as 
additional criteria for converging the calculation. 
Specify the following project goals: 
GOAL TYPE GOAL VALUE FACE/COMPONENT 
Global Goal Average Velocity 
Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Outlet face(click the outlet static 
pressure boundary condition item to 
select the outlet face) 
Surface Goal Average Static Pressure Inlet face(click the inlet mass flow rate 
boundary condition item to select the 
inlet face) 
Volume Goal Average Velocity Initial Velocity 1 
(select the component in the Flyout 
FeatureManager Design Tree)
Volume Goal Average Velocity Initial Velocity 2 
Calculate the project. 
Results - Smooth Walls 
(select the component in the Flyout 
FeatureManager Design Tree) 
The calculated flow velocity field and velocity Y-component field at Z = 0 (XY section) 
are shown in the pictures below. It can be seen that the maximum flow velocity occurs 
near the inlet tube and near the rotating cone's inner surface at the cone's edge. 
Velocity in the XY section at Z = 0. 
Flow velocity Y-component of flow velocity 
It is interesting that the vertical (i.e. along the Y axis) velocity in the region close to the 
rotating cone's internal and external surfaces is directed to the cylinder bottom. Also, this 
velocity component is nearly zero in the gap between the rotating cone and the bottom of 
the cylinder, and positive (i.e. directed to the top) in the vicinity of the cylinder's side 
walls. As a result, small particles carried by the air into the region between the lower edge 
of the rotating cone and the bottom of the cylinder cannot leave this region due to the 
small vertical velocity there. On the other hand, larger particles entering this region may 
bounce from the cylinder’s bottom wall (in this example the ideal, i.e. full reflection is 
considered) and fly back to the region of high vertical velocity. Then they are carried by 
the air along the cylinder's side walls to the cylinder's top wall where they remain in this 
region's vortex. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-7
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
Displaying Particles Trajectories and Flow Streamlines 
9-8 
1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select 
Insert. 
2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis tree tab and then 
click the inlet boundary condition icon 
(Inlet Mass Flow = 0.0002026) to select the inlet face 
from which the particles are injected. 
3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 10. 
4 Under Options select the Forward direction and 
set Draw Trajectories As to Lines with Arrows .
5 Under Constraints increase the Maximum Length 
of trajectories to 15000 mm. 
	The Maximum length option limits the 
length of the trajectory to the specified 
value. We increase this value to show 
better the flow vorticity. 
6 Click OK do display flow 
streamlines. 
To display particles trajectories, we need to specify initial particle properties (temperature, 
velocity and diameter), particle's material, the wall condition (absorption or reflection) 
and, optionally, the gravity. 
1 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Particle 
Studies icon and select Insert. 
2 In the Injections tab, click Insert to specify an 
injection. The Injection dialog box appears. 
	In the Injection dialog box you can specify 
injection as a group of particles of the same 
material and initial conditions such as velocity, diameter, temperature, etc. You can 
also specify mass flow rate produced by the injection. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-9
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
9-10 
3 Click the inlet boundary condition icon (Inlet 
Mass Flow = 0.0002026) in the tree to select 
the inlet face from which the particles are 
injected. 
4 Set the Number of points to 5. 
5 Click Settings tab. 
6 Double-click the Value cell to the right of the 
Particle Material. 
7 Under Solids, Pre-Defined, Polymers select Polystyrene as particle’s material and 
click OK. 
8 Expand the Initial Conditions item and type 
0.005 for the particle Diameter. 
	We leave unchanged the default zero values of 
relative velocity and temperature, which means 
that the velocity and temperature of particles 
are equal to those of the incoming flow. We also 
leave the default value of mass flow rate, since 
it is used only to estimate mass rates of erosion 
or accumulation, which we are not going to take into account. 
9 Click OK to set the injection and return to the Particle Study dialog box. 
10 Select Injection 1 and click Clone. Select Injection 2, click Edit and change the 
diameter of particles to 0.015 mm. Then click OK to return to the Particle Study 
dialog box. 
11 Click Boundary Conditions tab. 
12 Click Edit to edit boundary condition that are applied by default for all the models 
walls. 
13 In the Boundary Condition dialog box, select 
Reflection. 
14 Keep the other conditions and click OK to return 
to the Particle Study dialog box. Click Settings 
tab. 
15 Increase the Maximum length of particles 
trajectories to 15000 mm. 
16 Click Run to run the calculation and exit the Particle Study dialog box. 
17 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Particle Study 1 icon and select View Results.
18 In the Particle Study Results dialog box, 
select Injection 1 and click 3D-View 
Options. 
19 Select to draw trajectories as Line with 
Arrow and click OK. 
20 Select Injection 2 and specify the same type to draw trajectories. 
21 Select Injection 1 and click Show to show particles trajectories. Then click OK to exit 
the Particle Study Results dialog box. 
22 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Injection 2 icon and select Show. 
Modeling Rough Rotating Wall 
In the previous calculation zero roughness was used for the walls of the rotating cone's 
internal and external surfaces. To investigate an influence of the rotating cone wall's 
roughness, let us perform the calculation with the rotating cone's internal and external 
surfaces' at 500 μm roughness under the same boundary conditions. 
Create a new configuration by cloning the current project, and 
name it 130000rpm - rough wall. 
Adjusting Wall Roughness 
1 Right-click the Rotating Wall = 130 000 rpm item and 
select Edit Definition. 
2 Under Wall parameters, select Adjust Wall 
Roughness . 
3 Specify the wall roughness of 500 micrometers. 
4 Click OK . 
Run the calculation. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-11
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
Results - Rough Walls 
9-12 
The calculated fields of flow velocity and Y-component of velocity in different section are 
shown below and reveal practically no change in the vertical velocity of the flow. As a 
result, the flying particles’ trajectories are nearly identical to those in the case of smooth 
walls. It is seen that increase in the roughness from 0 to 500 μm increases the vortex flow's 
tangential velocity. 
Velocity in the XY section at Z = 0 (roughness = 500 μm) 
Flow velocity Flow velocity's Y-component 
Velocity in the ZX section at Y = 2 mm 
roughness = 0 μm roughness = 500 μm
Flow streamlines 
Smooth wall Rough wall 
Trajectories of 5 μm particles 
Smooth wall Rough wall 
Trajectories of 15 μm particles 
Smooth wall Rough wall 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-13
Chapter 9 Textile Machine 
9-14
10 
Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
Problem Statement 
Let us consider a non-Newtonian liquid's 3D flow1 through a rectangular-cross-section 
channel encumbered with seven circular cylinders arranged asymmetrically with respect 
to the channel's midplane shown in Ref. 1. Following Ref. 1, let us consider the 3% 
aqueous solution of xanthan gum as a non-Newtonian liquid. Its viscosity approximately 
obeys the power law η = K ⋅ ( γ & 
)n − 1 with a consistency coefficient of K = 20 Pa×sn and a 
power-law index of n = 0.2, whereas its other physical properties (density, etc.) are the 
same as in water (since the solution is aqueous). 
The problem's goal is to determine the total pressure loss in the channel. Also, to highlight 
the influence of the 3% xanthan gum addition to water on the channel's total pressure loss, 
we will calculate the flow of water using the same volume flow rate within the channel. 
The Flow Simulation calculations are performed with the uniform liquid velocity profile 
at the channel inlet, the liquid’s volume flow rate is 50 cm3/s. The static pressure of 1 atm 
is specified at the channel outlet. The calculation’s goal is the channel’s resistance to the 
flow, i.e., the total pressure drop ΔРo between the channel inlet and outlet. 
1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-1
Chapter 10 Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
10-2 
Copy the Tutorial Advanced 3 - Non-Newtonian Flow folder into your working 
directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input 
data to these files. Open the Array of Cylinders.sldprt part. 
Specifying Non-Newtonian Liquid 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 
2 In the Database tree, select Materials, Non-Newtonian Liquids, User Defined. 
3 Click New Item in the toolbar. The blank Item Properties tab appears. 
Double-click the empty cell to set the corresponding property value. 
4 Specify the material properties as shown in the table below: 
Name XGum 
Density 1000 kg/m^3 
Specific heat 4000 J/(kg*K) 
Thermal conductivity 0.6 W/(m*K) 
Liquid model Power law model 
Consistency coefficient 20 Pa*sn 
Power law index 0.2 
Save and exit the database. 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Create new: XGS 
Unit system CGS modified: Pa (Pascal) for the 
Pressure & Stress 
Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow 
conditions 
Physical features No physical features are selected (default) 
Fluid XGum (non-Newtonian liquids); 
Flow type: Laminar only (default)
Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls, 
Initial Conditions Default conditions 
Result and Geometry Resolution Default result resolution level 3; 
Conditions 
Specify boundary conditions as follows: 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Outlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Specifying Goals 
Inlet Volume Flow1: 
50 cm3/s Volume flow rate normal to 
face; default temperature (20.05 °C) at 
the face; 
Static Pressure1: 
Default value (101325 Pa) for the Static 
pressure at the face; 
Specify surface goals for the Average 
Total Pressure at the inlet and outlet. 
Specify an equation goal for the total 
pressure drop between the channel’s inlet 
and outlet. 
default slip condition 
Minimum gap size=0.25 cm, no other 
changes 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-3
Chapter 10 Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
10-4 
Run the calculation. When the calculation is finished, create the goal plot to obtain the 
pressure drop between the channel’s inlet and outlet. 
Array o f C ylinders.SLDPRT [XGS] 
Go a l Nam e Unit Va lue Ave ra ge d Va lue Minim um V a lue Ma x im um V a lue Progre ss [%] 
SG A v Total P res sure 1 [P a] 105622.4926 105622.4125 105620.3901 105627.4631 100 
SG A v Total P res sure 2 [P a] 101329.0109 101329.0091 101329.0051 101329.0109 100 
Pres sure Drop [P a] 4293.481659 4293.4034 4298.457377 4291.380166 100 
It is seen that the channel's total pressure loss is about 4 kPa. 
Comparison with Water 
Let us now consider the flow of water in the same channel under the same conditions (at 
the same volume flow rate). 
Create a new configuration by cloning the current 
project, and name it Water. 
Changing Project Settings 
1 Click Flow Simulation, General 
Settings. 
2 On the Navigator click Fluids. 
3 In the Project Fluids table, select 
XGum and click Remove. Answer 
OK to the appearing warning 
message. 
4 Select Water in Liquids and click 
Add. 
5 Under Flow Characteristics, change 
Flow type to Laminar and Turbulent. 
6 Click OK. 
Run the calculation. After the calculation is finished, create the goal plot.
Array o f C ylinders.SLDPRT [water] 
Go a l Nam e Unit Va lue Ave ra ge d Va lue Minim um V a lue Ma x im um V a lue Progre ss [%] 
SG A v Total P res sure 1 [P a] 101395.004 101395.0214 101394.8731 101395.1171 100 
SG A v Total P res sure 2 [P a] 101329.3912 101329.3378 101329.3084 101329.3912 100 
Pres sure Drop [P a] 65.6128767 65.68357061 65.76566097 65.55243288 100 
As shown in the results table above, the channel's total pressure loss is about 60 Pa, i.e. 
60...70 times lower than with the 3% aqueous solution of xanthan gum, this is due to the 
water's much smaller viscosity under the problem's flow shear rates. 
The XGS (above) and water velocity distribution in the range from 0 to 30 cm/s. 
1 Georgiou G., Momani S., Crochet M.J., and Walters K. Newtonian and Non-Newtonian 
Flow in a Channel Obstructed by an Antisymmetric Array of Cylinders. Journal of 
Non-Newtonian Fluid Mechanics, v.40 (1991), p.p. 231-260. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-5
Chapter 10 Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders 
10-6
11 
Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Problem Statement 
Let us consider a ball with diameter of 0.075 m, which is continuously heated by a 2 kW 
heat source. The ball radiates heat to a concentrically arranged hemispherical reflector 
with inner radius of 0.128 m and through a glass cover of the same inner diameter to a 
circular screen with radius of 1.5 m arranged coaxially with the reflector at 1 m distance 
from the ball. All parts except the glass cover are made from stainless steel. The ball’s 
surface and the screen’s surface facing the ball are blackbody. The screen’s reverse side is 
non-radiating. The tutorial’s goal is to see how the presence of reflector and its emissivity 
influence the ball and screen temperatures. To do that, the following three cases are 
considered1: 
• Case 1: the reflector’s inner surface (i.e. that one which faces the ball) is whitebody; 
• Case 2: all reflector surfaces are blackbody; 
• Case 3: the reflector is removed. 
The steady-state problem is solved with the Heat conduction in solids option checked, 
so that conduction within all parts is calculated. Considering the convective heat transfer 
negligibly low (as if, say, the whole construction was placed in highly rarefied air), we 
also check the Heat conduction in solids only option. With this option, we do not need 
to specify a fluid for the project, and it is calculated without considering any fluid flow 
at all, thus saving the CPU time and limiting the heat transfer between parts to radiation 
only. The initial temperature of the parts is assumed to be 293.2 K. 
Let us consider the solutions obtained with Flow Simulation for each of the cases under 
consideration. 
1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-1
Chapter 11 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
11-2 
Copy the Tutorial Advanced 4 - Surface-to-surface Radiation folder into your working 
directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input 
data to these files. Open the Heated Ball Assembly.SLDASM assembly. 
The heated ball with the reflector and the screen.
Case 1 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Create new: Case 1 
Unit system SI 
Analysis type External 
Physical features Heat conduction in solids, Heat conduction in solids 
only, Radiation, Environment radiation: Environment 
Temperature = 293.2 K; 
Default Solid Alloys/Steel Stainless 321 
Wall conditions Default wall radiative surface: Non-radiating surface; 
Initial and Ambient 
Default initial solid temperature of 293.2 K 
Conditions 
Result and Geometry 
Resolution 
Set result resolution level to 3; 
Automatic minimum gap size, 
Manual minimum wall thickness - 0.007 m; 
other options are default. 
Definition of the Computational Domain 
Specify the computational domain size as follows: 
X min = -0.2 m Y min = -1.6 m Z min = -1.6 m 
Xmax = 1.4 m Y max = 1.6 m Z max = 1.6 m 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-3
Chapter 11 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Adjusting Automatic Mesh Settings 
11-4 
Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. Clear 
the Automatic settings check box to 
switch off the automatic initial mesh 
settings, switch to the Solid/Fluid Interface 
tab and change the Curvature refinement 
level to 5. Click OK. 
Definition of Radiative Surfaces 
Follow the steps below to specify the radiative surfaces: 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Radiative Surface. 
2 Under Type, expand the list of Pre-Defined radiative 
surfaces and select Blackbody wall. 
3 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the 
Heated Sphere component. Next, select the surface of 
Screen facing the Heated Sphere. 
4 Click OK . Rename the new Radiative Surface 1 
item to Blackbody Walls. 
Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
5 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Radiative Surface. 
6 Under Type, expand the list of Pre-Defined radiative 
surfaces and select the Whitebody wall. 
7 Select the Reflector’s inner surface. 
8 Click OK . Change the name of the new radiative 
surface to Whitebody Wall. 
Specifying Bodies Transparent to the Heat Radiation 
Specify the glass cover as transparent to radiation. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Radiation Transparent 
Bodies. 
2 Select the check box in the Thermal Transparency 
column for the Glass component. 
	 You can separately specify a component’s 
transparency for solar radiation and transparency 
for thermal radiation from all other sources, 
including heated bodies. Since there are no sources 
of solar radiation specified in the project, Thermal Transparency is the only available 
option. 
3 Click OK. Flow Simulation now treats this component as a body fully transparent to 
the thermal radiation. 
Heat Sources and Goals Specification 
Specify the surface heat source of the heat generation rate at the sphere’s surface: 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-5
Chapter 11 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
11-6 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Surface Source. 
2 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree, select the 
Heated Sphere component. 
3 Select Heat Generation Rate as the source type and 
set its value to 2000 W. 
Specify surface goals of the maximum, average, and 
minimum temperatures at the Heated Sphere’s surface 
and the Screen's blackbody surface. 
In addition, specify the volume goal for the Heated 
Sphere’s average temperature. (Naturally, in all cases 
you should select Temperature of Solid as the goal’s 
parameter). You may rename the goals as shown to 
make it easier to monitor them during the calculation. 
Save the model and run the calculation. 
If you take a look at the goals convergence, you can see that the sphere’s temperature at 
the start of the calculation is high. This happens because the initial sphere’s temperature 
(293.2 K) is too low to take away by radiation the heat produced by the 2000 W heat 
source . To illustrate this better, in cases number 2 and 3 we will increase the initial 
temperature of the heated sphere to 1000 K, thus providing the greater amount of heat is 
being lost by the sphere starting from the very beginning of the calculation. 
Case 2 
In contrast to the Case 1, in this case the reflector’s 
inner surface is blackbody and the reflector's other 
surfaces are also blackbody. 
Create a new Case 2 project by cloning the current Case 
1. 
Changing the Radiative Surface Condition 
1 Delete the Whitebody Wall condition. 
2 Right-click the Blackbody Walls item and select Edit 
Definition. 
3 Click the Reflector item in the Flyout FeatureManager 
Design tree in order to select all its surfaces. 
4 Click OK .
Goals Specification 
Specify the additional surface goals for the maximum, average, and minimum 
temperatures of the Reflector's inner and outer surfaces. 
Specifying Initial Condition in Solid 
Specify the initial temperature of the heated sphere of 1000 
K using Initial Condition. 
Save the model. 
Case 3 
In contrast to Case 1 and Case 2, the reflector is removed in Case 3. 
Create a new Case 3 project by cloning the current Case 2. 
1 Edit definition of the Blackbody Walls condition: delete all the Reflector’s faces. To 
delete a face from the list of Faces to Apply the Radiative Surface, select the face 
and press the Delete key. 
2 Delete the surface goals related to reflector. 
3 Disable the Reflector component in the 
Component Control dialog box. 
Using Batch Run, calculate the cases 2 and 3. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-7
Chapter 11 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
Results 
11-8 
In Case 1, due to the radiation returned by the reflector, the ball’s surface facing the 
reflector is hotter than the ball’s surface facing the screen (see pictures below). Therefore, 
screen temperature in Case 1 is higher than in the other cases. 
In Case 2, radiation coming from the ball to the reflector heats up the reflector and heat is 
radiated from the reflector’s outer surface to ambient, therefore being lost from the 
system. Since the heat returned to the ball by the reflector’s radiation is smaller, the ball’s 
temperature is lower, although distributed over the ball in the same manner as in Case 1. 
The heat coming from the reflector to the screen is also smaller. As a result, the screen’s 
temperature is lower than in Case 1. 
Since the reflector is removed in Case 3, there is no noticeable heat radiated back to the 
ball. The ball’s temperature is lower than in Case 2 and mostly uniform (the 
non-uniformity is lower than 1 K). Since the screen acquires radiation from the ball only, 
the screen’s temperature is the lowest among all the cases. 
The ball temperature distribution (front plane cross-section) in CASE 1 (left), CASE 2 (center) and 
CASE 3 (right) in the range from 1200 to 1220 K (the reflector is arranged at the left). 
The screen temperature distribution (surface plot of solid temperature) in CASE 1 (left), CASE 2 
(center) and CASE 3 (right) in the range from 295 to 340 K.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 
Maximum 1233.04 1206.31 1195.97 
Average 1222.16 1203.30 1195.47 
Minimum 1211.98 1200.38 1195.39 
Maximum 345.93 324.89 313.60 
Average 317.78 308.90 303.55 
Minimum 306.74 302.52 299.51 
Parameter 
The b all’s temperature, K 
The screen’s tempera ture , K 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-9
Chapter 11 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen 
11-10
12 
Rotating Impeller 
Problem Statement 
Let us consider the air flow through a centrifugal pump having a rotating impeller (see 
below).1 This pump has a stationary axial inlet (an eye), a pipe section of 92 mm radius 
with a central body of circular arc contour, which turns the flow by 90o from the axial 
direction. At the inlet's exit the radial air flow is sucked by a rotating impeller, which has 
seven untwisted constant-thickness backswept blades with wedge-shape leading and 
trailing edges. Each blade is cambered from 65o at the impeller inlet of 120 mm radius to 
70o at the impeller exit of 210 mm radius, both with respect to the radial direction. These 
blades are confined between the impeller shrouding disks rotating with the same (as the 
blades) angular speed of 2000 rpm. Downstream of the impeller the air enters a stationary 
(non-rotating) radial diffuser. 
To complete the problem statement, let us specify the following inlet and outlet boundary 
conditions: inlet air of 0.3 m3/s volume flow rate having uniform velocity profile with 
vectors parallel to the pump's axis; at the radial-directed outlet a static pressure of 1 atm is 
specified. 
1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-1
Chapter 12 Rotating Impeller 
Outlet Static Pressure 
Inlet Volume Flow 
The centrifugal pump with a rotating impeller. 
SolidWorks Model Configuration 
12-2 
Copy the Tutorial Advanced5 - Rotating Impeller folder into your working directory. 
Open the Pump.SLDASM assembly. 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project name Use current: Impeller Efficiency 
Unit system SI 
Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions 
Physical features Rotation: Type - Global rotating, Rotation axis - Z 
axis of Global Coordinate system, Angular 
velocity=2000 RPM (209.43951 rad/s) 
Default fluid Air 
Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls 
Initial Conditions Default conditions 
Result and Geometry Resolution Set the Result resolution level to 4; 
Minimum gap size = 0.04 m, minimum wall 
thickness = 0.01, other options are default 
Ω = 2000 rpm
Conditions 
Specify the inlet and outlet boundary conditions as described below. 
Inlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Inlet Volume Flow: 
Volume flow rate of 
0.3 m^3/s (uniform velocity 
profile) normal to the inner 
face of the Cover in the 
absolute frame of reference 
(the Absolute option is 
selected); 
	Relative to rotating frame. When the Relative to rotating frame option button is 
selected, the specified velocity (Mach number) is assumed to be relative to the rotating 
reference frame (Vr): 
Vspecified = Vr = Vabs −ω × r 
Here, r is the distance from the rotation axis and ω is the angular velocity of the 
rotating frame. The mass or volume flow rate specified in the rotating reference frame 
(the Relative to rotating frame option is selected) will be the same in the absolute 
(non-rotating) frame of reference if the tangential velocity component is perpendicular 
to the opening’s normal, thus not influencing the mass (volume) flow rate value, e.g. 
when the opening's normal coincides with the rotation axis. 
Outlet 
Boundary 
Condition 
Outlet Environment 
Pressure: 
Default value (101325 Pa) 
for the Environment pressure 
(in the absolute frame of 
reference - the Pressure 
potential is disabled) at the 
radial outlet face. 
	Pressure potential. If you enable a rotating reference frame, you can select the 
Pressure potential check box. When the Pressure potential check box is selected, the 
specified static pressure is assumed to be equal to the rotating frame pressure (Pr) and 
may be calculated using following parameters: absolute pressure, density, angular 
velocity and radius: 
2 2 1 
2 specified r abs P = P = P − ρω ⋅ r 
When the Pressure potential check box is unchecked, the specified static pressure is 
assumed to be a pressure in terms of the absolute frame of reference (Pabs). 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-3
Chapter 12 Rotating Impeller 
12-4 
When you specify a rotating reference frame, it is assumed that all model walls are rotated 
with the reference frame's angular velocity unless you set a specific wall to be stationary. 
To specify a non-rotating wall, the Stator moving wall boundary condition can be applied 
to this wall. Specifying the stator boundary condition is the same as specifying the zero 
velocity of this wall in the absolute (non-rotating) frame of reference. Note that stator face 
must be axisymmetric with respect to the rotation axis. 
Specifying Stationary Walls 
We will specify the stator condition at the corresponding walls of the pump’s cover. 
To easily select the necessary faces, hide the Impeller component by right-clicking the 
component name in the FeatureManager Design tree and selecting Hide components . 
In addition, check to see that the Enable selection through transparency option is 
enabled under Tools, Options, System Options, Display/Selection. 
1 Select the inner faces of Cover as shown. 
2 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary 
Condition. 
3 Click Wall and keep the default Real 
Wall condition type. 
4 Select Stator. 
5 Click OK and rename the new Real Wall 1 condition to Stator Walls.
Impeller’s Efficiency 
Engineers dealing with pump equipment are interested in the pump efficiency. For the 
pump under consideration the efficiency (η) can be calculated in the following way 
(F.M.White "Fluid Mechanics", 3rd edition, 1994): 
( P − P ) ⋅ 
Q 
outlet inlet M 
η 
= 
Ω ⋅ 
where Pinlet is the static pressure at the pump’s inlet, Poutlet is the bulk-average static 
pressures at the impeller’s outlet (Pa), Q is the volume flow rate (m3/s), Ω is the impeller 
rotation angular velocity (rad/s), and M is the impeller torque (N·m). To obtain Poutlet, an 
auxiliary measure component was placed where the flow exits the impeller. 
The measure component is only used for the pressure 
measurement (the corresponding goal will be specified at the 
inner face of the measure thin ring), thus it should be 
disabled in the Component Control dialog box. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Component Control. 
2 Select the Measure item and click Disable. 
3 Click OK to close the dialog. 
Specifying Project Goals 
First, since the pressure and volume flow rate boundary condition are specified, it makes 
sense to set the mass flow rate surface goal at the pump’s inlet and outlet to inspect the 
mass balance as an additional criterion for converging the calculation. 
GOAL TYPE GOAL PARAMETER FACE 
Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Inlet face 
Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Outlet face 
Next, specify the goals that are necessary for calculating the impeller’s efficiency: 
GOAL TYPE GOAL PARAMETER FACE 
Surface Goal Av Static Pressure Inlet face 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-5
Chapter 12 Rotating Impeller 
12-6 
Surface Goal Bulk Av Static Pressure The inner face of 
To avoid manual selecting of all impeller’s faces in contact with air (more than 150) we 
will use the Filter Faces feature. 
1 Select the Impeller component by clicking on it in the graphic area or in the 
FeatureManager Design tree. 
2 Right-click on Goals item in the Analysis tree and select 
Insert Surface Goals. All impeller faces (including those 
we do not actually need) appear in the Faces to Apply the 
Surface Goal list. 
3 Click Filter Faces and select Remove outer 
faces and Keep outer faces and faces in contact 
with fluid options. 
	When several options are selected in the faces filter, the 
filter options to exclude certain faces are combined with 
the use of logical AND, so that the combination of Remove 
outer faces and Keep outer faces and faces in contact 
with fluid leads to the removal of all faces but those in 
contact with fluid. 
4 Click Filter. 
Rename the created goals as shown below: 
the Measure ring 
at the impeller's 
outlet. 
Surface Goal Z - Component of Torque All impeller faces in contact with air 
(see details below).
Finally, specify the following Equation goals: 
GOAL NAME FORMULA DIMENSIONALITY 
Pressure Drop {SG Av Static Pressure 
Inlet}-{SG Bulk Av Static 
Pressure Impeller's Outlet} 
Pressure & 
stress 
Efficiency {Pressure Drop}*{Inlet Volume 
Flow 1:Volume flow rate normal 
to face:3.000e-001}/209.44/ 
{Torque on Impeller} 
No units 
To add inlet volume flow value to the equation goal’s expression, click the 
Inlet Volume Flow 1 item in the Analysis tree and then click Volume flow rate normal 
to face in the Parameter list. 
Save the model and run the calculation. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-7
Chapter 12 Rotating Impeller 
Results 
12-8 
The velocity vectors and static pressure distribution are shown below. To display vectors 
in the rotating reference frame select the Velocity RRF parameter under the Vectors tab of 
the View Settings dialog box. 
The flow velocity vectors in the frame rotating with the impeller (left) and in the 
stationary frame (right) at the impeller flow passage midsection (Z = - 0.02 m, Front 
plane, vector spacing = 0.02m, arrow size = 0.03m). 
The flow static pressure at the impeller flow passage midsection.
The flow pressure distribution 
For the impeller under consideration the obtained efficiency is 0.79. 
Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 
Efficiency [ ] 0.787039615 0.786371 0.784334 0.787117 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-9
Chapter 12 Rotating Impeller 
12-10
13 
CPU Cooler 
Problem Statement 
Let us consider a CPU cooler consisting of a copper core and an aluminum heat sink with 
62 fins. An eight-blade propeller generates a constant flow of air through the heat sink. 
The CPU is mounted on a socket installed on a PCB. Heat produced by the CPU is 
transferred through the core to the heat sink and then released into the air flow. 
To calculate the problem using 
Flow Simulation, it is convenient 
to use the concept of local rotating 
regions. In order to simplify the 
problem statement, we do not 
consider the thermal interface 
layer between the processor and 
the cooler. Also, we neglect the 
thermal conduction through the 
processor socket and PCB. 
A quantitative measure of the 
cooler efficiency is the thermal 
characterization parameter 
, where Tc is 
ΨCA = (TC – TA) ⁄ PD 
the temperature of the CPU cover, 
TA is the surrounding air 
temperature, and PD is the thermal 
design power (TDP) of the CPU. 
SolidWorks Model 
Fan 
Heat sink 
Copper core 
CPU 
An exploded view of the CPU cooler assembly. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-1
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-2 
Configuration 
Copy the Tutorial Advanced 6 - CPU Cooler folder into your working directory. Open 
the CPU Cooler.SLDASM assembly. 
Project Definition 
Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: 
Project Configuration Use current 
Unit system SI 
Analysis type External; Exclude cavities without flow conditions; 
Physical features Heat conduction in solids; 
Default fluid Gases / Air 
Default solid Glasses and Minerals / Insulator 
Wall Conditions Default smooth walls 
Initial and Ambient Conditions Thermodynamic parameters: Temperature=38°C; 
Result and Geometry Resolution Set the Result resolution level to 5; Minimum gap 
Computational Domain 
Exclude internal space 
Rotation: Type - Local region(s) 
Solid parameters: Initial solid temperature=38°C; 
other conditions are default 
size = 0.001 m, other options are default 
Specify the computational domain size as follows: 
X min = -0.095 m Y min = 0.0005 m Z min = -0.095 m 
X max = 0.095 m Y max = 0.1123 m Z max = 0.095 m
Rotating Region 
The Rotating region is used to calculate flow through rotating components of model 
(fans, impellers, mixers, etc.) surrounded by non-rotating bodies and components, when a 
global rotating reference frame cannot be employed. For example, local rotating regions 
can be used in analysis of the fluid flow in the model including several components 
rotating over different axes and/or at different speeds or if the computational domain has a 
non-axisymmetrical (with respect to a rotating component) outer solid/fluid interface. 
Each rotating solid component is surrounded by an axisymmetrical rotating region which 
has its own coordinate system rotating together with the component. 
A rotaing region is defined by an additional component of the model. This additional 
component must meet the following requirements: 
• the rotating component must be fully enclosed by it, 
• it must be axisymmetric (with respect to the rotating component's rotation axis), 
• its boundaries with other fluid and solid regions must be axisymmetrical too, since 
the boundaries are sliced into rings of equal width and the flow parameters' values 
transferred as boundary conditions from the adjacent fluid regions are 
circumferentially averaged over each of these rings, 
• the components defining different rotating regions must not intersect. 
Specify the rotating region as follows: 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Rotating Region. 
2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select Rotation Region component. Note that 
the Disable solid components check box is automatically selected to treat the Rotating 
Region as a fluid region. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-3
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-4 
	A component to apply a rotating region must be a body of revolution whose axis of 
revolution is coincident with the rotation axis. This component must be disabled in the 
Component Control. The border of a component may intersect with the solid bodies, 
however, all those bodies must be also axisymmetrical. Since the flow on the boundary 
of the rotating region must be axisymmetrical as well, we must provide a reasonable 
gap between the rotating region boundary and the outer edges of the propeller blades 
in order to minimize the influence of local non-axisymmetrical perturbations. Due to 
the same reason, it is preferable to put the rotating region boundary inside the solid 
bodies whenever possible, rather than putting them in the narrow flow passages. Also, 
the supposed direction of the flow at the rotating region boundary should be taken into 
account when defining the shape of the rotating region. You should choose such shape 
of the rotating region that the flow direction will be as much perpendicular to the 
rotating region boundary as possible. The picture below provides an additional insight 
into how the rotating region shape was adapted to the actual geometry of the CPU 
cooler in this tutorial example (the rotation region boundary is denoted by red). 
These gaps are necessary for 
flow to be more axisymmetrical 
at the rotating region boundary 
By placing the 
rotating region 
boundary within a 
solid instead of 
putting it into a 
narrow channel 
between the fan and 
the attach clip we 
avoid the additional 
mesh refinement 
and the negative 
effects of the 
non-axisymmetrical 
flow in this narrow 
channel 
Here the rotating region boundary is placed 
within a solid to avoid unnecessary and 
non-realistic calculation of a swirled flow within 
the closed cavity, which may yield inaccurate 
results
3 Under Parameter, in the Angular Velocity box, specify the angular rotation 
velocity of -4400 RPM. 
	During the definition of a rotation 
region, heavy green arrows 
denoting the rotation axis and the 
positive direction of rotation speed 
can be seen in the graphics area. 
Since we want to define the 
rotation in the direction opposite 
to the arrow, we specify negative 
value of the angular velocity. 
4 Click OK . 
When you specify a rotating region, it 
is assumed that all model walls within 
this region rotate with the region's 
angular velocity unless you set a 
specific wall to be stationary. To specify a non-rotating wall, the Stator real wall boundary 
condition should be applied to the wall. Specifying the stator boundary condition is the 
same as specifying the zero velocity of this wall in the absolute (non-rotating) frame of 
reference. Note that the stator face (or a part of the face that is located inside the rotating 
region in the case when the given face intersects with the rotating region boundary) must 
be axisymmetric with respect to the rotation axis. 
Specifying Stationary Walls 
We will specify the stator condition at the appropriate walls of the fan attach and the 
attachment clip. To easily select the necessary faces, hide the Fan and Rotation Region 
components. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary Condition. 
2 Under Type, click Wall and keep the default Real 
Wall condition type, then select Stator. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-5
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-6 
3 Select the two inner circular side faces and 
two top faces of Attach Clip as shown. 
4 In the flyout FeatureManager Design Tree 
select the Fan Attach component. 
	The Fan Attach component has a relatively 
complex shape with fine features, so it is 
preferable to select the whole component 
and then use the faces filter, rather than 
selecting manually each face we need. 
5 Click Filter Faces and select Remove 
outer faces and Keep outer faces 
and faces in contact with fluid . 
	Since we have specified the Exclude internal space option in the Wizard, the faces in 
contact with the cavity between the Fan Attach and the Copper Core are considered 
outer faces. Therefore we need to select the Remove outer faces option in Filter 
Faces in order to exclude them. 
6 Click Filter. 
7 Click OK . 
Solid Materials 
Specify the solid materials for the project as follows: 
a) the CPU and the Heat Sink are made of aluminum (Pre-Defined/Metals); 
b) the Copper Core, naturally, is made of copper (Pre-Defined/Metals); 
c) all other parts are made of default Insulator. 
Heat Source 
Define the volume source with the heat generation rate of 75 W in the CPU component. 
Initial Mesh Settings 
To resolve the complex geometry of the fan and heat sink better, let us define six 
additional control planes and specify the proper Ratios for the intervals between them to 
make the mesh denser in the central region containing the complex geometry and coarser 
near the computational domain’s boundaries.
1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 
2 Clear the Automatic settings check box. 
3 On the Basic Mesh tab, under 
Control Intervals select the 0 m 
value (either as a Max of X1 interval 
or as a Min of X2 interval) and click 
Delete plane. 
4 Click Add plane. In the Create 
Control Planes window make sure that Creating mode 
is set to Click on screen and Parallel to is set to YZ, 
click anywhere in the graphic area and enter manually 
-0.05 as a new value for X. Click OK to return to the 
Initial Mesh window. 
5 Following the same procedure, add one more plane at 
X = 0.05. 
	By default, Flow Simulation creates six control planes on 
the computational domain boundaries and a number of 
planes inside it. We now want to tune the set of control planes to our needs by removing 
the default planes inside the computational domain and adding new ones. 
6 Click the Ratio cell of the X1 interval and enter the value of 2. In the same manner 
enter the values 1 and -2 for the intervals X2 and X3. 
	Ratio is the ratio of cell sizes on the given interval. The cell sizes are changed 
gradually along the selected direction so that the proportion between the first and the 
last cells of this interval is close (but not necessarily equal) to the entered value of the 
Ratio. Negative values of the ratio correspond to the reverse order of cell size increase. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-7
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-8 
7 Delete the existing inner control 
planes perpendicular to Y and add 
new planes at Y = 0.042 m and 
Y = 0.047 m. Specify the Ratio 
values for Y1, Y2 and Y3 intervals 
as 1.5, 1 and -1.4, respectively. 
8 Delete the existing inner control 
plane perpendicular to Z and add 
new planes at Z = -0.05 m and 
Z = 0.05 m. Specify the Ratio 
values for Z1, Z2 and Z3 intervals as 
2, 1 and -2, respectively. 
9 Check that the Numbers of cells 
per X, Y and Z are 26, 12 and 26, respectively. If the numbers are different, please 
correct them manually. 
10 To avoid the unnecessary mesh 
refinement at the edges of the 
heatsink fins, go to the Solid/fluid 
Interface tab and set Small solid 
features refinement level to 3, 
Tolerance refinement level to 2, 
and Tolerance refinement criterion 
to 0.001 m, while leaving other 
options default. 
11 Go to the Narrow Channels tab and 
set Characteristic number of cells 
across a narrow channel to 4 and 
Narrow channels refinement level 
to 1, leaving default values for other 
options. This will prevent the 
unnecessary mesh refinement in the 
narrow channels between heatsink 
fins. 
12 Click OK.
Specifying Project Goals 
Specify surface goals for maximum temperature on the CPU cover and mass flow rate for 
the flows entering the rotating region and exiting from it. To select the necessary faces, 
you will probably need to hide temporarily some components of the assembly. 
GOAL TYPE GOAL VALUE FACE 
Surface Goal Max Temperature of 
Solid 
Top face of the 
CPU cover. To set 
this goal you may 
need to hide the 
Heat Sink and 
Copper Core 
components. 
Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Top and side 
surfaces of the 
Rotation Region 
component. 
Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Bottom face of 
the 
Rotation Region 
component. To set 
this goal you may 
need to hide the 
PCB component. 
Equation goal ({SG Mass Flow Rate 
1}+{SG Mass Flow 
Rate 2})/{SG Mass 
Flow Rate 1} 
The disbalance of the inlet and outlet mass 
flow rates. We are using the "+" operand 
since the inlet and outlet mass flow rate 
values have opposite signs. 
Select No units for Dimensionality. 
To calculate the thermal characterization parameter we will need the temperature of the 
center of the CPU cover. To get more accurate value of the parameter we will specify a 
separate point goal. 
1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Point Goals. 
2 Click Point Coordinates . 
3 Enter the coordinates of the point: X = 0m, Y = 0.009675 m, Z = 0m. 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-9
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-10 
4 Click Add Point . 
5 In the Parameter table select the Value check box in the 
Temperature of solid row. 
6 Click OK . 
Save the model and run the calculation.
Results 
Use the goal plot tool to obtain the value of the temperature of the center of the CPU 
cover. Now we can calculate the thermal characterization parameter of the heat sink: 
= (329.9-311.15)/75 = 0.25 °C/W. The second most important 
ΨCA = (TC – TA) ⁄ PD 
characteristic of the CPU Cooler is the velocity of the flow above PCB. We can assess the 
value of this parameter as well as the distribution of the temperature by looking at the cut 
plots made in the Front and Right planes (see below). 
Temperature field and velocity vectors distribution (Front plane, no offset, vector 
spacing = 0.003 m, uniform plot, projected vectors, arrow size = 0.015 m). 
Temperature field and velocity vectors distribution (Right plane, no offset, vector 
spacing = 0.003 m, uniform plot, projected vectors, arrow size = 0.015 m). 
Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-11
Chapter 13 CPU Cooler 
13-12 
Velocity distribution as a contour plot (Front plane, no offset). 
Velocity distribution as a contour plot (Right plane, no offset).

Sw flowsimulation 2009 tutorial

  • 1.
  • 3.
    First Steps -Ball Valve Design Contents Open the SolidWorks Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Define the Engineering Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Monitor the Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Adjust Model Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Cut Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Surface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Isosurface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Flow Trajectory Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 XY Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Surface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Analyze a Design Variant in the SolidWorks Ball part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Clone the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Analyze a Design Variant in the Flow Simulation Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial i
  • 4.
    First Steps -Conjugate Heat Transfer Open the SolidWorks Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Preparing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Define the Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Define the Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Define the Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Create a New Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Define the Solid Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Define the Engineering Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Specifying Volume Goals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Specifying Surface Goals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Specifying Global Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Changing the Geometry Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Flow Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Cut Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Surface Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 ii Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
  • 5.
    First Steps -Porous Media Open the SolidWorks Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Create a Flow Simulation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Define the Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Create an Isotropic Porous Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Define the Porous Medium - Isotropic Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Specifying Surface Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Define the Equation Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Flow Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Clone the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Create a Unidirectional Porous Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Define the Porous Medium - Unidirectional Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Compare the Isotropic and Unidirectional Catalysts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Determination of Hydraulic Loss Model Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Specifying Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Specifying Surface Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Running the Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Monitoring the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Cloning the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Creating a Cut Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Working with Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Creating a Goal Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Working with Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Changing the Geometry Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial iii
  • 6.
    Cylinder Drag Coefficient Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Specifying 2D Plane Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Specifying a Global Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Specifying an Equation Goal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cloning a Project and Creating a New Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Changing Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Changing the Equation Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Creating a Project from the Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Solving a Set of Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Getting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Heat Exchanger Efficiency Open the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Symmetry Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Specifying a Fluid Subdomain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Specifying Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Specifying Solid Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Specifying a Volume Goal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Running the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Viewing the Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Creating a Cut Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Displaying Flow Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Computation of Surface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Calculating the Heat Exchanger Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Specifying the Parameter Display Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 iv Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
  • 7.
    Mesh Optimization ProblemStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Manual Specification of the Minimum Gap Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Switching off the Automatic Mesh Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Specifying Control Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Creating a Second Local Initial Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Application of EFD Zooming Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 Two Ways of Solving the Problem with Flow Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 The EFD Zooming Approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 First Stage of EFD Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Project for the First Stage of EFD Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Second Stage of EFD Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Project for the Second Stage of EFD Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Changing the Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Clone Project to the Existing Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 The Local Initial Mesh Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No1) . . . .8-16 Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No2) . . . .8-20 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial v
  • 8.
    Textile Machine ProblemStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Specifying Rotating Walls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Initial Conditions - Swirl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Specifying Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Results - Smooth Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Displaying Particles Trajectories and Flow Streamlines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Modeling Rough Rotating Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Adjusting Wall Roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Results - Rough Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Specifying Non-Newtonian Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Specifying Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Comparison with Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Changing Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Case 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Project Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Definition of the Computational Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Adjusting Automatic Mesh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Definition of Radiative Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Specifying Bodies Transparent to the Heat Radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 vi Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial
  • 9.
    Heat Sources andGoals Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 Case 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 Changing the Radiative Surface Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 Goals Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 Specifying Initial Condition in Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 Case 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Rotating Impeller Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2 Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Specifying Stationary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Impeller’s Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 Specifying Project Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 CPU Cooler Problem Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1 SolidWorks Model Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1 Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2 Computational Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2 Rotating Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Specifying Stationary Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Solid Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Initial Mesh Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Specifying Project Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial vii
  • 10.
    viii Flow Simulation2009 Tutorial
  • 11.
    Features List Belowis the list of the physical and interface features of Flow Simulation as they appear in the tutorial examples. To learn more about the usage of a particular feature, read the corresponding example. First Steps - Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler DIMENSIONALITY 2D flow 9 3D flow 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1
  • 12.
    2 First Steps- Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler ANALYSIS TYPE External analysis 99 999 99 Internal analysis 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 PHYSICAL FEATURES Steady state analysis 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Time-dependent (transient) 9 analysis Liquids 99 999 999 999 99 Gases 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Non-Newtonian liquids 9 Multi-species flows (or more than 99 99 one fluid in the analysis) Fluid Subdomains 9 Heat conduction in solids 99 999 999 999 99 Heat conduction in solids only 9 Gravitational effects 9
  • 13.
    First Steps -Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Laminar only flow 9 Porous media 99 99 Radiation 9 Roughness 9 Two-phase flows (fluid flows with 9 particles or droplets) Rotation Global rotating reference frame 9 Local rotating regions 9 CONDITIONS Computational domain 99 999 999 99 Symmetry 99 99 Initial and ambient conditions Velocity parameters 9 Dependency 9 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3
  • 14.
    4 First Steps- Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Thermodynamic parameters 99 99 Turbulence parameters 9 Concentration 9 Solid parameters 9 Boundary conditions Flow openings Inlet mass flow 99 999 99 Inlet volume flow 99 999 99 Outlet volume flow 9 Inlet velocity 99 999 99 Pressure openings Static pressure 99 999 999 999 99 Environment pressure 99 999 999 999 99 Wall Real wall 99 999 99
  • 15.
    First Steps -Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Boundary condition parameters 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Transferred boundary conditions 9 Fans 99 99 Volume conditions Fluid Subdomain 9 Initial conditions Velocity parameters 9 Dependency 9 Solid parameters 9 Solid material 99 999 999 999 99 Porous medium 99 99 Heat sources Surface sources Heat generation rate 99 99 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5
  • 16.
    6 First Steps- Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Volume sources Temperature 9 Heat generation rate 99 999 99 Radiative surfaces Blackbody wall 9 Whitebody wall 9 PROJECT DEFINITION Wizard and Navigator 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 From template 9 Clone project 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 General settings 99 99 Copy project’s features 9 GOALS Global goal 99 999 999 999 99 Surface goal 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99
  • 17.
    First Steps -Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Volume goal 99 999 999 999 99 Point goal 9 Equation goal 99 999 999 999 99 MESH SETTINGS Initial mesh Automatic settings Level of initial mesh 99 99 Minimum gap size 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Minimum wall thickness 99 999 99 Manual adjustments Control planes 99 99 Solid/fluid interface 99 99 Narrow channels 99 99 Local initial mesh Manual adjustments Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7
  • 18.
    8 First Steps- Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler Refining cells 9 Narrow channels 99 99 TOOLS Dependency 99 99 Custom units 99 99 Engineering database User-defined items 99 999 999 99 Check geometry 9 Gasdynamic calculator 9 Toolbars 9 Filter faces 99 999 99 Component control 99 999 999 999 99 Radiation transparent bodies 9 CALCULATION CONTROL OPTIONS Result resolution level 99 999 999 99
  • 19.
    First Steps -Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler RUNNING CALCULATION Batch run 99 999 99 MONITORING CALCULATION Goal plot 9 Preview 9 GETTING RESULTS Cut plot 99 999 999 999 999 999 99 Surface plot 99 99 Isosurfaces 9 Flow trajectories 99 999 999 999 99 Particle study 9 XY plot 9 Surface parameters 99 99 Goal plot 99 999 999 999 999 999 999 99 Display parameters 9 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9
  • 20.
    10 Display mode Show/Hide model geometry 99 999 99 Transparency 99 99 Apply lighting 9 View settings Contours 99 999 999 99 Vectors 99 999 99 Flow trajectories 9 Isosurfaces 9 OPTIONS Use CAD geometry 9 Display mesh 9 First Steps - Ball Valve Design First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer First Steps - Porous Media Determination of Hydraulic Loss Cylinder Drag Coefficient Heat Exchanger Efficiency Mesh Optimization Application of EFD Zooming Textile Machine Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel with Cylinders Heated Ball with a Reflector and a Screen Rotating Impeller CPU Cooler
  • 21.
    1 First Steps- Ball Valve Design This First Steps tutorial covers the flow of water through a ball valve assembly before and after some design changes. The objective is to show how easy fluid flow simulation can be using Flow Simulation and how simple it is to analyze design variations. These two factors make Flow Simulation the perfect tool for engineers who want to test the impact of their design changes. Open the SolidWorks Model 1 Copy the First Steps - Ball Valve folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Run Flow Simulation. 2 Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Ball Valve.SLDASM assembly located in the First Steps - Ball Valve folder and click Open (or double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Ball Valve.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Make sure, that the default configuration is the active one. This is a ball valve. Turning the handle closes or opens the valve. The mate angle controls the opening angle. 3 Show the lids by clicking the features in the FeatureManager design tree (Lid <1> and Lid <2>). We utilize this model for the Flow Simulation simulation without many significant changes. The user simply closes the interior volume using extrusions we call lids. In this example the lids are made semi-transparent so one may look into the valve. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-1
  • 22.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design Create a Flow Simulation Project 1-2 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 2 Once inside the Wizard, select Create new in order to create a new configuration and name it Project 1. Flow Simulation will create a new configuration and store all data in a new folder. Click Next. 3 Choose the system of units (SI for this project). Please keep in mind that after finishing the Wizard you may change the unit system at any time by clicking Flow Simulation, Units. Within Flow Simulation, there are several predefined systems of units. You can also define your own and switch between them at any time. Click Next. 4 Leave the default Internal analysis type. Do not include any physical features. We want to analyze the flow through the structure. This is what we call an internal analysis. The alternative is an external analysis, which is the flow around an object. In this dialog box you can also choose to ignore cavities that are not relevant to the flow analysis, so that Flow Simulation will not waste memory and CPU resources to take them into account. Not only will Flow Simulation calculate the fluid flow, but can also take into account heat conduction within the solid(s) including surface-to-surface radiation. Transient (time dependent) analyses are also possible. Gravitational effects can be included for natural convection cases. Analysis of rotating equipment is one more option available. We skip all these features, as none of them is needed in this simple example. Click Next.
  • 23.
    5 In theFluids tree expand the Liquids item and choose Water as the fluid. You can either double-click Water or select the item in the tree and click Add. Flow Simulation is capable of calculating fluids of different types in one analysis, but fluids must be separated by the walls. A mixing of fluids may be considered only if the fluids are of the same type. Flow Simulation has an integrated database containing several liquids, gases and solids. Solids are used for conduction in conjugate heat conduction analyses. You can easily create your own materials. Up to ten liquids or gases can be chosen for each analysis run. Flow Simulation can calculate analyses with any flow type: Turbulent only, Laminar only or Laminar and Turbulent. The turbulent equations can be disregarded if the flow is entirely laminar. Flow Simulation can also handle low and high Mach number compressible flows for gases. For this demonstration we will perform a fluid flow simulation using a liquid and will keep the default flow characteristics. Click Next. 6 Click Next accepting the default wall conditions. Since we did not choose to consider heat conduction within the solids, we have an option of defining a value of heat conduction for the surfaces in contact with the fluid. This step is the place to set the default wall type. Leave the default Adiabatic wall specifying the walls are perfectly insulated. You can also specify the desired wall roughness value applied by default to all model walls. To set the roughness value for a specific wall, you can define a Real Wall boundary condition. The specified roughness value is the Rz value. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-3
  • 24.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-4 7 Click Next accepting the default for the initial conditions. On this step we may change the default settings for pressure, temperature and velocity. The closer these values are set to the final values determined in the analysis, the quicker the analysis will finish. Since we do not have any knowledge of the expected final values, we will not modify them for this demonstration. 8 Accept the default for the Result Resolution. Result Resolution is a measure of the desired level of accuracy of the results. It controls not only the resolution of the mesh, but also sets many parameters for the solver, e.g. the convergence criteria. The higher the Result Resolution, the finer the mesh will be and the stricter the convergence criteria will be set. Thus, Result Resolution determines the balance between results precision and computation time. Entering values for the minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness is important when you have small features. Setting these values accurately ensures your small features are not “passed over” by the mesh. For our model we type the value of the minimum flow passage as the minimum gap size. Click the Manual specification of the minimum gap size box. Enter the value 0.0093 m for the minimum flow passage. Click Finish. Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow Simulation data attached. Click on the Configuration Manager to show the new configuration. Notice the name of the new configuration has the name you entered in the Wizard.
  • 25.
    Go to theFlow Simulation Analysis Tree and open all the icons. We will use the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree to define our analysis, just as the FeatureManager design tree is used to design your models. The Flow Simulation analysis tree is fully customizable; you can select which folders are shown anytime you work with Flow Simulation and which folders are hidden. A hidden folder become visible when you add a new feature of corresponding type. The folder remains visible until the last feature of this type is deleted. Right-click the Computational Domain icon and select Hide to hide the black wireframe box. The Computational Domain icon is used to modify the size and visualization of the volume being analyzed. The wireframe box enveloping the model is the visualization of the limits of the computational domain. Boundary Conditions A boundary condition is required anywhere fluid enters or exits the system and can be set as a Pressure, Mass Flow, Volume Flow or Velocity. 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. 2 Select the inner face of the Lid <1> part as shown. (To access the inner face, right-click the Lid <1> in the graphics area and choose Select Other , hover the pointer over items in the list of items until the inner face is highlighted, then click the left mouse button). Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-5
  • 26.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-6 3 Select Flow Openings and Inlet Mass Flow. 4 Set the Mass Flow Rate Normal to Face to 0.5 kg/s. 5 Click OK . The new Inlet Mass Flow 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening 0.5 kilogram of water per second is flowing into the valve. Within this dialog box we can also specify a swirl to the flow, a non-uniform profile and time dependent properties to the flow. The mass flow at the outlet does not need to be specified due to the conservation of mass; mass flow in equals mass flow out. Therefore another different condition must be specified. An outlet pressure should be used to identify this condition. 6 Select the inner face of the Lid <2> part as shown. (To access the inner face, right-click the Lid <2> in the graphics area and choose Select Other , hover the pointer over items in the list of items until the inner face is highlighted, then click the left mouse button). 7 In the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition.
  • 27.
    8 Select PressureOpenings and Static Pressure. 9 Keep the defaults in Thermodynamic Parameters, Turbulence Parameters, Boundary Layer and Options group boxes. 10 Click OK . The new Static Pressure 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening the fluid exits the model to an area of static atmospheric pressure. Within this dialog box we can also set time dependent properties to the pressure. Define the Engineering Goal 1 Right-click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-7
  • 28.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-8 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click the Inlet Mass Flow 1 item to select the face where it is going to be applied. 3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Static Pressure row. Already selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box means that the created goal will be used for convergence control. If the Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box is not selected for a goal, it will not influence the task stopping criteria. Such goals can be used as monitoring parameters to give you additional information about processes occurring in your model without affecting the other results and the total calculation time. 4 Click OK . The new SG Av Static Pressure 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. Engineering goals are the parameters which the user is interested in. Setting goals is in essence a way of conveying to Flow Simulation what you are trying to get out of the analysis, as well as a way to reduce the time Flow Simulation needs to reach a solution. By setting a variable as a project goal you give Flow Simulation information about variables that are important to converge upon (the variables selected as goals) and variables that can be less accurate (the variables not selected as goals) in the interest of time. Goals can be set throughout the entire domain (Global Goals), within a selected volume (Volume Goals), in a selected surface area (Surface Goals), or at given point (Point Goals). Furthermore, Flow Simulation can consider the average value, the minimum value or the maximum value for goal settings. You can also define
  • 29.
    an Equation Goalthat is a goal defined by an equation involving basic mathematical functions with existing goals as variables. The equation goal allows you to calculate the parameter of interest (i.e., pressure drop) and keeps this information in the project for later reference. Click File, Save. Solution 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. The already selected Load results check box means that the results will be automatically loaded after finishing the calculation. 2 Click Run. The solver should take less than a minute to run on a typical PC. Monitor the Solver This is the solution monitor dialog box. On the left is a log of each step taken in the solution process. On the right is an information dialog box with mesh information and any warnings concerning the analysis. Do not be surprised when the error message “A vortex crosses the pressure opening” appear. We will explain this later during the demonstration. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-9
  • 30.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-10 1 After the calculation has started and several first iterations has passed (keep your eye on the Iterations line in the Info window), click the Suspend button on the Solver toolbar. We employ the Suspend option only due to extreme simplicity of the current example, which otherwise could be calculated too fast, leaving you not enough time to perform the subsequent steps of result monitoring. Normally you may use the monitoring tools without suspending the calculation. 2 Click Insert Goal Plot on the Solver toolbar. The Add/Remove Goals dialog box appears. 3 Select the SG Average Static Pressure 1 in the Select goals list and click OK. This is the Goals dialog box and each goal created earlier is listed above. Here you can see the current value and graph for each goal as well as the current progress towards completion given as a percentage. The progress value is only an estimate and the rate of progress generally increases with time. 4 Click Insert Preview on the Solver toolbar.
  • 31.
    5 This isthe Preview Settings dialog box. Selecting any SolidWorks plane from the Plane name list and pressing OK will create a preview plot of the solution in that plane. For this model Plane2 is a good choice to use as the preview plane. The preview allows one to look at the results while the calculation is still running. This helps to determine if all the boundary conditions are correctly defined and gives the user an idea of how the solution will look even at this early stage. At the start of the run the results might look odd or change abruptly. However, as the run progresses these changes will lessen and the results will settle in on a converged solution. The result can be displayed either in contour-, isoline- or vector-representation. 6 Click the Suspend button again to let the solver go on. 7 When the solver is finished, close the monitor by clicking File, Close. Adjust Model Transparency Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Transparency and set the model transparency to 0.75. The first step for results is to generate a transparent view of the geometry, a ‘glass-body’. This way you can easily see where cut planes etc. are located with respect to the geometry. Cut Plots 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Cut Plots icon and select Insert. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-11
  • 32.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-12 2 Specify a plane. Choose Plane 2 as the cut plane. To do this, in the flyout FeatureManager design tree select Plane 2. 3 Click OK . This is the plot you should see. A cut plot displays any result on any SolidWorks plane. The results may be represented as a contour plot, as isolines, as vectors, or as arbitrary combination of the above (e.g. contours with overlaid vectors). If you want to access additional options for this and other plots, you may either double-click on the color scale or right-click the Results icon in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree and select View Settings. Within the View Settings dialog box you have the ability to change the global options for each plot type. Some options available are: changing the parameter being displayed and the number of colors used for the scale. The best way to learn each of these options is thorough experimentation. 4 Change the contour cut plot to a vector cut plot. To do this, right-click the Cut Plot 1 icon and select Edit Definition.
  • 33.
    5 Clear Contoursand select Vectors . 6 Click OK . This is the plot you should see. The vectors can be made larger from the Vectors tab in the View Setting dialog box. The vector spacing can also be controlled from the Settings tab in the Cut Plot dialog box. Notice how the flow must navigate around the sharp corners on the Ball. Our design change will focus on this feature. Surface Plots Right-click the Cut Plot 1 icon and select Hide. 1 Right-click the Surface Plots icon and select Insert. 2 Select the Use all faces check box. The same basic options are available for Surface Plots as for Cut Plots. Feel free to experiment with different combinations on your own. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-13
  • 34.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-14 3 Click OK and you get the following picture: This plot shows the pressure distribution on all faces of the valve in contact with the fluid. You can also select one or more single surfaces for this plot, which do not have to be planar. Isosurface Plots Right-click the Surface Plot 1 icon and select Hide. 1 Right-click the Isosurfaces icon and select Show. This is the plot that will appear. The Isosurface is a 3-Dimensional surface created by Flow Simulation at a constant value for a specific variable. The value and variable can be altered in the View Settings dialog box under the Isosurfaces tab. 2 Right-click the Results icon and select View Settings to enter the dialog. 3 Go to Isosurfaces tab. 4 Examine the options under this dialog box. Try making two changes. The first is to click in the Use from contours so that the isosurface will be colored according to the pressure values, in the same manner as the contour plot. 5 Secondly, click at a second location on the slide bar and notice the addition of a second slider. This slider can later be removed by dragging it all the way out of the dialog box. 6 Click OK.
  • 35.
    You should seesomething similar to this image. The isosurface is a useful way of determining the exact 3D area, where the flow reaches a certain value of pressure, velocity or other parameter. Flow Trajectory Plots Right-click the Isosurfaces icon and select Hide. 1 Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select Insert. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-15
  • 36.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-16 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and then click the Static Presuure 1 item to select the inner face of the Lid <2>. 3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 16.. 4 Click OK and your model should look like the following: Using Flow trajectories you can show the flow streamlines. Flow trajectories provide a very good image of the 3D fluid flow. You can also see how parameters change along each trajectory by exporting data into Excel. Additionally, you can save trajectories as SolidWorks reference curves. For this plot we selected the outlet lid (any flat face or sketch can be selected) and therefore every trajectory crosses that selected face. The trajectories can also be colored by values of whatever variable chosen in the View Settings dialog box. Notice the trajectories that are entering and exiting through the
  • 37.
    exit lid. Thisis the reason for the warning we received during the calculation. Flow Simulation warns us of inappropriate analysis conditions so that we do not need to be CFD experts. When flow both enters and exits the same opening, the accuracy of the results will worsen. In a case like this, one would typically add the next component to the model (say, a pipe extending the computational domain) so that the vortex does not occur at opening. XY Plots Right-click the Flow Trajectories 1 icon and select Hide. We want to plot pressure and velocity along the valve. We have already created a SolidWorks sketch containing several lines. This sketch work does not have to be done ahead of time and your sketch lines can be created after the analysis has finished. Take a look at Sketch1 in the FeatureManager design tree. 1 Right-click the XY Plots icon and select Insert. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-17
  • 38.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-18 2 Choose Velocity and Pressure as physical Parameters. Select Sketch1 from the flyout FeatureManager design tree. Leave all other options as defaults. 3 Click OK. MS Excel will open and generate two columns of data points together with two charts for Velocity and for Pressure, respectively. One of these charts is shown below. You will need to toggle between different sheets in Excel to view each chart. The XY Plot allows you to view any result along sketched lines. The data is put directly into Excel. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 Curve Length (m) Velocity (m/s)
  • 39.
    Surface Parameters SurfaceParameters is a feature used to determine pressures, forces, heat fluxes as well as many other variables on any face within your model contacting the fluid. For this type of analysis, a calculation of the average static pressure drop from the valve inlet to outlet would probably be of some interest. 1 Right-click the Surface Parameters icon and select Insert. 2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree, click the Inlet Mass Flow1 item to select the inner face of the inlet Lid <1> part. 3 Click Evaluate. 4 Select the Local tab. The average static pressure at the inlet face is shown to be 128478 Pa. We already know that the outlet static pressure is 101325 Pa since we have specified it previously as a boundary condition. So, the average static pressure drop through the valve is about 27000 Pa. 5 Close the Surface Parameters dialog box. Analyze a Design Variant in the SolidWorks Ball part This section is intended to show you how easy it is to analyze design variations. The variations can be different geometric dimensions, new features, new parts in an assembly – whatever! This is the heart of Flow Simulation and this allows design engineers to quickly and easily determine which designs have promise, and which designs are unlikely to be successful. For this example, we will see how filleting two sharp edges will influence the pressure drop through the valve. If there is no improvement, it will not be worth the extra manufacturing costs. Create a new configuration using the SolidWorks Configuration Manager Tree. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-19
  • 40.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-20 1 Right-click the root item in the SolidWorks Configuration Manager and select Add Configuration. 2 In the Configuration Name box type Project 2. 3 Click OK . 4 Go to FeatureManager design tree, right-click the Ball item and select Open Part . A new window Ball.SLDPRT appears. Create a new configuration using the SolidWorks Configuration Manager Tree.
  • 41.
    1 Right-click theroot item in the SolidWorks Configuration Manager and select Add Configuration. 2 Name the new configuration as 1,5_fillet Ball. 3 Click OK . 4 Add a 1,5 mm fillet to the shown face. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-21
  • 42.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-22 5 Switch back to the assembly window and select Yes in the message dialog box that appears. In the FeatureManager design tree right-click the Ball item and select Component Properties. 6 At the bottom of the Component Properties dialog box, under Referenced configuration change the configuration of the Ball part to the new filleted one. 7 Click OK to confirm and close the dialog. Now we have replaced the old ball with our new 1.5_fillet Ball. All we need to do now is re-solve the assembly and compare the results of the two designs. In order to make the results comparable with the previous model, it would be necessary to adjust the valve angle to match the size of the flow passage of the first model. In this example, we will not do this. 8 Activate Project 1 by using the Configuration Manager Tree. Select Yes for the message dialog box that appears.
  • 43.
    Clone the Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 2 Select Add to existing. 3 In the Existing configuration list select Project 2. 4 Click OK. Select Yes for each message dialog box that appears after you click OK. Now the Flow Simulation project we have chosen is added to the SolidWorks project which contains the geometry that has been changed. All our input data are copied, so we do not need to define our openings or goals again. The Boundary Conditions can be changed, deleted or added. All changes to the geometry will only be applied to this new configuration, so the old results are still saved. Please follow the previously described steps for solving and for viewing the results. Analyze a Design Variant in the Flow Simulation Application In the previous sections we examined how you could compare results from different geometries. You may also want to run the same geometry over a range of flow rates. This section shows how quick and easy it can be to do that kind of parametric study. Here we are going to change the mass flow to 0.75 kg/s. Activate the Project 1 configuration. 1 Create a copy of the Project 1 project by clicking Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 2 Type Project 3 for the new project name and click OK. Flow Simulation now creates a new configuration. All our input data are copied, so we do not need to define our openings or goals again. The Boundary Conditions can be changed, deleted or added. All changes to the geometry will only be applied to this new configuration, so the old results remain valid. After changing the inlet flow rate value to 0.75 kg/s you would be ready to run again. Please follow the previously described steps for solving and for viewing the results. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 1-23
  • 44.
    Chapter 1 FirstSteps - Ball Valve Design 1-24 Imagine being the designer of this ball valve. How would you make decisions concerning your design? If you had to determine whether the benefit of modifying the design as we have just done outweighted the extra costs, how would you do this? Engineers have to make decisions such as this every day, and Flow Simulation is a tool to help them make those decisions. Every engineer who is required to make design decisions involving fluid and heat transfer should use Flow Simulation to test their ideas, allowing for fewer prototypes and quicker design cycles.
  • 45.
    2 First Steps- Conjugate Heat Transfer This First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial covers the basic steps to set up a flow analysis problem including heat conduction in solids. This example is particularly pertinent to users interested in analyzing flow and heat conduction within electronics packages although the basic principles are applicable to all thermal problems. It is assumed that you have already completed the First Steps - Ball Valve Design tutorial since it teaches the basic principles of using Flow Simulation in greater detail. Open the SolidWorks Model 1 Copy the First Steps - Electronics Cooling folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Click File, Open. 2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM assembly located in the First Steps - Electronics Cooling folder and click Open (or double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-1
  • 46.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer Preparing the Model 2-2 In a typical assembly there may be many features, parts or sub-assemblies that are not necessary for the analysis. Prior to creating an Flow Simulation project, it is a good practice to check the model to find components that can be removed from the analysis. Excluding these components reduces the computer resources and calculation time required for the analysis. The assembly consists of the following components: enclosure, motherboard and two smaller PCBs, capacitors, power supply, heat sink, chips, fan, screws, fan housing, and lids. You can highlight these components by clicking on the them in the FeatureManager design tree. In this tutorial we will simulate the fan by specifying a Fan boundary condition on the inner face of the inlet lid. The fan has a very complex geometry that may cause delays while rebuilding the model. Since it is outside the enclosure, we can exclude it by suppressing it. 1 In the FeatureManager design tree, select the Fan-412, and all Screws components (to select more than one component, hold down the Ctrl key while you select). 2 Right-click any of the selected components and select Suppress .. Inlet Fan PCBs Small Chips Main Chip Capacitors Power Supply Mother Board Heat Sink
  • 47.
    Suppressing fan andits screws leaves open five holes in the enclosure. We are going to perform an internal analysis, so all holes must be closed with lids. It can be done with the lid creation tool avalilable under Flow Simulation, Tools, Create Lids. To save your time, we created the lids and included them to the model. You just need to unsupress them.. 3 In the FeatureManager design tree, select the Inlet Lid, Outlet Lid and Screwhole Lid components and patterns DerivedLPattern1 and LocalLPattern1 (these patterns contain cloned copies of the outlet and screwhole lids). 4 Right-click any of the selected components and select Unsuppress . Now you can start with Flow Simulation. Create a Flow Simulation Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 2 Once inside the Wizard, select Create new in order to create a new configuration and name it Inlet Fan. Click Next. Now we will create a new system of units named USA Electronics that is better suited for our analysis. 3 In the Unit system list select the USA system of units. Select Create new to add a new system of units to the Engineering Database and name it USA Electronics. Flow Simulation allows you to work with several pre-defined unit systems but often it is more convenient to define your own Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-3
  • 48.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-4 custom unit system. Both pre-defined and custom unit systems are stored in the Engineering Database. You can create the desired system of units in the Engineering Database or in the Wizard. By scrolling through the different groups in the Parameter tree you can see the units selected for all the parameters. Although most of the parameters have convenient units such as ft/s for velocity and CFM (cubic feet per minute) for volume flow rate we will change a couple units that are more convenient for this model. Since the physical size of the model is relatively small it is more convenient to choose inches instead of feet as the length unit. 4 For the Length entry, double-click its cell in the Units column and select Inch. 5 Next expand the Heat group in the Parameter tree. Since we are dealing with electronic components it is more convenient to specify Total heat flow and power and Heat flux in Watt and Watt/m2 respectively. Click Next. 6 Set the analysis type to Internal. Under Physical Features select the Heat conduction in solids check box. Heat conduction in solids was selected because heat is generated by several electronics components and we are interested to see how the heat is dissipated through the heat sink and other solid parts and then out to the fluid. Click Next.
  • 49.
    7 Expand theGases folder and double-click Air row. Keep default Flow Characteristics. Click Next. 8 Expand the Alloys folder and click Steel Stainless 321 to assign it as a Default solid. In the Wizard you specify the default solid material applied to all solid components in the Flow Simulation project. To specify a different solid material for one or more components, you can define a Solid Material condition for these components after the project is created. Click Next. 9 Select Heat transfer coefficient as Default outer wall thermal condition and specify the Heat transfer coefficient value of 5.5 W/m^2/K and External fluid temperature of 50°F. The entered value of heat transfer coefficient is automatically coverted to the selected system of units (USA Electronics). In the Wall Conditons dialog box of the Wizard you specify the default conditions at the model walls. When Heat conduction in solids is enabled, the Default outer wall thermal condition parameter allows you to simulate heat exchange between the outer model walls and surrounding environment. In our case the box is located in an air-conditioned room with the air temperature of 50°F and heat transfer through the outer walls of the enclosure due to the convection in the room can significantly contribute to the enclosure cooling. Click Next. Although the initial temperature is more important for transient calculations to see how much time it takes to reach a certain temperature, in a steady-state analysis it is useful Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-5
  • 50.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-6 to set the initial temperature close to the anticipated final solution to speed up convergence. In this case we will set the initial air temperature and the initial temperature of the stainless steel (which represents the material of enclosure) to 50°F because the box is located in an air-conditioned room. 10 Set the initial fluid Temperature and the Initial solid temperature to 50°F. Click Next. 11 Accept the default for the Result resolution and keep the automatic evaluation of the Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness. Flow Simulation calculates the default minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness using information about the overall model dimensions, the computational domain, and faces on which you specify conditions and goals. Prior to starting the calculation, we recommend that you check the minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness to ensure that small features will be recognized. We will review these again after all the necessary conditions and goals will be specified. Click Finish. Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow Simulation data attached. We will use the Flow Simulation Analysis tree to define our analysis, just as the FeatureManager design tree is used to design your models. Right-click the Computational Domain icon and select Hide to hide the wireframe box. Define the Fan A Fan is a type of flow boundary condition. You can specify Fans at selected solid surfaces, free of Boundary Conditions and Sources. At model openings closed by lids you can specify Inlet or Outlet Fans. You can also specify fans on any faces within the
  • 51.
    flow region asInternal Fans. A Fan is considered as an ideal device creating a flow with a certain volume (or mass) flow rate, which depends on the difference between the inlet and outlet pressures on the selected faces. If you analyze a model with a fan, you sholud know the fan's characteristics. In this example we use one of the pre-defined fans available in the Engineering Database. If you cannot find an appropriate fan in the Engineering Database, you can create your own fan in accordance with the fan’s specification. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Fan. The Fan dialog box appears. 2 Select the inner face of the Inlet Lid part as shown. (To access the inner face, right-click the Inlet Lid in the graphics area and choose Select Other, hover the pointer over items in the list of features until the inner face is highlighted, then click the left mouse button). 3 Select External Inlet Fan as fan Type. 4 In the Fan list select the Papst 412 item under Pre-Defined, Axial, Papst. 5 Under Thermodynamic Parameters check that the Ambient Pressure is the atmospheric pressure. 6 Accept Face Coordinate System as the reference Coordinate System . Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-7
  • 52.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-8 Face coordinate system is created automatically in the center of a planar face when you select this face as the face to apply the boundary condition or fan. The X axis of this coordinate system is normal to the face. The Face coordinate system is created when only one planar face is selected. 7 Accept X as the Reference axis. 8 Click OK . The new Fans folder and the External Inlet Fan 1 item appear in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. Now you can edit the External Inlet Fan1 item or add a new fan using Flow Simulation Analysis tree. This folder remains visible until the last feature of this type is deleted. You can also make a feature’s folder to be initially available in the tree. Right-click the project name item and select Customize Tree to add or remove folders. Since the outlet lids of the enclosure are at ambient atmospheric pressure, the pressure rise produced by the fan is equal to the pressure drop through the electronics enclosure. Define the Boundary Conditions A boundary condition is required at any place where fluid enters or exits the model, excluding openings where a fan is specified. A boundary condition can be set in form of Pressure, Mass Flow, Volume Flow or Velocity. You can also use the Boundary Condition dialog for specifying an Ideal Wall condition that is an adiabatic, frictionless wall or a Real Wall condition to set the wall roughness and/or temperature and/or heat conduction coefficient at the model surfaces. For internal analyses with Heat conduction in solids enabled, you can also set thermal wall condition on outer model walls by specifying an Outer Wall condition. 1 In the Flow Simulation analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition.
  • 53.
    2 Select theinner faces of all outlet lids as shown. 3 Select Pressure Openings and Environment Pressure. 4 Click OK . The new Environment Pressure 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. The Environment pressure condition is interpreted as a static pressure for outgoing flows and as a total pressure for incoming flows. Define the Heat Source 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Volume Source. 2 Select the Main Chip from the flyout FeatureManager design tree tree as the component to apply the volume source. 3 Select the Heat Generation Rate as Parameter. 4 Enter 5 W in the Heat Generation Rate box. 5 Click OK . 6 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree click-pause-click the new VS Heat Generation Rate 1 item and rename it to Main Chip. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-9
  • 54.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-10 Volume Heat Sources allow you to specify the heat generation rate (in Watts) or the volumetric heat generation rate (in Watts per volume) or a constant temperature boundary condition for the volume. It is also possible to specify Surface Heat Sources in terms of heat transfer rate (in Watts) or heat flux (in Watts per area). Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection. 1 In the Flow Simulation analysis tree, right-click the Heat Sources icon and select Insert Volume Source. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select all Capacitor components. 3 Select Temperature and enter 100 °F in the Temperature box. 4 Click OK . 5 Click-pause-click the new VS Temperature 1 item and rename it to Capacitors. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
  • 55.
    6 Following thesame procedure as above, set the following volume heat sources: all chips on PCBs (Small Chip) with the total heat generation rate of 4 W, Power Supply with the temperature of 120 °F. 7 Rename the source applied to the chips to Small Chips and the source for the power supply to Power Supply. Click File, Save. Create a New Material The real PCBs are made of laminate materials consisting of several layers of thin metal conductor interleaved with layers of epoxy resin dielectric. As for most laminate materials, the properties of a typical PCB material can vary greatly depending on the direction - along or across the layers, i.e. they are anisotropic. The Engineering Database contains some predefined PCB materials with anisotropic thermal conductivity. In this tutorial example anisotropic thermal conductivity of PCBs does not affect the overall cooling performance much, so we will create a PCB material having the same thermal conductivity in all directions to learn how to add a new material to Engineering Database and assign it to a part. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-11
  • 56.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-12 2 In the Database tree select Materials, Solids, User Defined. 3 Click New Item on the toolbar. The blank Item Properties tab appears. Double-click the empty cells to set the corresponding properties values. 4 Specify the material properties as follows: Name = Tutorial PCB, Comments = Isotropic PCB, Density = 1120 kg/m^3, Specific heat = 1400 J/(kg*K), Conductivity type = Isotropic Thermal conductivity = 10 W/(m*K), Melting temperature = 390 K. We also need to add a new material simulating thermal conductivity and other thermal properties of the chips material. 5 Switch to the Items tab and click New Item on the toolbar. 6 Specify the properties of the chips material: Name = Tutorial component package, Comments = Component package, Density = 2000 kg/m^3, Specific heat = 120 J/(kg*K), Conductivity type = Isotropic Thermal conductivity = 0.4 W/(m*K), Melting temperature = 1688.2 K. 7 Click Save . 8 Click File, Exit to exit the database.
  • 57.
    You can enterthe material properties in any unit system you want by typing the unit name after the value and Flow Simulation will automatically convert the entered value to the SI system of units. You can also specify temperature dependent material properties using the Tables and Curves tab. Define the Solid Materials Solid Materials are used to specify the materials for solid parts in the assembly. 1 Right-click the Solid Materials icon and select Insert Solid Material. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select MotherBoard, PCB<1> and PCB<2> components. 3 In the Solid list expand User Defined and select Tutorial PCB. 4 Click OK . 5 Following the same procedure, specify solid materials for other components: • for the main chip and all small chips assign the new Tutorial component package material (available under User Defined); • the heat sink is made of Aluminum (available under Pre-Defined, Metals); • the lids (Inlet Lid, Outlet Lid, Screwhole Lid and all lids in both the DerivedLPattern1 and LocalLPattern1 patterns) are made of the Insulator material (available under Pre-Defined, Glasses and Minerals). To select a part, click it in the FeatureManager design tree or SolidWorks graphics area. 6 Change the name of each assigned solid material. The new, descriptive names should be: PCB - Tutorial PCB, Chips - Tutorial component package, Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-13
  • 58.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-14 Heat Sink - Aluminum, Lids - Insulator. Click File, Save. Define the Engineering Goals Specifying Volume Goals 1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Volume Goals. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select all Small Chip components. 3 In the Parameter table select the Max check box in the Temperature of Solid row. 4 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use this goal for convergence control. 5 Click OK . The new VG Max Temperature of Solid 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree.
  • 59.
    6 Change thename of the new item to VG Small Chips Max Temperature. You can also change the name of the item using the Feature Properties dialog that appears if you right-click the item and select Properties. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection. 7 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Volume Goals. 8 Select the Main Chip item in the flyout FeatureManager design tree. 9 In the Parameter table select the Max check box in the Temperature of Solid row. 10 Click OK . 11 Rename the new VG Max Temperature of Solid 1 item to VG Chip Max Temperature. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection. Specifying Surface Goals 1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-15
  • 60.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-16 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click the External Inlet Fan 1 item to select the face where the goal is going to be applied. 3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Static Pressure row. 4 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use this goal for convergence control. For the X(Y, Z) - Component of Force and X(Y, Z) - Component of Torque surface goals you can select the Coordinate system in which these goals will be calculated. 5 Under Name Template, located at the bottom of the PropertyManager, click Inlet and then remove the <Number> field from the Name Template box. 6 Click OK . The new SG Inlet Av Static Pressure goal appears. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
  • 61.
    7 Right-click theGoals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. 8 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click the Environment Pressure 1 item to select the faces where the goal is going to be applied. 9 In the Parameter table select the first check box in the Mass Flow Rate row. 10 Accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use this goal for convergence control. 11 Under Name Template, located at the bottom of the PropertyManager, click Outlet and then remove the <Number> field from the Name Template. 12 Click OK - the SG Outlet Mass Flow Rate goal appears. Specifying Global Goals 1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Global Goals. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-17
  • 62.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-18 2 In the Parameter table select the Av check boxes in the Static Pressure and Temperature of Fluid rows and accept selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use these goals for convergence control. 3 Remove the <Number> field from the Name Template and click OK - GG Av Static Pressure and GG Av Temperature of Fluid goals appear. In this tutorial the engineering goals are set to determine the maximum temperature of the heat generating components, the temperature rise in air and the pressure drop and mass flow rate through the enclosure. Click File, Save. Next let us check the automatically defined geometry resolution settings for this project.
  • 63.
    Changing the GeometryResolution 1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 2 Select the Manual specification of the minimum gap size check box. 3 Enter 0.1 in for the Minimum gap size (i.e. passage between the fins of the heat sink). Entering values for the minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness is important when you have small features. Setting these values accurately ensures that the small features are not "passed over" by the mesh. The minimum wall thickness should be specified only if there are fluid cells on either side of a small solid feature. In case of internal analyses, there are no fluid cells in the ambient space outside of the enclosure. Therefore boundaries between internal flow and ambient space are always resolved properly. That is why you should not take into account the walls of the steel cabinet. Both the minimum gap size and the minimum wall thickness are tools that help you to create a model-adaptive mesh resulting in increased accuracy. However the minimum gap size setting is the more powerful one. The fact is that the Flow Simulation mesh is constructed so that the specified Level of initial mesh controls the minimum number of mesh cells per minimum gap size. And this number is equal to or greater than the number of mesh cells generated per minimum wall thickness. That's why even if you have a thin solid feature inside the flow region it is not necessary to specify minimum wall thickness if it is greater than or equal to the minimum gap size. Specifying the minimum wall thickness is necessary if you want to resolve thin walls smaller than the smallest gap. Click OK. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-19
  • 64.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer Solution 2-20 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 2 Click Run. The solver takes about twenty to thirty minutes to run on a typical PC. You may notice that different goals take different number of iterations to converge. The goal-oriented philosophy of Flow Simulation allows you to get the answers you need in the shortest amount of time. For example, if you were only interested in the temperature of fluid in the enclosure, Flow Simulation would have provided the result more quickly then if the solver was allowed to fully converge on all of the parameters. Viewing the Goals 1 Right-click the Goals icon under Results and select Insert. 2 Click Add All in the Goals dialog. 3 Click OK.
  • 65.
    An Excel spreadsheetwith the goal results will open. The first sheet will show a table summarizing the goals. Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM [Inlet Fan (original)] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence GG Av Static Pressure [lbf/in^2] 14.69678696 14.69678549 14.69678314 14.69678772 100 Yes SG Inlet Av Static Pressure [lbf/in^2] 14.69641185 14.69641047 14.69640709 14.69641418 100 Yes GG Av Temperature of Fluid [°F] 61.7814683 61.76016724 61.5252449 61.86764155 100 Yes SG Outlet Mass Flow Rate [lb/s] -0.007306292 -0.007306111 -0.007306913 -0.007303663 100 Yes VG Small Chips Max Temp [°F] 91.5523903 90.97688632 90.09851988 91.5523903 100 Yes VG Chip Max Temperature [°F] 88.51909612 88.43365626 88.29145322 88.57515562 100 Yes You can see that the maximum temperature in the main chip is about 88 °F, and the maximum temperature over the small chips is about 91 °F. Goal progress bar is a qualitative and quantitative characteristic of the goal convergence process. When Flow Simulation analyzes the goal convergence, it calculates the goal dispersion defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum goal values over the analysis interval reckoned from the last iteration and compares this dispersion with the goal's convergence criterion dispersion, either specified by you or automatically determined by Flow Simulation as a fraction of the goal's physical parameter dispersion over the computational domain. The percentage of the goal's convergence criterion dispersion to the goal's real dispersion over the analysis interval is shown in the goal's convergence progress bar (when the goal's real dispersion becomes equal or smaller than the goal's convergence criterion dispersion, the progress bar is replaced by word "Achieved"). Naturally, if the goal's real dispersion oscillates, the progress bar oscillates also, moreover, when a hard problem is solved, it can noticeably regress, in particular from the "achieved" level. The calculation can finish if the iterations (in travels) required for finishing the calculation have been performed, or if the goal convergence criteria are satisfied before performing the required number of iterations. You can specify other finishing conditions at your discretion. To analyze the results in more detail let us use the various Flow Simulation post-processing tools. The best method for the visualization of how the fluid flows inside the enclosure is to create flow trajectories. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-21
  • 66.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer Flow Trajectories 2-22 1 Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select Insert. 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and then click the External Inlet Fan1 item to select the inner face of the Inlet Lid. 3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 200. 4 Keep Reference in the Start Points group. If Reference is selected, then the trajectory start points are taken from the specified face. 5 Under Options set Draw Trajectories As to Bands. 6 Click View Settings. 7 In the View Settings dialog box, change the Parameter from Pressure to Velocity. 8 Go to the Flow Trajectories tab and notice that the Use from contours option is selected.
  • 67.
    This setting defineshow trajectories are colored. If Use from contours is selected then the trajectories are colored with the distribution of the parameter specified on the Contours tab (Velocity in our case). If you select Use fixed color then all flow trajectories have the same color that you specify on the Settings tab of the Flow Trajectories dialog box. 9 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. 10 In the Flow Trajectories dialog click OK . The new Flow Trajectories 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. This is the picture you should see. Notice that there are only a few trajectories along the adjacent to the wall PCB<2> and this may cause problems with cooling of the chips placed on this PCB. Additionally the blue color indicates low velocity in front of this PCB<2> . Right-click the Flow Trajectories 1 item and select Hide. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection. Let us examine the velocity distribution in more detail. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-23
  • 68.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer Cut Plots 2-24 1 Right-click the Cut Plots icon and select Insert. 2 Keep the Front plane as the section plane. 3 Click View Settings. 4 Change the Min and Max values to 0 and 10 respectively. The specified integer values produce a palette where it is more easy to determine the value. 5 Set the Number of colors to about 30. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Cut Plot dialog box click OK . The new Cut Plot 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 8 Select the Top view on the Standard Views toolbar.
  • 69.
    Let us nowlook at the fluid temperature. 9 Double-click the palette bar in the upper left corner of the graphics area. The View Settings dialog appears. 10 Change the Parameter from Velocity to Fluid Temperature. 11 Change the Min and Max values to 50 and 120 respectively. 12 Click the Vectors tab and change the Arrow size to 0.2 by typing the value in the box under the slider. Notice that you can specify a value that is outside of the slider's range. 13 Set the Max value to 1 ft/s. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-25
  • 70.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-26 By specifying the custom Min and Max values you can control the vector length. The vectors whose velocity exceeds the specified Max value will have the same length as the vectors whose velocity is equal to Max. Likewise, the vectors whose velocity is less than the specified Min value will have the same length as the vectors whose velocity is equal to Min. We have set 1 ft/s to display areas of low velocity. 14 Click OK. 15 Right-click the Cut Plot 1 item and select Edit Definition. 16 Click Vectors 17 Change the Offset to -0.30 in. 18 Expand the Vectors group box. Using the slider set the Vector Spacing to ~ 0.18 in. 19 Click OK .
  • 71.
    Right-click the CutPlot 1 item and select Hide. Let us now display solid temperature. Surface Plots 1 Right-click the Surface Plots item and select Insert. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-27
  • 72.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-28 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree click the Main Chip, Heat Sink and all Small Chip components to select their surfaces. 3 Click View Settings. 4 In the View Settings dialog box, change the Parameter to Solid Temperature. 5 Change the Min and Max values to 50 and 120 respectively. 6 Click OK. 7 In the Surface Plot dialog box click OK . The creation of the surface plot may take some time because many faces need to be colored. 8 Repeat steps 1 and 2 and select the Power Supply and all Capacitors components, then click OK . 9 On the View toolbar click Wireframe to show the face outlines.
  • 73.
    You can viewand analyze the results further with the post-processing tools that were shown in the First Steps - Ball Valve Design tutorial. Flow Simulation allows you to quickly and easily investigate your design both quantitatively and qualitatively. Quantitative results such as the maximum temperature in the component, pressure drop through the cabinet, and air temperature rise will allow you to determine whether the design is acceptable or not. By viewing qualitative results such as air flow patterns, and heat conduction patterns in the solid, Flow Simulation gives you the necessary insight to locate problem areas or weaknesses in your design and provides guidance on how to improve or optimize the design. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 2-29
  • 74.
    Chapter 2 FirstSteps - Conjugate Heat Transfer 2-30
  • 75.
    3 First Steps- Porous Media In this tutorial we consider flow in a section of an automobile exhaust pipe, whose exhaust flow is resisted by two porous bodies serving as catalysts for transforming harmful carbon monoxide into carbon dioxide. When designing an automobile catalytic converter, the engineer faces a compromise between minimizing the catalyst's resistance to the exhaust flow while maximizing the catalyst's internal surface area and duration that the exhaust gases are in contact with that surface area. Therefore, a more uniform distribution of the exhaust mass flow rate over the catalyst's cross sections favors its serviceability. The porous media capabilities of Flow Simulation are used to simulate each catalyst, which allows you to model the volume that the catalyst occupies as a distributed resistance instead of discretely modeling all of the individual passages within the catalyst, which would be impractical or even impossible. Here, as a Flow Simulation tutorial example we consider the influence of the catalysts' porous medium permeability type (isotropic and unidirectional media of the same resistance to flow) on the exhaust mass flow rate distribution over the catalysts' cross sections. We will observe the latter through the behavior of the exhaust gas flow trajectories distributed uniformly over the model's inlet and passing through the porous catalysts. Additionally, by coloring the flow trajectories by the flow velocity the exhaust gas residence time in the porous catalysts can be estimated, which is also important from the catalyst effectiveness viewpoint. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-1
  • 76.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media Open the SolidWorks Model 3-2 1 Click File, Open. 2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the Catalyst.SLDASM assembly located in the First Steps - Porous Media folder and click Open (or double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Catalyst.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Create a Flow Simulation Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. Once inside the Wizard, select Create new in order to create a new configuration and name it Isotropic. The project Wizard guides you through the definition of the project’s properties step-by-step. Except for two steps (steps to define the project fluids and default solid), each step has some pre-defined values, so you can either accept these values (skipping the step by clicking Next) or modify them to your needs. These pre-defined settings are: unit system – SI, analysis type – internal, no additional physical capabilities are considered, wall condition – adiabatic wall initial conditions – pressure - 1 atm, temperature - 293.2 K. result and geometry resolution – level 3, For this project these default settings suit perfectly and all what we need to do is just to select Air as the project fluid. To avoid passing through all steps we will use Navigator pane that provides a quick access to the Wizard’s pages. 2 Click an arrow at the right. Inlet Outlet Porous catalysts
  • 77.
    3 In theNavigator pane click Fluids. 4 Open the Gases folder, click Air, then click Add. 5 Since we do not need to change other properties we can close the Wizard. Click Finish in the Navigator pane. You can click Finish at any moment, but if you attempt to close Wizard without specifying all obligatory properties (such as project fluds), the Wizard will not close and the page where you need to define a missing property will be marked by the exclamation icon . Now Flow Simulation creates a new configuration with the Flow Simulation data attached. In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Computational Domain icon and select Hide to hide the black wireframe box. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-3
  • 78.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media Define the Boundary Conditions 3-4 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. 2 Select the inner face of the inlet lid as shown. 3 Select Flow Openings and Inlet Velocity. 4 Set the Velocity Normal to Face to 10 m/s. 5 Click OK . With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening air is flowing into the catalyst with a velocity of 10 m/s.
  • 79.
    6 Select theinner face of the outlet lid as shown. 7 Right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. 8 Select Pressure Openings and Static Pressure. 9 Click OK . With the definition just made, we told Flow Simulation that at this opening the fluid exits the model to an area of static atmospheric pressure. Now we can specify porous media in this project. To define a porous medium, first we need to specify the porous medium’s properties (porosity, permeability type, etc.) in the Engineering Database and then apply the porous medium to a component in the assembly. Create an Isotropic Porous Medium The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of porous material and select the pre-defined "Isotropic" material from the Engineering database when you will assign the porous material to a component later in this tutorial. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 2 In the Database tree select Porous Media, User Defined. 3 Click New Item on the toolbar. The blank Item Properties tab appears. Double-click the empty cells to set the corresponding property values. 4 Name the new porous medium Isotropic. 5 Under Comment, click the button and type the desired comments for this porous medium. The Comment property is optional, you can leave this field blank. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-5
  • 80.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-6 6 Set the medium’s Porosity to 0.5. Porosity is the effective porosity of the porous medium, defined as the volume fraction of the interconnected pores with respect to the total porous medium volume; here, the porosity is equal to 0.5. The porosity will govern the exhaust flow velocity in the porous medium channels, which, in turn, governs the exhaust gas residence in the porous catalyst and, therefore, the catalyst efficiency. 7 Choose Isotropic as the Permeability type. First of all let us consider an Isotropic permeability, i.e, a medium with permeability not depending on the direction within the medium. Then, as an alternative, we will consider a Unidirectional permeability, i.e., the medium permeable in one direction only. 8 Choose Pressure drop, Flowrate, Dimensions as the Resistance calculation formula. For our media we select the Pressure Drop, Flowrate, Dimensions medium resistance to flow, i.e., specify the porous medium resistance as k = ΔP×S /(m×L) (in units of s-1), where the right-side parameters are referred to a tested parallelepiped sample of the porous medium, having the S cross-sectional area and the L length in the selected sample direction, in which the mass flow rate through the sample is equal to m under the pressure difference of ΔP between the sample opposite sides in this direction. In this project we will specify ΔP = 20 Pa at m = 0.01 kg/s (and ΔP = 0 Pa at m=0 kg/s), S = 0.01 m2, L = 0.1m. Therefore, k = 200 s-1. Knowing S and L of the catalyst inserted into the model and m of the flow through it, you can approximately estimate the pressure loss at the model catalyst from ΔP = k×m×L/S. 9 For the Pressure drop vs. flowrate choose Mass Flow Rate. Click the button to switch to the Tables and Curves tab.
  • 81.
    10 In theProperty table specify the linear dependency of pressure drop vs. mass flow rate as shown. 11 Go back to the Item Properties tab. 12 Set Length to 0.1 m and Area to 0.01 m2. 13 Click Save . 14 Click File, Exit to exit the database. Now we will apply the specified porous medium to the model components representing the porous bodies. A porous medium can be applied only to a component that is not treated by Flow Simulation as a solid. To consider a model’s component as not belonging to a solid region, you need to disable the component in the Component Control dialog box. Components are automatically disabled when you assign a porous media to them by creating the Porous Medium condition, so you do not need to disable them manually. Define the Porous Medium - Isotropic Type 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Porous Medium. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select the Monolith<1> and Monolith<2> components. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-7
  • 82.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-8 3 Expand the list of the User Defined porous media and select Isotropic. If you skipped the definition of porous medium, use the Isotropic material available under Pre-Defined. 4 Click OK to complete the definition of porous media and exit the Porous Medium dialog. To obtain the total pressure drop between the model inlet and outlet we will set an Equation Goal. For this, we need to specify the corresponding Surface Goals first. Specifying Surface Goals 1 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals.
  • 83.
    2 Click theFlow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click the Inlet Velocity 1 item to select the inner face of the inlet lid. 3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Total Pressure row. 4 Accept the selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use this goal for convergence control. 5 Under Name Template, located at the bottom of the PropertyManager, click Inlet . 6 Click OK - the new SG Inlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal appears. 7 Right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-9
  • 84.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-10 8 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and click the Static Pressure 1 item to select the inner face of the outlet lid. 9 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Total Pressure row. 10 Accept the selected Use for Conv. (Use for Convergence Control) check box to use this goal for convergence control. 11 Under Name Template, located at the bottom of the PropertyManager, click Outlet . 12 Click OK - the new SG Outlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal appears. Define the Equation Goal Equation Goal is a goal defined by an analytical function of the existing goals and/or parameters of input data conditions. This goal can be viewed as equation goal during the calculation and while displaying results in the same way as the other goals. As variables, you can use any of the specified goals, including another equation goals, except for goals that are dependent on other equation goals, and parameters of the specified project’s input data features (general initial or ambient conditions, boundary conditions, fans, heat sources, local initial conditions). You can also use constants in the definition of the equation goal.
  • 85.
    1 Right-click theGoals icon and select Insert Equation Goal. 2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select the SG Inlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal. It appears in the Expression box. 3 Click the minus "-" button in the calculator. 4 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select the SG Outlet Av Total Pressure 1 goal. You can use goals (including previously specified Equation Goals), parameters of input data conditions and constants in the expression defining an Equation Goal. If the constants in the expression represent some physical parameters (i.e. length, area, etc.), make sure that they are specified in the project’s system of units. Flow Simulation has no information about the physical meaning of the constants you use, so you need to specify the Equation Goal dimensionality by yourself. 5 Keep the default Pressure & Stress in the Dimensionality list. 6 Click OK. The new Equation Goal 1 item appears in the tree. Solution 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 2 Click Run. After the calculation has finished, close the Monitor dialog box. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-11
  • 86.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media Viewing the Goals 3-12 1 Right-click the Goals icon under Results and select Insert. 2 Select the Equation Goal 1 in the Goals dialog box. 3 Click OK. An Excel spreadsheet with the goal results will open. The first sheet will contain a table presenting the final values of the goal. You can see that the total pressure drop is about 120 Pa. Catalyst.SLDASM [Isotropic] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence Equation Goal 1 [Pa] 120.0326909 121.774802 120.0326909 124.432896 100 Yes To see the non-uniformity of the mass flow rate distribution over a catalyst’s cross section, we will display flow trajectories with start points distributed uniformly across the inlet.
  • 87.
    Flow Trajectories 1Right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select Insert. 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis Tree tab and then click the Inlet Velocity 1 item. This selects the inner face of the inlet lid. 3 Under Options set Draw Trajectories As to Bands. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-13
  • 88.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-14 4 Click View Settings. 5 In the View Settings dialog box, change the Parameter from Pressure to Velocity. 6 Set the Max value to 12. 7 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. 8 In the Flow Trajectories dialog click OK . To see trajectories inside the porous media we will apply some transparency to the model. 9 Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Transparency and set the model transparency to 0.75. This is the picture you should see. To compare the effectiveness of a unidirectional porous catalyst to an isotropic catalyst, let us calculate the project with a porous medium of unidirectional type. Clone the Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project.
  • 89.
    2 Enter Unidirectionalas the Configuration name. 3 Click OK. Create a Unidirectional Porous Medium The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of porous material and select the pre-defined "Unidirectional" material from the Engineering database when you will assign the porous material to a component later in this tutorial. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 2 In the Database tree select Porous Media, User Defined. 3 On the Items tab select the Isotropic item. 4 Click Copy . 5 Click Paste . The new Copy of Isotropic (1) item appears in the list. 6 Select the Copy of Isotropic (1) item and click the Item Properties tab. 7 Rename the item to Unidirectional. 8 Change the Permeability type to Unidirectional. 9 Save the database and exit. Now we can apply the new porous medium to the monoliths. Define the Porous Medium - Unidirectional Type 1 Right-click the Porous Medium 1 icon and select Edit Definition. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-15
  • 90.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-16 2 Expand the list of User Defined porous medium and select Unidirectional. If you skipped the definition of the unidirectional porous medium, use the Unidirectional material available under Pre-Defined. 3 In the Direction select the Z axis of the Global Coordinate System. For porous media having unidirectional permeability, we must specify the permeability direction as an axis of the selected coordinate system (axis Z of the Global coordinate system in our case). 4 Click OK . Since all other conditions and goals remain the same, we can start the calculation immediately Compare the Isotropic and Unidirectional Catalysts When the calculation is finished, create the goal plot for the Equation Goal 1. Catalyst.SLDASM [Unidirectional] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence Equation Goal 1 [Pa] 117.0848512 118.6235708 117.0761518 121.5639633 100 Yes Display flow trajectories as described above. Comparing the trajectories passing through the isotropic and unidirectional porous catalysts installed in the tube, we can summarize:
  • 91.
    Due to theasymmetric position of the inlet tube with respect to the larger tube in which the catalyst bodies are installed, the incoming flow is non-uniform. Since the incoming flow is non-uniform, the flow inside the first catalyst body is non-uniform also. It is seen that the catalyst type (isotropic or unidirectional) affects both the incoming flow non-uniformity (slightly) and, more substantially, the flow within the catalysts (especially the first catalyst body). In both the cases the gas stream mainly enters the first catalyst body-closer to the wall opposite to the inlet tube. For the isotropic case, the gas flows into the first body nearer to the wall than for the case of the unidirectional catalyst. As a result, the flow in the initial (about one-third of the body length) portion of the first catalyst body is noticeably more non-uniform in the isotropic catalyst. Nevertheless, due to the isotropic permeability, the main gas stream expands in the isotropic catalyst and occupies a larger volume in the next part of the body than in the unidirectional catalyst, which, due to its unidirectional permeability, prevents the stream from expanding. So, the flow in the last two-thirds of the first catalyst body is less non-uniform in the isotropic catalyst. Since the distance between the two porous bodies installed in the tube is rather small, the gas stream has no time to become more uniform in the volume between the catalyst bodies, although in the unidirectional case a certain motion towards uniformity is perceptible. As a result, the flow non-uniformity occurring at the first catalyst body's exit passes to the second catalyst body. Then, it is seen that the flow non-uniformity does not change within the second catalyst body. Let us now consider the flow velocity inside the catalyst. This is easy to do since the flow trajectories' colors indicate the flow velocity value in accordance with the specified palette. To create the same conditions for comparing the flow velocities in the isotropic and unidirectional catalysts, we have to specify the same velocity range for the palette in both the cases, since the maximum flow velocity governing the value range for the palette by default is somewhat different in these cases. It is seen that, considering the catalyst on the whole, the flow velocities in the isotropic and unidirectional catalysts are practically the same. Therefore, from the viewpoint of gas residence in the catalyst, there is no difference between the isotropic and unidirectional catalysts. We can conclude that the isotropic catalyst is more effective than the unidirectional catalyst (of the same resistance to uniform flows), since the flow in it, as a whole, is more uniform. In spite of specifying the same resistance of the catalysts to flow, the overall pressure loss is lower by about 2% in the case of employing the unidirectional catalyst. This difference is due to the different flow non-uniformity both in the catalyst bodies and out of them. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 3-17
  • 92.
    Chapter 3 FirstSteps - Porous Media 3-18
  • 93.
    4 Determination ofHydraulic Loss In engineering practice the hydraulic loss of pressure head in any piping system is traditionally split into two components: the loss due to friction along straight pipe sections and the local loss due to local pipe features, such as bends, T-pipes, various cocks, valves, throttles, etc. Being determined, these losses are summed to form the total hydraulic loss. Generally, there are no problems in engineering practice to determine the friction loss in a piping system since relatively simple formulae based on theoretical and experimental investigations exist. The other matter is the local hydraulic loss (or so-called local drag). Here usually only experimental data are available, which are always restricted due to their nature, especially taking into account the wide variety of pipe shapes (not only existing, but also advanced) and devices, as well as the substantially complicated flow patterns in them. Flow Simulation presents an alternative approach to the traditional problems associated with determining this kind of local drag, allowing you to predict computationally almost any local drag in a piping system within good accuracy. Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Valve.SLDPRT model located in the Tutorial 1 - Hydraulic Loss folder and click Open (or double-click the part). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Valve.SLDPRT file to an empty area of the SolidWorks window. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-1
  • 94.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss Model Description 4-2 This is a ball valve. Turning the handle closes or opens the valve. The local hydraulic loss (or drag) produced by a ball valve installed in a piping system depends on the valve turning angle or on the minimum flow passage area governed by it. The latter depends also on a ball valve geometrical parameter, which is the ball-to-pipe diameter ratio governing the handle angle at which the valve becomes closed: = sin  θ arc 2 Dball Dpipe  ------------- The standard engineering convention for determining local drag is by calculating the difference between the fluid dynamic heads measured upstream of the local pipe feature (ball valve in our case) and far downstream of it, where the flow has become uniform (undisturbed) again. In order to extract the pure local drag the hydraulic friction loss in the straight pipe of the same length must be subtracted from the measured dynamic head loss. In this example we will obtain pressure loss (local drag) in the ball valve whose handle is turned by an angle of 40o. The Valve analysis represents a typical Flow Simulation internal analysis. Internal flow analyses deal with flows inside pipes, tanks, HVAC systems, etc. The fluid enters a model at the inlets and exits the model through outlets. To perform an internal analysis all the model openings must be closed with lids, which are needed to specify inlet and outlet flow boundary conditions on them. In any case, the internal model space filled with a fluid must be fully closed. You simply create lids as additional extrusions covering the openings. In this example the lids are semi-transparent allowing a view into the valve.
  • 95.
    To ensure themodel is fully closed click Flow Simulation, Tools, Check Geometry. Then click Check to calculate the fluid and solid volumes of the model. If the fluid volume is equal to zero, the model is not closed. Click Fluid Volume to see the volume that will be occupied by fluid in the analysis. Uncheck Fluid Volume. Close the Check Geometry dialog box. The Check Geometry tool allows you to calculate the total fluid and solid volumes, check bodies for possible geometry problems (i.e. invalid contact) and visualize the fluid area and solid body as separate models. The first step is to create a new Flow Simulation project. Creating a Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. The project wizard guides you through the definition of a new Flow Simulation project. 2 In the Project Configuration dialog box, click Use current. Each Flow Simulation project is associated with a SolidWorks configuration. You can attach the project either to the current SolidWorks configuration or create a new SolidWorks configuration based on the current one. Click Next. 3 In the Unit System dialog box you can select the desired system of units for both input and output (results). For this project use the International System SI by default. Click Next. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-3
  • 96.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-4 4 In the Analysis Type dialog box you can select either Internal or External type of the flow analysis. To disregard closed internal spaces not involved in the internal analysis, you select Exclude cavities without flow conditions. The Reference axis of the global coordinate system (X, Y or Z) is used for specifying data in a tabular or formula form in a cylindrical coordinate system based on this axis. This dialog also allows you to specify advanced physical features you may want to take into account (heat conduction in solids, gravitational effects, time-dependent problems, surface-to-surface radiation, rotation). Specify Internal type and accept the other default settings. Click Next. 5 Since we use water in this project, open the Liquids folder and double-click the Water item. Engineering Database contains numerical physical information on a wide variety of gas, liquid and solid substances as well as radiative surfaces. You can also use the Engineering Database to specify a porous medium. The Engineering Database contains pre-defined unit systems. It also contains fan curves defining volume or mass flow rate versus static pressure difference for selected industrial fans. You can easily create your own substances, units, fan curves or specify a custom parameter you want to visualize. Click Next.
  • 97.
    6 Since wedo not intend to calculate heat conduction in solids, in the Wall Conditions dialog box you can specify the thermal wall boundary conditions applied by default to all the model walls contacting with the fluid. For this project accept the default Adiabatic wall feature denoting that all the model walls are heat-insulated. In this project we will not consider rough walls. Click Next. 7 In the Initial Conditions dialog box specify initial values of the flow parameters. For steady internal problems, the specification of these values closer to the expected flow field will reduce the analysis convergence time. For steady flow problems Flow Simulation iterates until the solution converges. For unsteady (transient, or time-dependent) problems Flow Simulation marches in time for a period you specify. For this project use the default values. Click Next. 8 In the Results and Geometry Resolution dialog box you can control the analysis accuracy as well as the mesh settings and, through them, the required computer resources (CPU time and memory). For this project accept the default result resolution level 3. Result Resolution governs the solution accuracy via mesh settings and conditions of finishing the calculation that can be interpreted as resolution of calculation results. The higher the Result Resolution, the finer the mesh and the stricter the convergence criteria. Naturally, higher Result Resolution requires more computer resources (CPU time and memory). Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-5
  • 98.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-6 Geometry Resolution (specified through the minimum gap size and the minimum wall thickness) governs proper resolution of geometrical model features by the computational mesh. Naturally, finer Geometry Resolution requires more computer resources. Select the Manual specification of the minimum gap size check box and enter 0.04 m for the Minimum gap size. Flow Simulation calculates the default minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness using information about the overall model dimensions, the computational domain, and faces on which you specify conditions and goals. However, this information may be insufficient to recognize relatively small gaps and thin model walls. This may cause inaccurate results. In these cases, the Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness must be specified manually. Click Finish. The Flow Simulation Analysis tree provides a convenient specification of project data and view of results. You also can use the Flow Simulation Analysis tree to modify or delete the various Flow Simulation features. At the same time, a computational domain appears in the SolidWorks graphics area as a wireframe box. The Computational Domain is a rectangular prism embracing the area inside which the flow and heat transfer calculations are performed. The next step is specifying Boundary Conditions. Boundary Conditions are used to specify fluid characteristics at the model inlets and outlets in an internal flow analysis or on model surfaces in an external flow analysis.
  • 99.
    Specifying Boundary Conditions 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary Condition. 2 Select the Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary Condition list. 3 In the Type of Boundary Condition list, select the Inlet Velocity item. 4 Click the Velocity Normal to Face box and set its value equal to 1 m/s (type the value, the units will appear automatically). 5 Accept all the other parameters and click OK . This simulates the water flow which enters the valve with the velocity of 1.0 m/s. 6 Select the Outlet Lid inner face. 7 In the graphics area, right-click outside the model and select Insert Boundary Condition. The Boundary Condition dialog box appears with the selected face in the Faces to apply the boundary condition list. Before the calculation starts, Flow Simulation checks the specified boundary conditions for mass flow rate balance. The specification of boundary conditions is incorrect if the total mass flow rate on the inlets is not equal to the total mass flow rate on the outlets. In such case the calculation will not start. Also, note that the mass flow rate value is recalculated from the velocity or volume flow rate value specified on an opening. To avoid problems with Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-7
  • 100.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-8 specifying boundary conditions, we recommend that you specify at least one Pressure opening condition since the mass flow rate on a Pressure opening is automatically calculated to satisfy the law of conservation of mass. 8 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type of Boundary Condition list select the Static Pressure item. 9 Accept the default values for Static Pressure (101325 Pa), Temperature (293.2 K) and all the other parameters. 10 Click OK . By specifying this condition we define that at the ball valve pipe exit the water has a static pressure of 1 atm. The hydraulic losses are calculated through the outlet and inlet total pressure difference ΔP from the following formula: ξ ΔP = ----------------- ρV2 ⁄ 2 where ρ is the water density, and V is water velocity. Since we already know the water velocity (specified by us as 1 m/s) and the water density (998.1934 kg/m3 for the specified temperature of 293.2 K), then our goal is to determine the total pressure value at the valve’s inlet and outlet. The easiest and fastest way to find the parameter of interest is to specify the corresponding engineering goal. Specifying Surface Goals 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Surface Goals. 2 Select the inner faces of the inlet lid and the outlet lid.
  • 101.
    3 Select Createa separate goal for each surface check box to create two separate goals, i.e. one for each of the selected faces. 4 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Total Pressure row. 5 Accept selected Use for Conv. check box to use the goals being created for convergence control. 6 Click OK . The new SG Av Total Pressure 1 and SG Av Total Pressure 2 items appear in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. Now the Flow Simulation project is ready for the calculation. Flow Simulation will finish the calculation when the steady-state average value of total pressure calculated at the valve inlet and outlet are reached. Running the Calculation 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. The Run dialog box appears. 2 Click Run to start the calculation. Flow Simulation automatically generates a computational mesh. The mesh is created by dividing the computational domain into slices, which are further subdivided into cells. The cells are refined as necessary to properly resolve the model geometry. During the mesh generation procedure, you can see the current step and the mesh information in the Mesh Generation dialog box. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-9
  • 102.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss Monitoring the Calculation 4-10 After the calculation starts, the Solver Monitor dialog provides you with the current status of the solution. You can also monitor the goal changes and view preliminary results at selected planes. In the bottom pane of the Info window Flow Simulation notifies you if inappropriate results may occur. In our case, the message “A vortex crosses the pressure opening” appears to inform you that there is a vortex crossing the opening surface at which you specified the pressure boundary condition. In this case the vortex is broken into incoming and outgoing flow components. When flow both enters and exits an opening, the accuracy of the results is diminished. Moreover, there is no guarantee that convergence (i.e., the steady state goal) will be attained at all. Anyway, in case a vortex crosses a pressure opening the obtained results become suspect. If this warning persists we should stop the calculation and lengthen the ball valve outlet pipe to provide more space for development of the vortex. It is also expedient to attach the ball valve inlet pipe to avoid the flow disturbance caused by the valve’s obstacle to affect the inlet boundary condition parameters. Since the warning persists, click File, Close to terminate the calculation and exit the Solver Monitor. You can easily extend the ball valve inlet and outlet sections by changing the offset distance for the Inlet Plane and Outlet Plane features. Instead, we shall clone the project to the pre-defined 40 degrees - long valve configuration. Cloning the Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 2 Click Add to existing. 3 In the Existing configuration list, select 40 degrees - long valve. 4 Click OK. 5 Flow Simulation has detected that the model was modified. Confirm the both warning messages with Yes. The new Flow Simulation project, attached to the 40 degrees - long valve configuration, has the same settings as the old one attached to the 40 degrees - short valve so you can start the calculation immediately.
  • 103.
    In the FlowSimulation analysis tree, right-click the root 40 degrees - long valve item and select Run. Then click Run to start the calculation. When the calculation is finished, close the Solver Monitor dialog box. Let us now see the vortex notified by Flow Simulation during the calculation, as well as the total pressure loss. Creating a Cut Plot 1 Right-click the Cut Plots icon and select Insert. The Cut Plot dialog box appears. The Cut Plot displays results of a selected parameter in a selected view section. To define the view section, you can use SolidWorks planes or model planar faces (with the additional shift if necessary). The parameter values can be represented as a contour plot, as isolines, as vectors, or in a combination (e.g. contours with overlaid vectors). 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree, expand the Valve item and select Plane2. Its name appears in the Section Plane or Planar Face list. 3 In the Cut Plot dialog box, in addition to displaying Contours , select Vectors . 4 In the Vectors group box, using the slider set the Vector Spacing to approximately 0.012. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-11
  • 104.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-12 5 Click View Settings to specify the parameter which values to show at the contour plot. The settings made in the View Settings dialog box refer to all Cut Plots, Surface Plots, Isosurfaces, and Flow Trajectories features. These settings are applied only for the active pane of the SolidWorks graphics area. For example, the contours in all cut and surface plots will show the same physical parameter selected in the View Settings dialog box. So, in the View Settings dialog box you specify the displayed physical parameter and the settings required for displaying it for each of the displaying options (contours, isolines, vectors, flow trajectories, isosurfaces) . The Contours settings can also be applied to Isolines, Vectors, Flow Trajectories, and Isosurfaces. If the Use from contours option is selected on the corresponding feature tab, the isolines, vectors, trajectories, isosurfaces are colored in accordance with values of the parameter selected on the Contours tab (in this case the color settings made in the specific dialog boxes are not used). 6 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter box, select X-velocity. 7 Click OK to save changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. 8 In the Cut Plot dialog box click OK . The new Cut Plot 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. However, the cut plot cannot be seen through the model. In order to see the plot, you can hide the model by clicking Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Geometry. Alternatively, you can use the standard SolidWorks Section View option. 9 Click View, Display, Section View. Under Section 1 specify Plane2 as a Reference Section Plane/Face and click OK . 10 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Computational Domain icon and select Hide.
  • 105.
    Now you cansee a contour plot of the velocity and the velocity vectors projected on the plot. For better visualization of the vortex you can scale small vectors: 11 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Results icon and select View Settings. 12 In the View Settings dialog, click the Vectors tab and type 0.02 m the Arrow size box. 13 Change the Min value to 2 m/s. By specifying the custom Min we change the vector length range so that the vectors in areas where velocity is less than the specified Min value will appear as if it is equal to Min. This allows us to visualize the low velocity area in more detail. 14 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. Immediately the cut plot is updated. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-13
  • 106.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-14 You can easily visualize the vortex by displaying the flow relative to the X axis. For that, you can display the X-velocity component in a two-color palette and set the value, separating two colors, at zero. 15 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Results icon and select View Settings. 16 Using the slider set Number of colors to 2. 17 In the Min box type -1. 18 In the Max box type 1. 19 Click OK. Now the distribution of the X-Velocity component is displayed in red-blue palette so that all the positive values are in red and all the negative values are in blue. This means that the blue area show the region of reverse flow, i.e. half of the vortex. Next, we will display the distribution of total pressure within the valve. Working with Parameter List By default the total pressure is not included in the list of parameters available to display. To enable or disable a physical parameter for displaying you can use Parameter List. 1 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Results icon and select Parameter List. Select the Total Pressure check box or select parameter’s row and click Enable. 2 Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialog box. Now you can apply the total pressure for the contour plot.
  • 107.
    1 Double-click thepalette bar in the upper left corner of the graphics area to open the View Settings dialog box. 2 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter list select Total Pressure. 3 Using the slider, set the Number of colors to about 30. 4 Click OK to save the changes and exit the View Settings dialog box. Immediately the cut plot is updated to display the total pressure contour plot. The cut plot shows you the flow pattern. To obtain the exact value of the total pressure which is required to calculate the loss, we will use the surface goal plot. Creating a Goal Plot The Goal Plot allows you to study how the goal value changed in the course of calculation. Flow Simulation uses Microsoft Excel to display goal plot data. Each goal plot is displayed in a separate sheet. The converged values of all project goals are displayed in the Summary sheet of an automatically created Excel workbook. Click View, Display, Section View to hide the section. 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, under Results, right-click the Goals icon and select Insert. The Goals dialog box appears. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-15
  • 108.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-16 2 Click Add All. 3 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is created. This workbook displays how the goal changed during the calculation. You can take the total pressure value presented at the Summary sheet. Valve.SLDPRT [40 degrees - long valve] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Progress [%] Use In Convergence SG Av Total Pressure 1 [Pa] 101833.4184 101833.8984 101833.3951 101834.7911 100 Yes SG Av Total Pressure 2 [Pa] 111386.6792 111389.5793 111384.8369 111399.0657 100 Yes In fact, to obtain the pressure loss it would be easier to specify an Equation goal with the difference between the inlet and outlet pressures as the equation goal’s expression. However, to demonstrate the wide capabilities of Flow Simulation, we will calculate the pressure loss with the Flow Simulation gasdynamic Calculator. The Calculator contains various formulae from fluid dynamics which can be useful for engineering calculations. The calculator is a very useful tool for rough estimations of the expected results, as well as for calculations of important characteristic and reference values. All calculations in the Calculator are performed only in the International system of units SI, so no parameter units should be entered, and Flow Simulation Units settings do not apply in the Calculator. Working with Calculator 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Calculator. 2 Right-click the A1 cell in the Calculator sheet and select New Formula. The New Formula dialog box appears. 3 In the Select the name of the new formula tree expand the Pressure and Temperature item and select the Total pressure loss check box.
  • 109.
    4 Click OK.The total pressure loss formula appears in the Calculator sheet. In the Result (or A) column you see the formula name, in the next columns (B, C, etc.) you see names of the formula arguments (variables and constants). You can either type all the formula arguments’ values in cells under their names in the SI units, or copy and paste them from the goals Excel worksheet table obtained through the Goals dialog box. The result value appears in the Result column cell immediately when you enter all the arguments and click another cell. 5 Specify the values in the cells as follows: Density = 998.1934 (the water density for the specified temperature of 293.2 K), Velocity = 1. 6 Open the goals1 Excel workbook and copy the Value of SG Av Total Pressure 1 into the Clipboard. 7 Go to the Calculator, click the B2 cell and press Ctrl+V to paste the goal value from the Clipboard. 8 Return to Excel, copy the Value of SG Av Total Pressure 2. Go to the Calculator, click the C2 cell and press Ctrl+V. Click any free cell. Immediately the Total pressure loss value appears in the Result column. 9 Click File, Save. 10 In the Save As dialog box browse to the folder where the ball valve model used in this example is located, enter ball valve for the file name, and click Save. 11 Click File, Exit to exit the Calculator. To obtain the pure local drag, it is necessary to subtract from the obtained value the total pressure loss due to friction in a straight pipe of the same length and diameter. To do that, we perform the same calculations in the ball valve model with the handle in the 0o angle position. You can do this with the 00 degrees - long valve configuration. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-17
  • 110.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-18 Since the specified conditions are the same for both 40 degrees - long valve and 00 degrees - long valve configurations, it is useful to attach the existing Flow Simulation project to the 00 degrees - long valve configuration. Clone the current project to the 00 degrees - long valve configuration. Since at zero angle the ball valve becomes a simple straight pipe, there is no need to set the Minimum gap size value smaller than the default gap size which, in our case, is automatically set equal to the pipe’s diameter (the automatic minimum gap size depends on the characteristic size of the faces on which the boundary conditions are set). Note that using a smaller gap size will result in a finer mesh and, in turn, more computer time and memory will be required for calculation. To solve your task in the most effective way you should choose the optimal settings for the task. Changing the Geometry Resolution Check to see that the 00 degrees - long valve is the active configuration. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 2 Clear the Manual specification of the minimum gap size check box. 3 Click OK. Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. Then click Run to start the calculation. After the calculation is finished, create the Goal Plot. The goals2 workbook is created. Go to Excel, then select the both cells in the Value column and copy them into the Clipboard. Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value SG Av Total Pressure 1 [Pa] 101805.2057 101804.8525 101801.4794 SG Av Total Pressure 2 [Pa] 102023.7419 102054.9498 102022.7459
  • 111.
    Now you cancalculate the total pressure loss in a straight pipe. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Calculator. 2 In the Calculator menu, click File, Open. Browse to the folder where you saved the calculator file earlier in this tutorial and select the ball valve.fwc file. Click Open. 3 Click the B4 cell and in the Calculator toolbar click to paste data from the Clipboard. 4 Save the existing value of the total pressure loss: click the A2 cell, click , then click the A7 cell and finally click . 5 Double-click the Name7 cell and type 40 degrees. 6 Right-click the Total pressure at point 1 cell and select Add Relation. The cursor appears. 7 Click the B4 cell. The value of total pressure is now taken from the B4 cell. 8 Right-click the Total pressure at point 2 cell and select Add Relation. 9 Click the B5 cell. The value of total pressure is now taken from the B5 cell. Immediately the total pressure value is recalculated. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 4-19
  • 112.
    Chapter 4 Determinationof Hydraulic Loss 4-20 Now you can calculate the local drag in the ball valve whose handle is set at 40o. Total Pressure loss (40 deg) Total Pressure loss (0 deg) Local Drag 19.14 0.44 18.70
  • 113.
    5 Cylinder DragCoefficient Flow Simulation can be used to study flow around objects and to determine the resulting lift and drag forces on the objects due to the flow. In this example we use Flow Simulation to determine the drag coefficient of a circular cylinder immersed in a uniform fluid stream. The cylinder axis is oriented perpendicular to the stream. The computations are performed for a range of Reynolds numbers (1,1000,105), where , D is the cylinder diameter, U is the velocity of the fluid stream, ρ is the Re ρUD = ------μ---------- density, and μ is the dynamic viscosity. The drag coefficient for the cylinder is defined as: CD FD = ---------------------- 1 2 --ρU 2 DL where FD is the total force in the flow direction (i.e. drag) acting on a cylinder of diameter D and length L. The goal of the simulation is to obtain the drag coefficient predicted by Flow Simulation and to compare it to the experimental data presented in Ref.1. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-1
  • 114.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-2 Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT part located in the Tutorial 2 - Drag Coefficientcylinder 0.01m folder and click Open (or double-click the part). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. The Cylinder analysis represents a typical Flow Simulation External analysis. External flows analyses deal with flows over or around a model such as flows over aircrafts, automobiles, buildings, etc. For external flow analyses the far-field boundaries are the Computational Domain boundaries. You can also solve a combined external and internal flow problem in a Flow Simulation project (for example flow around and through a building). If the analysis includes a combination of internal and external flows, you must specify External type for the analysis. The first step is to create a new Flow Simulation project. Creating a Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. The project wizard guides you through the definition of a new Flow Simulation project. In this project we will analyze flow over the cylinder at the Reynolds number of 1. 2 Select Create new. In the Configuration name box type Re 1. This is the name of the SolidWorks configuration that will be created for the associated Flow Simulation project. Click Next.
  • 115.
    3 In theUnit System dialog box you can select the desired system of units for both input and output (results). In this project we will specify the International System SI by default. Click Next. 4 In the Analysis Type dialog box select an External type of flow analysis. This dialog also allows you to specify advanced physical features you want to include in the analysis. In this project we will not use any of the advanced physical features To disregard closed internal spaces within the body you can select Exclude internal spaces; however no internal spaces exist within the cylinder in this tutorial. The Reference axis of the global coordinate system (X, Y or Z) is used for specifying data in a tabular or formula form with respect to a cylindrical coordinate system based on this axis. The flow over a cylinder is steady at a Reynolds number Re < 40 (see the cylinder Re definition above) and unsteady (time-dependent) at Re > 40. Since in this tutorial the first calculation is performed at Re=1, to accelerate the run, we perform a steady-state analysis. Click Next. 5 Since we use water in this project, open the Liquids folder and double-click the Water item. Click Next. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-3
  • 116.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-4 6 In the Wall Conditions dialog box you may specify the default thermal wall conditions applied to all the model walls in contact with the fluid. In this project we keep the default Adiabatic wall setting, denoting that all the model walls are heat-insulated and accept the default zero wall roughness. Click Next. For a steady External problem, such as the cylinder in this tutorial, the Initial and Ambient Conditions dialog box asks you to specify the ambient flow conditions of the undisturbed free stream. Thus you will specify initial conditions inside the Computational Domain and boundary conditions at the Computational Domain boundaries. The ambient conditions are thermodynamic (static pressure and temperature by default), velocity, and turbulence parameters. In this project we consider the flow under the default thermodynamic conditions (i.e., the standard atmosphere at sea level), and set the incoming stream (X-component) velocity in accordance with the desired Reynolds number. For convenience we can use the Dependency box to specify the incoming flow velocity in terms of the Reynolds number. 7 Click in the Velocity in X direction field. The Dependency button is enabled. 8 Click Dependency. The Dependency dialog box appears. Using Dependency you can specify data in several ways: as a constant, as a tabular or formula dependency on x, y, z, r, θ, ϕ coordinates and time t (only for time-dependent analysis). The radius r is the distance from a point to the Reference axis selected from the reference coordinate system (the Global Coordinate System for all data set in the Wizard and General Settings dialog boxes), while θ and ϕ are the polar and azimuthal angles of spherical coordinate system, respectively. Therefore, by combination of r, θ, and ϕ coordinates you can specify data in cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems. 9 In the Dependency type list select Formula Definition.
  • 117.
    10 In theFormula box type the formula defining the flow velocity using the Reynolds number: 1*(0.0010115/0.01/998.19). Here: 1 – the Reynolds number (Re) 0.0010115 (Pa*s) - the water dynamic viscosity (μ) at the specified temperature of 293.2 K 0.01 (m) - the cylinder diameter (D) 998.19 (kg/m3)- the water density (ρ) at the specified temperature of 293.2 K 11 Click OK. You will return to the Initial and Ambient Conditions dialog box. For most flows it is difficult to have a good estimation of their turbulence a priori, so it is recommended that the default turbulence parameters be used. The default turbulence intensity values proposed by Flow Simulation are 0.1% for external analyses and 2% for internal analyses and these values are appropriate for most cases. In this project we will specify a turbulence intensity of 1%. 12 Expand the Turbulence parameters item and in the Turbulence intensity box type 1. Click Next. 13 In the Result and Geometry Resolution dialog box specify the result resolution level of 7 and accept the automatically defined minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness. Click Finish. The project is created and the 3D Computational Domain is automatically generated. In this tutorial we are interested in determining the drag coefficient of the cylinder only, without the accompanying 3D effects. Thus, to reduce the required CPU time and computer memory, we will perform a two-dimensional (2D) analysis in this tutorial. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-5
  • 118.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient Specifying 2D Plane Flow 5-6 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, expand the Input Data item. 2 Right-click the Computational Domain icon and select Edit Definition. The Computational Domain dialog box appears. 3 Click the Boundary Condition tab. 4 In the 2D plane flow list select XY-Plane Flow (since the Z-axis is the cylinder axis). Automatically the Symmetry condition is specified at the Z min and Z max boundaries of the Computational Domain. Click the Size tab. You can see that the Z min and Z max boundaries are set automatically, basing on the model dimensions. Thus the reference cylinder length L in the cylinder drag (CD) formula presented above is equal to L = Z max-Z min = 0.002 m. For most cases, to study the flow field around an external body and to investigate the effects of design changes it is recommended to use the default Computational Domain size as determined by Flow Simulation. However, in this case we will compare the Flow Simulation results to experimental results and we would like to determine the drag coefficient with a high degree of accuracy. In order to eliminate any disturbances of the incoming flow at the Computational Domain boundaries due to the presence of the cylinder, we will manually set the boundaries farther away from the cylinder. The accuracy will be increased at the expense of required CPU time and memory due to the larger size of Computational Domain. 5 Specify the coordinates of the Computational domain boundaries as shown on the picture to the right. 6 Click OK. Since the incoming flow is aligned with the X-axis direction, the cylinder drag coefficient is calculated through the X-component of the force acting on the cylinder. The X-component of force can be determined easily by specifying the appropriate Flow Simulation goal. For this case you will specify the X - Component of Force as a Global Goal. This ensures that the calculation will not be finished until X - Component of Force in the entire computational domain (i.e. on the cylinder surface) is fully converged.
  • 119.
    Specifying a GlobalGoal 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Global Goals. 2 In the Parameter table select the first check box in the X - Component of Force row. 3 Accept selected Use for Conv. check box to use this goal for convergence control. For the X(Y, Z) - Component of Force and X(Y, Z) - Component of Torque goals you can select the Coordinate system in which these goals are calculated. In this example the default Global Coordinate System meets the task. 4 Click OK . The new GG X - Component of Force 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. Specifying an Equation Goal When the calculation is finished, you will need to manually calculate the drag coefficient from the obtained force value. Instead, let Flow Simulation to make all the necessary calculations for you by specifying an Equation Goal. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Equation Goal. 2 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select the GG X - Component of Force 1 goal. It appears in the Expression box. 3 Use buttons in the calculator or keyboard to complete the expression as follows: {GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.002*(1*0.0010115)^2)*(2*998.19*0.01). Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-7
  • 120.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-8 4 Select No units in the Dimensionality list and click OK. The new Equation Goal 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 5 Rename the Equation Goal 1 to Drag Coefficient. To compare the Flow Simulation results with the experimental curve taken from Ref.1, we will obtain the results at a Reynolds number of 1, 103 and 105. As with Re = 1, the Cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT is used to calculate the flow at the Reynolds number of 103. The Cylinder 1m.SLDPRT is used to calculate the flow at the Reynolds number of 105. Cloning a Project and Creating a New Configuration 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the top Re 1 icon and select Clone Project. 2 In the Configuration name box, type Re 1000. 3 Click OK. The new Re 1000 configuration is created with the Flow Simulation project attached. Since the new project is a copy of the Re 1 Flow Simulation project, you only need to change the flow velocity value in accordance with the Reynolds number of 1000. Use the General Settings dialog box to change the data specified in the Wizard, except the settings for Units and Result and Geometry Resolution. The General Settings always presents the current state of the project parameters. You can change General Settings to correct the settings made in the Wizard or to modify the project created with the Flow Simulation Template in accordance with the new project requirements.
  • 121.
    Changing Project Settings 1 Click Flow Simulation, General Settings. The General Settings dialog box appears. 2 As it has been mentioned above, since the flow over a cylinder is unsteady at Re > 40, select the Time-dependent physical feature for this project. 3 In the Navigator click Initial and ambient conditions. 4 Click the Velocity in X direction field and then click Dependency. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-9
  • 122.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-10 5 In the Formula box, type the formula for the new Reynolds number: 1e3*(0.0010115/0.01/998.19). 6 Click OK to return to the General Settings dialog box. 7 Click OK to save changes and close the General Settings dialog box. Changing the Equation Goal 1 Right-click the Drag Coefficient icon under Goals and select Edit Definition. 2 In the Expression box type the new formula for the new Reynolds number: {GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.002*(0.0010115*10^3)^2)*(2*998.19*0.01). 3 Select No units in the Dimensionality list. 4 Click OK to save changes and close the Equation Goal dialog box. In the experiments performed with one fluid medium, the Reynolds number’s large rise is usually obtained by increasing both the velocity and the model overall dimension (i.e. cylinder diameter) since it is difficult to increase only velocity by e.g. 105 times. Since our simulation is performed with water only, let us increase the cylinder diameter to 1 m to perform the calculation at a Reynolds number of 105. Cloning a project is convenient if you want to create similar projects for the same model. The easiest way to apply the same general project settings to another model is to use the Flow Simulation Template. Template contains all of the general project settings that can be used as a basis for a new project. These settings are: problem type, physical features, fluids, solids, initial and ambient flow parameters, wall heat condition, geometry and result resolution, and unit settings. Notice that Boundary Conditions, Fans, Initial Conditions, Goals and other features accessible from the Flow Simulation, Insert menu, as well as results are not stored in the template. Initially, only the New Project default template is available, but you can easily create your own templates.
  • 123.
    Creating a Template 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Create Template. The Create Template dialog box appears. 2 In the Template name box, type Cylinder Drag. 3 Click Save. The new Flow Simulation template is created. All templates are stored as .fwp files in the <install_dir>/Template folder, so you can easily apply a template to any previously created models. 4 Save the model. Next, create a new project based on the Cylinder Drag template. Creating a Project from the Template Open the Cylinder 1m.SLDPRT file located in the cylinder 1m folder. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, New. The New Flow Simulation Project dialog box appears. 2 In the Configuration name box, type Re 1e5. 3 In the List of templates, select Cylinder Drag. 4 Click OK. The newly created project has the same settings as the Re 1000 project with the cylinder 0.01m model. The only exceptions are Geometry Resolution and Computational Domain size, which are calculated by Flow Simulation in accordance with the new model geometry. Notice that the 2D plane flow setting and Global Goal are retained. Next, you can modify the project in accordance with the new model geometry. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-11
  • 124.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-12 1 Click Flow Simulation, Computational Domain and adjust the computational domain size as shown at the picture to the right. 2 Click OK. 3 Open the General Settings dialog box and click Initial and ambient conditions, click the Velocity in X direction field, then click Dependency. 4 Change the velocity X component formula as follows: 1e5*(0.0010115/1/998.19). Click OK to return to the General Settings dialog box. By default, Flow Simulation determines the default turbulence length basis equal to one percent of the model overall dimension (i.e. cylinder diameter). Since the Re 1e5 project was created from the template, it inherited the turbulence length value calculated for the small cylinder (d = 0.01m). For the cylinder 1m we need to change this value. 5 In the General Settings dialog box expand the Turbulence parameters item. Type 0.01 m in the Turbulence length field. 6 Click OK. 7 Create the Equation Goal for the drag coefficient of the cylinder as it was described before. In the Expression box enter the formula: {GG X - Component of Force 1}/(0.2*(0.0010115*10^5)^2)*(2*998.19*1). 8 Select No units in the Dimensionality list. 9 Click OK. Rename the Equation Goal 1 to Drag Coefficient. Now you can solve all of the projects created for both the cylinders.
  • 125.
    Solving a Setof Projects Flow Simulation allows you to automatically solve a set of projects that exist in any currently opened document. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Batch Run. 2 Select the Solve check box in the All projects row to select Solve for all projects (Re 1, Re 1000, Re 1e5). Also select the Close Monitor check box in the All projects row. When the Close Monitor check box is selected, Flow Simulation automatically closes the Solver Monitorwindow when the calculation finishes. 3 Click Run. Getting Results After all calculations are complete, go to the cylinder 0.01m model and activate the Re 1000 configuration. Create Goal Plot to obtain the Drag Coefficient value: 1 Click Flow Simulation, Results, LoadUnload Results. 2 In the Load Results dialog box, keep the default project’s results file (2.fld) and click Open. 3 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, under Results, right-click the Goals icon and select Insert. The Goals dialog box appears. 4 Click Add All. 5 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is created. Switch to Excel to obtain the value. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 5-13
  • 126.
    Chapter 5 CylinderDrag Coefficient 5-14 cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT [Re 1000] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value GG X - Component of Force [N] 0.000104929 9.71368E-05 8.75382E-05 0.000105358 Drag Coefficient [ ] 1.023705931 0.94768731 0.85404169 1.027899399 6 Activate the Re 1 configuration and load results. Create the goal plot for both the goals. cylinder 0.01m.SLDPRT [Re 1] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value GG X - Component of Force [N] 1.14448E-09 1.16764E-09 1.12756E-09 1.81674E-09 Drag Coefficient [ ] 11.16575499 11.39179479 11.00070462 17.72455528 7 Switch to the cylinder 1m part, activate the Re 1e5 configuration, load results and create the goal plot for both the goals. cylinder 1m .SLDPRT [Re 1e5] Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value GG X - Component of Force [N] 0.482967811 0.478070888 0.465937059 0.491484755 Drag Coefficient [ ] 0.471193865 0.46641632 0.454578294 0.47950318 Even if the calculation is steady, the averaged value is more preferred, since in this case the oscillation effect is of less perceptibility. We will use the averaged goal value for the other two cases as well. You can now compare Flow Simulation results with the experimental curve. 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 100000 0 Re 1E+07 Ref. 1 Roland L. Panton, “Incompressible flow” Second edition. John Wiley & sons Inc., 1995
  • 127.
    6 Heat ExchangerEfficiency Flow Simulation can be used to study the fluid flow and heat transfer for a wide variety of engineering equipment. In this example we use Flow Simulation to determine the efficiency of a counterflow heat exchanger and to observe the temperature and flow patterns inside of it. With Flow Simulation the determination of heat exchanger efficiency is straightforward and by investigating the flow and temperature patterns, the design engineer can gain insight into the physical processes involved thus giving guidance for improvements to the design. A convenient measure of heat exchanger performance is its “efficiency” in transferring a given amount of heat from one fluid at higher temperature to another fluid at lower temperature. The efficiency can be determined if the temperatures at all flow openings are known. In Flow Simulation the temperatures at the fluid inlets are specified and the temperatures at the outlets can be easily determined. Heat exchanger efficiency is defined as follows: ε actual heat transfer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------= - maximum possible heat transfer The actual heat transfer can be calculated as either the energy lost by the hot fluid or the energy gained by the cold fluid. The maximum possible heat transfer is attained if one of the fluids was to undergo a temperature change equal to the maximum temperature difference present in the exchanger, which is the difference in the inlet temperatures of the hot and cold fluids, respectively: . Thus, the efficiency of a counterflow ( – inlet) inle t Tcold Thot ε inlet Thot Thot – out let heat exchanger is defined as follows: = ------------------------------------ - if hot fluid capacity rate is less inlet Tcold Thot – inlet ε outlet Tcold Tcold – inlet than cold fluid capacity rate or = ------------------------------------ - if hot fluid capacity rate is more than inlet Tcold Thot – inlet cold fluid capacity rate, where the capacity rate is the product of the mass flow and the specific heat capacity: C= (Ref.2) m · c Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-1
  • 128.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-2 The goal of the project is to calculate the efficiency of the counterflow heat exchanger. Also, we will determine the average temperature of the heat exchanger central tube’s wall. The obtained wall temperature value can be further used for structural and fatigue analysis. Open the Model Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Heat Exchanger.SLDASM assembly located in the Tutorial 3 - Heat Exchanger folder and click Open (or double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Heat Exchanger.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Warm water Creating a Project 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Wizard. 2 Select Create new. In the Configuration name box type Level 3. The ‘Level 3’ name was chosen because this problem will be calculated using Result Resolution level 3. Click Next. Cold water = 0.02 kg/s Tinlet = 293.2 K Air Steel Hot air = 10 m/s Tinlet = 600 K
  • 129.
    3 In theUnits dialog box select the desired system of units for both input and output (results). For this project we will use the International System SI by default. Click Next. 4 In the Analysis Type dialog box among Physical features select Heat conduction in solids. By default, Flow Simulation will consider heat conduction not in solids, but only within the fluid and between the walls and the fluid (i.e., convection). Selecting the Heat conduction in solids option enables the combination of convection and conduction heat transfer, known as conjugate heat transfer. In this project we will analyze heat transfer between the fluids through the model walls, as well as inside the solids. Click Next. 5 Since two fluids (water and air) are used in this project, expand the Liquids folder and add Water and then expand the Gases folder and add Air to the Project Fluids list. Check that the Default fluid type is Liquids. Click Next. 6 Since we have selected the Heat conduction in solids option at the Analysis Type step of the Wizard, the Default Solid dialog box appears. In this dialog you specify the default solid material applied to all solid components. To assign a different material to a particular assembly component you need to create a Solid Material condition for this component. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-3
  • 130.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-4 If the solid material you wish to specify as the default is not available in the Solids table, you can click New and define a new substance in the Engineering Database. The tube and its cooler in this project are made of stainless steel. Expand the Alloys folder and click Steel Stainless 321 to make it the default solid material. Click Next. If a component has been previously assigned a solid material by the SolidWorks’ Materials Editor, you can import this material into Flow Simulation and apply this solid material to the component in the Flow Simulation project by using the Insert Material from Model option accessible under Flow Simulation, Tools. 7 In the Wall Condition dialog box, select Heat transfer coefficient as Default outer wall thermal condition. This condition allows you to define the heat transfer from the outer model walls to an external fluid (not modeled) by specifying the reference fluid temperature and the heat transfer coefficient value. Set the Heat transfer coefficient value to 5 W/m2/K. In this project we do not consider walls roughness. Click Next. 8 In the Initial Conditions dialog box under Thermodynamics parameters enter 2 atm in the Value cell for the Pressure parameter. Flow Simulation automatically converts the entered value to the selected system of units. Click Next accepting the default values of other parameters for initial conditions.
  • 131.
    9 In theResults and Geometry Resolution dialog box we accept the default result resolution level 3 and the default minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness. Click Finish. After finishing the Wizard you will complete the project definition by using the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. First of all you can take advantage of the symmetry of the heat exchanger to reduce the CPU time and memory required for the calculation. Since this model is symmetric, it is possible to “cut” the model in half and use a symmetry boundary condition at the plane of symmetry. This procedure is not required, but is recommended for efficient analyses. Symmetry Condition 1 Click Flow Simulation, Computational Domain. 2 In the X max box type 0. 3 Click the Boundary Condition tab. 4 In the At X max list select Symmetry. 5 Click OK. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-5
  • 132.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency Specifying a Fluid Subdomain 6-6 Since we have selected Liquids as the Default fluid type and Water as the Default fluid in the Wizard, we need to specify another fluid type and select another fluid (air) for the fluid region inside the tube through which the hot air flows. We can do this by creating a Fluid Subdomain. When defining a Fluid Subdomain parameters we will specify Gas as the fluid type for the selected region, Air as the fluid and the initial temperature of 600 K and flow velocity of 10 m/s as the initial conditions in the selected fluid region. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Fluid Subdomain. 2 Select the Air Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). Immediately the fluid subdomain you are going to create is displayed in the graphics area as a body of blue color. To specify the fluid subdomain within a fluid region we must specify this condition on the one of the faces lying on the region’s boundary - i.e. on the boundary between solid and fluid substances. The fluid subdomain specified on the region’s boundary will be applied to the entire fluid region. You may check if the region to apply a fluid subdomain is selected properly by looking at the fluid subdomain visualization in the graphics area. 3 Accept the default Coordinate System and the Reference axis. 4 In the Fluid type list select Gases / Real Gases / Steam. Because Air was defined in the Wizard as one of the Project fluids and you have selected the appropriate fluid type, it appears as the fluid assigned to the fluid subdomain. In the Fluids group box, Flow Simulation allows you to specify the fluid type and/or fluids to be assigned for the fluid subdomain as well as flow characteristics, depending on the selected fluid type.
  • 133.
    5 Under FlowParameters in the Velocity in Z Direction box enter -10. Flow Simulation allows you to specify initial flow parameters, initial thermodynamic parameters, and initial turbulence parameters (after a face to apply the Fluid Subdomain is selected). These settings are applied to the specified fluid subdomain. 6 Under Thermodynamic parameters in the Pressure box enter 1 atm. Flow Simulation automatically converts the entered value to the selected system of units. 7 Under Thermodynamic parameters in the Temperature box enter 600. These initial conditions are not necessary and the parameters of the hot air inlet flow are defined by the boundary condition, but we specify them to improve calculation convergence. 8 Click OK . The new Fluid Subdomain 1 item appears in the Analysis tree. 9 To easily identify the specified condition you can give a more descriptive name for the Fluid Subdomain 1 item. Right-click the Fluid Subdomain 1 item and select Properties. In the Name box type Hot Air and click OK. You can also click-pause-click an item to rename it directly in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. Specifying Boundary Conditions 1 Right-click the Boundary Conditions icon in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree and select Insert Boundary Condition. The Boundary Condition dialog box appears. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-7
  • 134.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-8 2 Select the Water Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary Condition list. 3 Accept the default Inlet Mass Flow condition and the default Coordinate System and Reference axis . 4 Click the numerical value in the Mass Flow Rate Normal to Face boxi and set it equal to 0.01 kg/s. Since the symmetry plane halves the opening, we need to specify a half of the actual mass flow rate. 5 Click OK . The new Inlet Mass Flow 1 item appears in the Analysis tree. This boundary condition specifies that water enters the steel jacket of the heat exchanger at a mass flow rate of 0.02 kg/s and temperature of 293.2 K. 6 Rename the Inlet Mass Flow 1 item to Inlet Mass Flow - Cold Water. Next, specify the water outlet Environment Pressure condition.
  • 135.
    7 In theFlow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. 8 Select the Water Outlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary Condition list. 9 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type of Boundary Condition list select the Environment Pressure item. 10 Accept the value of Environment Pressure (202650 Pa), taken from the value specified at the Initial Conditions step of the Wizard, and the default values of Temperature (293.2 K) and all other parameters. 11 Click OK . The new Environment Pressure 1 item appears in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree. 12 Rename the Environment Pressure 1 item to Environment Pressure – Warm Water. Next we will specify the boundary conditions for the hot air flow. 13 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-9
  • 136.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-10 14 Select the Air Inlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary Condition list. Accept the default Coordinate System and Reference axis. 15 Under Type select the Inlet Velocity condition. 16 Click the numerical value in the the Velocity Normal to Face box and set it equal to 10 (type the value, the units will appear automatically). 17 Expand the Thermodynamic Parameters item. The default temperature value is equal to the value specified as the initial temperature of air in the Fluid Subdomain dialog box. We accept this value. 18 Click OK . The new Inlet Velocity 1 item appears in the Analysis tree. This boundary condition specifies that air enters the tube at the velocity of 10 m/s and temperature of 600 K. 19 Rename the Inlet Velocity 1 item to Inlet Velocity – Hot Air. Next specify the air outlet Environment Pressure condition. 20 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. The Boundary Condition dialog box appears.
  • 137.
    21 Select theAir Outlet Lid inner face (in contact with the fluid). The selected face appears in the Faces to Apply the Boundary Condition list. 22 Click Pressure Openings and in the Type of Boundary Condition list select the Environment Pressure item. 23 Check the values of Environment Pressure (101325 Pa) and Temperature (600 K). If they are different, correct them. Accept the default values of other parameters. Click OK . 24 Rename the new item Environment Pressure 1 to Environment Pressure – Air. This project involving analysis of heat conduction in solids. Therefore, you must specify the solid materials for the model’s components and the initial solid temperature. Specifying Solid Materials Notice that the auxiliary lids on the openings are solid. Since the material for the lids is the default stainless steel, they will have an influence on the heat transfer. You cannot suppress or disable them in the Component Control dialog box, because boundary conditions must be specified on solid surfaces in contact with the fluid region. However, you can exclude the lids from the heat conduction analysis by specifying the lids as insulators. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-11
  • 138.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-12 1 Right-click the Solid Materials icon and select Insert Solid Material. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree, select all the lid components. As you select the lids, their names appear in the Components to Apply the Solid Material list. 3 In the Solid group box expand the list of Pre-Defined materials and select the Insulator solid in the Glasses & Minerals folder. 4 Click OK . Now all auxiliary lids are defined as insulators. The thermal conductivity of the Insulator substance is zero. Hence there is no heat transferred through an insulator. 5 Rename the Insulator Solid Material 1 item to Insulators. Specifying a Volume Goal 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Goals icon and select Insert Volume Goals.
  • 139.
    2 In theFlyout FeatureManager Design tree select the Tube part. 3 In the Parameter table select the Av check box in the Temperature of Solid row. 4 Accept the selected Use for Conv. check box to use this goal for convergence control. 5 In the Name template type VG Av T of Tube. 6 Click OK . Running the Calculation 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. The Run dialog box appears. 2 Click Run. After the calculation finishes you can obtain the temperature of interest by creating the corresponding Goal Plot. Viewing the Goals In addition to using the Flow Simulation Analysis tree you can use Flow Simulation Toolbars and SolidWorks CommandManager to get fast and easy access to the most frequently used Flow Simulation features. Toolbars and SolidWorks CommandManager are very convenient for displaying results. Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation Results. The Flow Simulation Results toolbar appears. Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation Results Features. The Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar appears. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-13
  • 140.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-14 Click View, Toolbars, Flow Simulation Display. The Flow Simulation Display toolbar appears. The SolidWorks CommandManager is a dynamically-updated, context-sensitive toolbar, which allows you to save space for the graphics area and access all toolbar buttons from one location. The tabs below the CommandManager is used to select a specific group of commands and features to make their toolbar buttons available in the CommandManager. To get access to the Flow Simulation commands and features, click the Flow Simulation tab of the CommandManager. If you wish, you may hide the Flow Simulation toolbars to save the space for the graphics area, since all necessary commands are available in the CommandManager. To hide a toolbar, click its name again in the View, Toolbars menu. 1 Click Goals on the Results Main toolbar or CommandManager. The Goals dialog box appears. 2 Click Add All to select all goals of the project (actually, in our case there is only one goal) . 3 Click OK. The goals1 Excel workbook is created. You can view the average temperature of the tube on the Summary sheet. Heat Exchanger.SLDASM [Level 3] Goa l Name Unit Value Ave raged Va lue Minimum Va lue Ma x imum V alue Progre ss [%] Use In Convergence VG Av T of Tube [K] 328.4682387 327.4703038 324.7176733 328.4682387 100 Yes Iterations: 51 Analysis in terval: 21 Creating a Cut Plot 1 Click Cut Plot on the Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar. The Cut Plot dialog box appears.
  • 141.
    2 In theflyout FeatureManager design tree select Plane3. 3 In the Cut Plot dialog box, in addition to displaying Contours , select Vectors . 4 Click View Settings in order to specify the temperature as the parameter for the contour plot. By default the Pressure is specified. 5 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter list, select Temperature. 6 Using the slider set the Number of colors to maximum. 7 In the View Settings dialog box, click the Vectors tab and set the Max velocity to 0.004 m/s. 8 Click OK to save the changes and return to the Cut Plot dialog box. 9 Click OK . The cut plot is created but the model overlaps it. 10 Click the Right view on the Standard Views toolbar. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-15
  • 142.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-16 11 Click Geometry on the Flow Simulation Display toolbar to hide the model. Let us now display the flow development inside the exchanger. Flow Simulation allows you to display results in all four possible panes of the SolidWorks graphics area. Moreover, for each pane you can specify different View Settings. 12 Click Window, Viewport, Two View - Horizontal. 13 To restore the view orientation in the top pane, click Right view on the Standard Views toolbar. 14 Click the bottom pane and select the Isometric view on the Standard Views toolbar. The gray contour around the pane border indicates that the view is active. 15 On the Flow Simulation Display toolbar, click Geometry , then on the View toolbar click Hidden Lines Visible to show the face outlines. Click the top pane and set the same display mode for it by clicking Hidden Lines Visible again. To see how the water flows inside the exchanger we will display the Flow Trajectories. Click the bottom pane to make it the active pane.
  • 143.
    Displaying Flow Trajectories 1 Click Flow Trajectories on the Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar. The Flow Trajectories dialog appears. 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis tree tab and select the Inlet Mass Flow – Cold Water item. This selects the inner face of the Water Inlet Lid to place the trajectories start points on it. 3 Click View Settings. 4 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter list, select Velocity. 5 Set Max velocity to 0.004 m/s. 6 Click OK to save changes and return to the Flow Trajectories dialog. 7 Click OK . Trajectories are created and displayed. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-17
  • 144.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-18 By default the trajectories are colored in accordance with the distribution of the parameter specified in the Contours tab of the View Settings dialog box. This is controlled by the Use from contours option on the Flow Trajectories tab of the View Settings dialog box. Since you specified velocity for the contour plot, the trajectory color corresponds to the velocity value. Notice that in the top pane the temperature contours are still displayed. The different view settings for each pane allow you to display contour plots for different physical parameters simultaneously. Since we are more interested in the temperature distribution let us color the trajectories with the values of temperature. 1 Right-click in the graphics area of the bottom pane and select View Settings. 2 On the Contours tab, in the Parameter box, select Temperature. 3 Click OK. Immediately the trajectories are updated.
  • 145.
    The water temperaturerange is less than the default overall (Global) range (293 – 600), so all of the trajectories are the same blue color. To get more information about the temperature distribution in water you can manually specify the range of interest. Let us display temperatures in the range of inlet-outlet water temperature. The water minimum temperature value is close to 293 K. Let us obtain the values of air and water temperatures at outlets using Surface Parameters. You will need these values to calculate the heat exchanger efficiency and determine the appropriate temperature range for flow trajectories visualization. Surface Parameters allows you to display parameter values (minimum, maximum, average and integral) calculated over the specified surface. All parameters are divided into two categories: Local and Integral. For local parameters (pressure, temperature, velocity etc.) the maximum, minimum and average values are evaluated. Computation of Surface Parameters 1 Click Surface Parameters on the Flow Simulation Results Features toolbar. The Surface Parameters dialog box appears. 2 Click the Environment Pressure - Warm Water item to select the inner face of the Water Outlet Lid. 3 Select Consider entire model to take into account the Symmetry condition to see the values of parameters as if the entire model, not a half of it, was calculated. This is especially convenient for such parameters as mass and volume flow. 4 Click Evaluate. 5 After the parameters are calculated click the Local tab. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-19
  • 146.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-20 You can see that the average water temperature at the outlet is about 300 K. Now let us determine the temperature of air at the outlet. 6 Switch back to the Definition tab. 7 Click the Environment Pressure - Air item to select the inner face of the Air Outlet Lid. 8 Click Evaluate. 9 After the parameters are calculated click the Local tab. You can see that the average air temperature at the outlet is about 584 K. 10 Click the Integral tab. You can see that the mass flow rate of air is 0.046 kg/s. This value is calculated with the Consider entire model option selected, i.e. taking into account the Symmetry condition. 11 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
  • 147.
    Calculating the HeatExchanger Efficiency The heat exchanger efficiency can be easily calculated, but first we must determine the fluid with the minimum capacity rate (C= m& c ). In this example the water mass flow rate is 0.02 kg/s and the air mass flow rate is 0.046 kg/s. The specific heat of water at the temperature of 300 K is about five times greater than that of air at the temperature of 584 K. Thus, the air capacity rate is less than the water capacity rate. Therefore, according to Ref.2, the heat exchanger efficiency is calculated as follows: inle t Thot ε Thot – out let = ------------------------------, inlet Tcold Thot – inlet Thot inlet Thot outlet where is the temperature of the air at the inlet, is the temperature of the air at the outlet and Tinlet cold is the temperature of the water at the inlet. We already know the air temperature at the inlet (600 K) and the water temperature at the inlet (293.2 K), so using the obtained values of water and air temperatures at outlets, we can calculate the heat exchanger efficiency: ε Thot inlet Thot – outlet ------------------------------ 600 – 584 = = ---------------------------- = 0.052 Thot – inlet inlet Tcold 600 – 293.2 Specifying the Parameter Display Range 1 Right-click in the graphics area of the bottom pane and select View Settings. 2 On the Contours tab, set Max temperature to 300 K. 3 Using the slider set the Number of colors to maximum. 4 Click OK. Immediately the trajectories are updated. If you specify the range, it may be convenient to display the global (calculated over the Computational Domain) minimum and maximum values of the current contour plot parameter. 5 Click Display Global Min Max on the Flow Simulation Display toolbar. The temperature global minimum and maximum values appear at the top. The points where the parameter value reaches its minimum or maximum will be highlighted in the graphics area by color dots. The blue dots display locations of the points, where Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 6-21
  • 148.
    Chapter 6 HeatExchanger Efficiency 6-22 parameter value is minimum, while the red ones display locations of the maximum parameter value points. of the active (bottom) pane As you can see, Flow Simulation is a powerful tool for heat-exchanger design calculations. Ref. 2 J.P. Holman. “Heat Transfer” Eighth edition.
  • 149.
    7 Mesh Optimization The goal of this tutorial example is to demonstrate various meshing capabilities of Flow Simulation allowing you to better adjust the computational mesh to the problem at hand. Although the automatically generated mesh is usually appropriate, intricate problems with thin and/or small, but important, geometrical and physical features can result in extremely high number of cells, for which the computer memory is too small. In such cases we recommend that you try the Flow Simulation options allowing you to manually adjust the computational mesh to the solved problem's features to resolve them better. This tutorial teaches you how to do this. The Ejector in Exhaust Hood example aims to: • Settle the large aspect ratio between the minimum gap size and the model size by adjusting the initial mesh manually. • Resolve small features by specifying local mesh settings. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-1
  • 150.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization Problem Statement 7-2 The ejector model is shown on the picture. Note that the ejector orifice’s diameter is more than 1000 times smaller than the characteristic model size determined as the computational domain’s overall dimension. Baffles Ejector Opening Exhaust Ejected chlorine orifice
  • 151.
    SolidWorks Model Configuration Copy the Tutorial 4 – Mesh Optimization folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Open the Ejector in Exhaust Hood.SLDASM assembly. Project Definition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project Configuration Use current Unit system USA Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions Physical features Gravity; Default gravity (Y component: -32.1850394 ft/s^2) Fluids substances Air, Chlorine Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls Initial Conditions Initial gas concentration: Air – 1, Chlorine - 0 Result and Geometry Resolution Default result resolution level 3; Default geometry resolution: automatic minimum gap size and minimum wall thickness, other options by default When you enable gravitation, pay attention that the hydrostatic pressure is calculated with respect to the global coordinate system, as follows: Phydrostatic = ρ(gx*x + gy*y+ gz*z), where ρ − reference density, gi - component of the gravitational acceleration vector and x, y, z - coordinates in the global coordinate system. Conditions At first, let us specify all the necessary boundary conditions because they influence the automatic initial mesh through the automatic minimum gap size, which depends on the characteristic size of the faces on which the boundary conditions are set. Flow Simulation calculates the default minimum gap size using information about the faces where boundary conditions (as well as sources, fans) and goals are specified. Thus, it is recommended to set all conditions before you start to analyze the mesh. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-3
  • 152.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-4 The first two boundary conditions are imposed on the exhaust hood's inlet and outlet. Inlet Boundary Condition Environment Pressure: Default values (14.6959 lbf/in2, gas substance – Air) of the Environment pressure and Temperature (68.09 °F) at the box’s Lid for Face Opening; Outlet Boundary Condition Outlet Volume Flow: Outlet volume flow rate of 1000 ft3/min at the box’s Exhaust Lid. If you open the Initial Mesh dialog box (click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh) and select the Manual specification of the minimum gap size option, you can see that the current automatic minimum gap size is 0.5 ft, which is the width of the outlet opening (if you have opened the Initial Mesh dialog box, click Cancel to discard changes). The next inlet volume flow rate condition defines the gas ejected from the bottom of the Ejector component. Inlet Boundary Condition Inlet Volume Flow: Inlet chlorine (Substance concentrations: Chlorine – 1; Air – 0) volume flow rate of 0.14 ft3/min at the lid that closes the orifice (make sure that you have selected the upper face of the lid).
  • 153.
    If you nowlook at the automatic minimum gap size value (click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh, Manual specification of the minimum gap size), you can see that it is close to the orifice diameter - 0.0044528 ft. The Minimum gap size is a parameter governing the computational mesh, so that a certain number of cells per the specified gap should be generated. To satisfy this condition the corresponding parameters governing the mesh are set by Flow Simulation (number of basic mesh cells, small solid features refinement level, narrow channel resolution, etc.). Note that these parameters are applied to the whole computational domain, resolving all its features of the same geometric characteristics (not only to a specific gap). Since the minimum gap size value influences the mesh in the entire computational domain, the large aspect ratio between the model and the minimum gap size value will produce a non-optimal mesh: not only will all small gaps be resolved, but there will also be many small cells in places where they are not necessary. As a result, an extremely large mesh will be produced, which may result in overly large computer memory requirements exceeding the computers' available resources. Moreover, if the aspect ratio between the model and the minimum gap size is more than 1000, Flow Simulation may not adequately resolve such models with the automatically generated mesh anyway. Finally, let us create the ejector’s porous media and apply it to the ejector’s top and side screens. The material you are going to create is already defined in the Engineering Database under the Pre-Defined folder. You can skip the definition of the porous material, then when creating the porous condition, select the pre-defined "Screen Material" from the Engineering database. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-5
  • 154.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-6 Porous Media Screen material: Porosity: 0.5, Permeability type: Isotropic, Dependency on velocity: A = 0.07 kg/m4, B = 3e-008 kg/(s*m3). Components to apply: Top Screen Side Screen To see advantages of the local mesh and refinement options better, now let us try to generate the computational mesh governed by the automatic mesh settings. The resulting mesh consists of more than 1100000 cells, and cannot be processed by old computers due to the computer memory restriction (you may get a warning message about insufficient memory)
  • 155.
    Manual Specification ofthe Minimum Gap Size We can distinguish two very different parts of the model: a relatively big cavity having several thin walls within and no small solid features, and the ejector’s region containing some very fine geometrical features. Therefore, the mesh required to properly resolve the ejector and the mesh appropriate for the rest of the model should be also very different. Since the ejector region is a part of the entire computational domain, we need to specify such settings for the automatic mesh generation that the model’s geometry outside the ejector’s region will be resolved without excessive mesh splitting. The minimum gap size value, automatically defined from the dimensions of the ejector’s Top Screen and Side Screen components, is too small and results in excessive mesh splitting. To define an appropriate minimum gap size we need to examine all narrow flow passages outside the ejector’s region: • Boundary conditions; • The passages connecting the ejector’s internal volume with the model’s cavity; • The narrow flow passages between the baffles. After reviewing the model we can accept the width of the gap between the middle and upper baffles as the minimum gap size. To avoid excessive mesh splitting, we will specify the same value for the minimum wall thickness. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. 2 Use the slider to set the Level of the initial mesh to 5. 3 Select the Manual specification of the minimum gap size checkbox and enter 0.067 ft in the Minimum gap size box. 4 Select the Manual specification of the minimum wall thickness checkbox and enter 0.067 ft in the Minimum wall thickness box. 0.067 ft Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-7
  • 156.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-8 5 Click OK. The resulting mesh has significantly less cells than the mesh generated automatically with the default values of Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness. The total number of cells is less than 200 000.
  • 157.
    Switching off theAutomatic Mesh Definition We have successfully reduced the number of cells, yet using the mesh of the higher level. The higher level mesh provides better refinement in the regions with small geometrical features. However, we actually do not need such a fine mesh in some regions where the flow field changes slowly. We can further decrease the number of cells by switching off the automatic definition of the mesh generation settings and adjusting these settings manually. The decreased number of cells will provide us a computer memory reserve needed to better resolve fine geometrical features of the ejector. Click Flow Simulation, Project, Rebuild. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. Switch off the automatic mesh settings by clearing the Automatic settings check box. The Initial Mesh dialog box controls the basic mesh and the initial mesh within the entire computational domain unless local initial mesh settings are specified. The mesh is named Initial since it is the mesh the calculation starts from and it could be further refined during the calculation if the solution-adaptive meshing is enabled. The initial mesh is constructed from the Basic mesh by refining the basic mesh cells in accordance with the specified mesh settings. The Basic mesh is formed by dividing the computational domain into slices by parallel planes which are orthogonal to the Global Coordinate System’s axes. The Initial Mesh’s parameters are currently set by Flow Simulation in accordance with the previously specified automatic mesh settings, including Minimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness. 2 Go to the Narrow channel tab and set the Narrow channels refinement level to 1. This allows us to reduce the number of cells in the channels between the baffles and the wall of the Box. The Narrow channels refinement level specifies the smallest size of the cells in model’s flow passages with respect to the basic mesh cells. So if N = 0…7 is the specified Narrow channels refinement level, the minimum size of the cells obtained due to the mesh refinement is 2N times smaller (in each direction of the Global Coordinate System, or 8N times by volume) than the basic mesh cell’s size. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-9
  • 158.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-10 The resulting mesh is shown below. It has about 75 000 cells.
  • 159.
    Using the LocalInitial Mesh Option The ejector’s geometry is resolved reasonably well. However, if you generate the mesh and zoom in to the ejector’s orifice region, you will see that the gas inlet face is still unresolved. The resolution of the boundary condition surface is very important for correctly imposing the boundary condition. To resolve the gas inlet face properly we will use the Local Initial Mesh option. The local initial mesh option allows you to specify an initial mesh in a local region of the computational domain to better resolve the model geometry and/or flow peculiarities in this region. The local region can be defined by a component of the assembly, disabled in the Component Control dialog box, or specified by selecting a face, edge or vertex of the model. Local mesh settings are applied to all cells intersected by a component, face, edge, or a cell enclosing the selected vertex. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Local Initial Mesh. 2 Select the inlet face of the ejector’s orifice or click the Inlet Volume Flow 1 boundary condition in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree to select the face on which this boundary condition is applied. 3 Clear the Automatic settings check box and switch to the Refining cells tab. 4 Select the Refine all cells checkbox and use the slider to set the Level of refining all cells to its maximum value of 7. 5 Click OK. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-11
  • 160.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-12 Now we have specified to refine all cells at the ejector’s orifice inlet face up to the maximum level. The locally refined mesh is shown below. Specifying Control Planes The basic mesh in many respects governs the generated computational mesh. The proper basic mesh is necessary for the most optimal mesh. You can control the basic mesh in several ways: • Change number of the basic mesh cells along the X, Y, Z-axes. • Shift or insert basic mesh planes. • Stretch or contract the basic mesh cells locally by changing the relative distance between the basic mesh planes. The local mesh settings do not influence the basic mesh but are basic mesh sensitive: all refinement levels are set with respect to the basic mesh cell. You may notice that the mesh resolving the ejector’s orifice inlet face is not symmetric. It can has a negative effect on the specified boundary condition. We will add a control plane to shift the boundary between cells so that it will pass through the center of the inlet face. 1 In the Initial Mesh dialog box, go to the Basic Mesh tab. 2 Click Add Plane. The Create Control Planes dialog box appears. 3 In the Creating mode list select Reference geometry. 4 Under Parallel to select XY. 5 Zoom in to the ejector’s orifice area and select edge of the inlet face in the graphics area. The control plane will pass through the middle of the edge parallel to the Global Coordinate System plane selected in the Parallel to group. Please check that the value of offset along the Z axis, appeared in the Control planes list, is equal to 0.703125 ft. If not, it means that you have mistakenly selected another geometry feature. In this case, right-click on the
  • 161.
    Control planes listand select Delete All, then try to select the edge of the inlet face again. 6 Click OK. The Z2 Control Plane appears in the Control planes table. You can visualize the basic mesh before solving the problem. To see the basic mesh, click Draw basic mesh in the Initial Mesh dialog box or click Flow Simulation, Project, Show Basic Mesh. 7 Click OK to save changes and close the Initial Mesh dialog box. Then, generate the initial mesh to check whether the thin walls and the other geometry are resolved. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Solve, Run. 2 Clear the Solve check box in order to generate the mesh only. 3 Clear the Load results check box. 4 Click Run. Prior to visualizing the initial computational mesh, let us switch the Flow Simulation option to use the meshed geometry instead of the SW model's geometry to visualize the results. By default, Flow Simulation shows the SolidWorks model’s geometry when displaying the results. Depending on how exactly the model has been resolved with the computational mesh, the SolidWorks model’s geometry may differ from the geometry used in the calculation. To display the real captured geometry the Use CAD geometry option is reserved. 5 Click Tools, Options, then click Third Party. 6 On the Flow Simulation Options tab, under General Options, select the Display mesh check box. 7 Under View Options clear the Use CAD geometry (Default) check box. 8 Click OK. Next load the file with the initial computational mesh: right-click the Results icon and select Load Results, then select the 1.cpt file and click Open. Note that the total number of cells is about 75 000. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-13
  • 162.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-14 The calculation results, including the current computational mesh, are saved in the .fld files, whereas the initial computational mesh is saved separately in the .cpt files. Both of the files are saved in the project folder, whose numerical name is formed by Flow Simulation and must not be changed. Create a cut plot based on the CENTERLINE with the Mesh option selected. Create a second cut plot based on the ejector’s orifice inlet face with the Offset of -0.00025 ft relative to the selected face and the same settings as the first cut plot. Now you can see that the generated mesh is symmetrical relative to the center of the inlet face. Creating a Second Local Initial Mesh With the specified mesh settings the ejector’s geometry will be resolved properly. But we need to create the mesh successfully resolving not only fine geometrical features, but the small flow peculiarities as well. In the Ejector Analysis project such peculiarities can be found within the internal volume of the ejector, where the thin stream of chlorine is injected from the ejector’s orifice. Therefore the mesh within the ejector’s region must be split additionally. To refine the mesh only in this region and avoid excessive splitting of the mesh cells in other parts of the model, we apply a local initial mesh at the component surrounding this region. The component was created specially to specify the local initial mesh. Set to resolved the LocalMesh2 component. Click Close after Flow Simulation shows you a warning message. Note that this component was created so that there is a small distance between the boundaries of the component and the solid feature of interest (i.e., the ejector). Because the local settings are applied only to the cells whose centers lie within the selected model component, it is recommended to have the component's boundaries offset from the solid component's walls.
  • 163.
    After resolving theLocalMesh2 component an error message appears informing you that the inlet volume flow condition is not in contact with the fluid region. The problem disappears after disabling the component in the Component Control dialog box to treat it as a fluid region. Click Flow Simulation, Component Control and disable the LocalMesh2 component. Click OK. Rebuild the project by clicking Flow Simulation, Project, Rebuild. You can also disable components directly from the Local Initial Mesh dialog box by selecting the Disable solid components option on the Region tab. Next specify the local mesh settings for the ejector’s region. 1 Select the LocalMesh2 component. 2 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Local Initial Mesh. 3 Clear the Automatic settings check box and switch to the Narrow Channels tab. 4 Specify the Characteristic number of cells across a narrow channel equal to 15. 5 Use the slider to set the Narrow channels refinement level to 3. 6 Click OK. The settings on the Narrow Channels tab controls the mesh refinement in the model’s flow passages. Characteristic number of cells across a narrow channel box specify the number of initial mesh cells (including partial cells) that Flow Simulation will try to set across the model’s flow passages in the direction normal to solid/fluid interface . If possible, the number of cells across narrow channels will be equal to the specified characteristic number, otherwise it will be close to the characteristic number. If this condition is not satisfied, the cells lying in this direction will be split to satisfy the condition. Rebuild the project. Create the mesh again (without the following calculation) and load the 1.cpt file. Click Flow Simulation, Results, Display, Geometry to hide the model. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 7-15
  • 164.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-16 Finally, let us compare how the final mesh resolves the solid geometry and the fluid region within the ejector with only about 100 000 cells in contrast with 1 100 000 cells generated by the automatic mesh settings.
  • 165.
    Flow Simulation 2009Tutorial 7-17
  • 166.
    Chapter 7 MeshOptimization 7-18
  • 167.
    8 Application ofEFD Zooming Problem Statement The Flow Simulation PE capability of EFD Zooming is demonstrated as an engineering tutorial1 example of selecting a better heat sink shape for a main chip taking into account other electronic components in an electronic enclosure. The assembly model of the electronic enclosure including the main chip’s heat sink under consideration is shown in picture. The fan installed at the enclosure inlet blows air through the enclosure to the outlet slots with the goal of cooling the heated electronic elements (having heat sources inside). The planar main chip is attached to a motherboard made of an insulator. To cool the main chip better, its opposite plane surface is covered by a heat sink cooled by the air stream from the fan. 1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-1
  • 168.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-2 Inlet Fan PCB Small Chips Main Chip Heat Sink Capacitors Power Supply Mother Board Electronic enclosure The problem’s engineering aim is to determine the temperature of the main chip when using one of two heat sink designs. All other conditions within the enclosure will be invariable. As a result, we will find out the difference in cooling capability between these two competing shapes. No.1 No.2 The heat sink’s competing shapes (No.1 and No.2) As you can see, all components within the electronic enclosure except the main chip’s heat sink are specified as coarse shapes without small details, since they do not influence the main chip’s temperature which is the aim of the analysis (the enclosure model was preliminary simplified to this level on purpose). On the contrary, the heat sink of each shape is featured by multiple thin (thickness of 0.1 in) fins with narrow (gaps of 0.1 in) channels between them.
  • 169.
    Two Ways ofSolving the Problem with Flow Simulation Flow Simulation allows us to simplify the solution of this problem. Two possible techniques are listed below. In the first and more direct way, we compute the entire flow inside the whole electronic enclosure for each heat sink shape with using the Local Initial Mesh option for constructing a fine computational mesh in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins. Naturally, the Heat conduction in solids option is enabled in these computations. In the other, two-stage way (EFD Zooming using the Transferred Boundary Condition option), we solve the same problem in the following two stages: 1 computing the entire flow inside the whole electronic enclosure at a low result resolution level without resolving the heat sink’s fine features (so, the parallelepiped envelope is specified instead of the heat sink’s comb shape) and disabling the Heat conduction in solids option; 2 computing the flow over the real comb-shaped heat sink in a smaller computational domain surrounding the main chip, using the Transferred Boundary Condition option to take the first stage’s computation results as boundary conditions, specifying a fine computational mesh in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins to resolve them, and enabling the Heat conduction in solids option. The first stage’s computation is performed once and then used for the second stage’s computations performed for each of the heat sink’s shapes. The EFD Zooming Approach Let us begin from the second (EFD Zooming) approach employing the Transferred Boundary Condition option. Then, to validate the results obtained with this approach, we will solve the problem in the first way by employing the Local Initial Mesh option. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-3
  • 170.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming First Stage of EFD Zooming 8-4 In accordance with the 1st stage of EFD Zooming aimed at computing the entire flow inside the electronic enclosure, it is not necessary to resolve the flow’s small features, i.e., streams between the heat sink’s fins, at this stage. Therefore, we suppress the heat sink’s comb shape feature in the assembly model, obtaining the parallelepiped envelope instead. A parallelepiped heat sink is used at the 1st stage of EFD Zooming. The model simplification at this stage allows us to compute the electronic enclosure’s flow by employing the automatic initial mesh settings with a lower level of initial mesh (we use 4) and accepting the automatic settings for the minimum gap size and the minimum wall thickness. Moreover, at this stage it is also not necessary to compute heat conduction in solids, since we do not compute the main chip temperature at this stage. Instead, we specify surface heat sources of the same (5W) heat transfer rates at the main chip and heat sink (parallelepiped) faces and at the small chips’ faces (they are heated also in this example) to simulate heating of the air flow by the electronic enclosure. This is not obligatory, but removing the heat conduction in solids at this stage saves computer resources. As a result, the computer resources (memory and CPU time) required at this stage are substantially reduced. Project for the First Stage of EFD Zooming SolidWorks Model Configuration Click File, Open. In the Open dialog box, browse to the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM assembly located in the Tutorial PE1 - EFD Zooming folder and click Open (or double-click the assembly). Alternatively, you can drag and drop the Enclosure Assembly.SLDASM file to an empty area of SolidWorks window. Make sure that the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration is the active one. Note that heat sink (HeatSink.SLDPRT) is the parallelepiped obtained by suppressing the heat sink’s cuts.
  • 171.
    Project Definition Usingthe Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Use current: Zoom – Global - L4 Unit system USA Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions Physical features No physical features are selected Fluid Air Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, Default smooth walls Initial Conditions Default conditions Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution level set to 4, other options are default For this project we use the automatic initial mesh and the default computational domain. Note that Level of initial mesh is set to 4 in accordance with the Result resolution level specified in the Wizard. The Result Resolution defines two parameters in the created project, namely, the Level of initial mesh and the Results resolution level. The Level of initial mesh is accessible from the Initial Mesh dialog box and governs the initial mesh only. The Results resolution level is accessible from the Calculation Control Options dialog box and governs the refinement of computational mesh during calculation and the calculation finishing conditions. The Geometry Resolution options, which also influence the initial mesh, can be changed in the Initial Mesh box, and/or their effects can be corrected in the Initial Mesh and Local Initial Mesh dialog boxes. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-5
  • 172.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-6 Unit System After passing the Wizard, first we will adjust the system of units. The new custom system of units is based on the selected USA pre-defined system, but uses Watts for power, and inches for length. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Units. 2 Specify Inch for the Length and Watt for the Total heat flow & power. 3 Click Save. 4 In the Save to Database dialog box, expand the Units group and select the User Defined item. 5 Name the new system of units Electronics. 6 Click OK to return to the Unit System dialog box. 7 Click OK. Conditions We specify External Inlet Fan at the inlet, Environment Pressure at three outlets. For more detailed explanation of how to set these conditions please refer to the First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial. Inlet Boundary Condition External Inlet Fan: Pre-Defined Fan Curves PAPST DC-Axial Series 400 405 405 with default settings (ambient pressure of 14.6959 lbf/in2, temperature of 68.09 °F) set at the Inlet Lid;
  • 173.
    Outlet Boundary Condition Heat Sources Environment Pressure: Default thermodynamic parameters (ambient pressure of 14.6959 lbf/in2, temperature of 68.09 °F) for the Environment pressure at the Outlet Lids. As mentioned earlier in this chapter, to simulate the flow heating by the electronic enclosure, we specify surface heat sources of the same (5W) heat transfer rates at the main chip and the heat sink (parallelepiped) faces and at the small chips’ faces. Since we do not consider heat conduction in solids in this project, the surface source can be applied only to faces in contact with fluid. Follow the steps below to create the sources on the necessary faces: 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Surface Source. In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree, select the Heat Sink and Main Chip components. Flow Simulation automatically selects all faces of the Heat Sink and Main Chip components. Faces that are not in contact with fluid must be removed from the Faces to Apply the Surface Source list. 2 Click Filter Faces . Select Keep outer faces and faces in contact with fluid. 3 Click Filter. It is convenient to select all faces of the component by selecting this component in the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree, though finding and removing unnecessary faces from the selection manually (one by one) may require excessive time, especially when there are many Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-7
  • 174.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-8 faces to remove. The Filter allows you to remove unnecessary faces of specified type from the list of selected faces. 4 Set the value of the source to 5 W. The specified heat source value (Heat Transfer Rate) is distributed among the selected faces in proportion to their areas. 5 Click OK . Following the same procedure, create a surface source of the 5 W on the total surface of small chips. Goals Specify the surface goals of mass flow rate at the inlet and outlet. Run the calculation. After the calculation is finished you can start the second stage of EFD Zooming to focus on the main chip. Save the model.
  • 175.
    Second Stage ofEFD Zooming At the 2nd stage of EFD Zooming aimed at determining the main chip’s temperature, we compute the flow over the heat sink in a smaller computational domain surrounding the main chip, using the Transferred Boundary Condition option to take the first stage’s computation results as boundary conditions. To compute the solids temperature, we enable the Heat conduction in solids option. Since at this stage the computational domain is reduced substantially, a fine computational mesh with an affordable number of cells can be constructed in the heat sink’s narrow channels and thin fins, even when considering heat conduction in solids during computation. Project for the Second Stage of EFD Zooming SolidWorks Model Configuration Activate the Zoom - SinkNo1 - L4 configuration. Note that heat sink’s cuts are resolved now. Project Definition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Use current: Zoom - SinkNo1 - L4 Unit system Electronics Analysis type Internal Physical features Heat conduction in solids is enabled Fluid Air Default solid Metals/Aluminum Wall Condition Default condition (Adiabatic); Default smooth walls (0 microinches) Initial Conditions Default initial conditions (in particular, the initial solid temperature is 68.09°F) Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-9
  • 176.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-10 Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution level set to 4; Minimum gap size = 0.1 in, automatic minimum wall thickness; other options are default. Here, we use the automatic initial mesh by specifying the Result resolution level (Level of initial mesh) of 4, but in contrast to the first stage’s computation, we specify manually the minimum gap size of 0.1 in to resolve the fine features of heat sink. Next, we will reduce the computational domain to focus on the main chip, i.e. perform EFD Zooming. Computational Domain When reducing the computational domain for EFD Zooming purposes, it is necessary to take into account that the first stage’s computation results will serve as the boundary conditions at this domain’s boundaries. Therefore, to obtain reliable results in the second stage’s computations, we have to specify computational domain boundaries (as planes parallel to the X-, Y-, Z-planes of the Global Coordinate system) satisfying the following conditions: 1 the flow and solid parameters at these boundaries, taken from the first stage’s computation, must be as uniform as possible; 2 the boundaries must not lie too close to the object of interest, since the object’s features were not resolved at the first stage’s computation. The computational domain must be large enough not to receive influence from more complex features of the newly added object; 3 the boundary conditions transferred to or specified at the boundaries must be consistent with the problem’s statements (e.g., if in the problem under consideration the mother board is made of a heat-conducting material, then it is incorrect to cut the mother board with computational domain boundaries, since this will yield an incorrect heat flux from the chip through the mother board). In this project we specify the following computational domain boundaries satisfying the above-mentioned requirements. Click Flow Simulation, Computational Domain to adjust the computational domain size as follows: • Xmin = -2.95 in (entirely lies inside the electronic enclosure side wall made of aluminum, this material does not influence the main chip’s temperature since it is insulated from the chip by the heat-insulating mother board and the air flow, its
  • 177.
    boundary condition isautomatically specified as the 68.09 °F temperature specified as the initial condition for all solids), • Xmax = 0.7 in (the boundary conditions in the fluid region of this boundary are transferred from the first stage’s computation results, the same boundary conditions as at Xmin = -2.95 in are automatically specified at this boundary’s upper solid part lying in the electronic enclosure’s aluminum wall, and the same boundary conditions as at Zmin = -1 in are automatically specified at the lower solid part lying in the mother board), • Ymin = -1 in, Ymax = 4 in (the boundary conditions at these boundaries are specified in the same manner as at Xmax = 0.7 in, as well as at the boundaries’ side parts also lying in the aluminum wall), • Zmin = -1.1 in (entirely lies inside the mother board specified as a heat insulator, therefore the adiabatic wall boundary condition is automatically specified at this boundary), • Zmax = 1.2 in (entirely lies inside the electronic enclosure’s aluminum upper wall, therefore the same boundary condition, as at Xmin = -2.95 in, are automatically specified at this boundary). Conditions The reduced computational domain. First, we specify Transferred Boundary Conditions. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-11
  • 178.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-12 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Transferred Boundary Condition. 2 Add the Xmax, Ymax and Ymin Computational Domain boundaries to the Boundaries to apply the transferred boundary condition list. To add a boundary, select it and click Add, or double-click a boundary. 3 Click Next. 4 At Step 2, click Browse to select the Flow Simulation project whose results will be used as boundary conditions for the current Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 project. You can select a calculated project of any currently open model, or browse for the results (.fld) file. 5 In the Browse for Project dialog select the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration and click OK. 6 Click Next. 7 At Step 3, accept Ambient as the Boundary condition type. The Ambient boundary condition consists of specifying (by taking results of a previous calculation) flow parameters at the boundary's section lying in the fluid, so they will act during the calculation in nearly the same manner as ambient conditions in an external analysis. If Heat Conduction in Solids is enabled, then the solid temperature is specified at this boundary's section lying in the solid (by taking results of a previous calculation). The heat flux at this boundary, which will be obtained as part of the problem solution, can be non-zero. 8 Click Finish. Specify the other conditions as follows:
  • 179.
    Heat Sources VolumeSource of 5W heat generation rate in the main chip; Solid Materials a) Main Chip is made of silicon (Pre-Defined/Semiconductors); Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-13
  • 180.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-14 b) MotherBoard and Enclosure are made of insulator (Pre-Defined/Glasses & Minerals); c) all other parts (e.g. the heat sink) are made of aluminum. Goals Specify the Volume Goals of maximum and average temperatures of the main chip and the heat sink. Run the calculation. The obtained computational results are presented in tables and pictures below. These results were obtained with the heat sink’s shape No.1. If you look at the computational mesh you can see that it has two cells for each of the heat sink’s channels, and two cells for each of the sink’s fins. The mesh cut plot obtained for the heat sink No.1 at Y=-0.3 in.
  • 181.
    In fact, theMinimum gap size and Minimum wall thickness influence the same parameter, namely, the characteristic cell size. By default, Flow Simulation generates the basic mesh in order to have a minimum of two cells per the specified Minimum gap size. The number of cells per the Minimum gap size depends non-linearly on the Level of initial mesh and cannot be less than two. In turn, the Minimum wall thickness condition induces Flow Simulation to create the basic mesh having two cells (two cells are enough to resolve a wall) per the specified Minimum wall thickness (regardless of the specified initial mesh level). That’s why, if the Minimum wall thickness is equal to or greater than the Minimum gap size, then the former does not influence the resulting mesh at all. Changing the Heat Sink Let us now see how employing the heat sink’s shape No. 2 changes the computational results. To do this, we change the heat sink configuration to the No.2 version, whereas all the EFD Zooming Flow Simulation project settings of 2nd stage are retained. There is no need to perform the EFD Zooming computation of 1st stage again, as we may use its results in this project too. The easiest way to create the same Flow Simulation project for the new model configuration is to clone the existing project to this configuration. Clone Project to the Existing Configuration 1 Click Flow Simulation, Project, Clone Project. 2 Click Add to existing. 3 In the Existing configuration list select Zoom - SinkNo2 - L4. Click OK. After clicking OK, two warning messages appear asking you to reset the computational domain and to rebuild the computational mesh. Select No to ignore the resizing of computational domain, and Yes to rebuild the mesh. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-15
  • 182.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-16 After cloning the project you can start the calculation immediately. The obtained results are presented in tables and pictures below. It is seen that due to the new shape of the heat sink the main chip’s temperature is reduced by about 15 °F. That is caused by both the increased area of the heat sink’s ribs and streamlining the flow in the heat sink’s narrow channels between the ribs (in heat sink No.1 about half of the channel is occupied by a counterflow vortex). The Local Initial Mesh Approach To validate the results obtained with the EFD Zooming approach, let us now solve the same problems employing the Local Initial Mesh option. To employ this option, we add a parallelepiped surrounding the main chip to the model assembly and then disable it in the Component Control dialog box. This volume represents a fluid region in which we can specify computational mesh settings differing from those in the other computational domain, using the Local Initial Mesh option. The electronic enclosure configuration with the additional part for applying the Local Initial Mesh op Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No1) To create the project we clone the Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 to the existing LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 configuration, but in contrast to the previous cloning we reset the computational domain to the default size so the computational domain encloses the entire model. Activate Zoom – SinkNo1 - L4 configuration.
  • 183.
    Open the CloneProject dialog, click Add to existing and, in the Existing configuration list select the LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 as the configuration to which Flow Simulation will attach the cloned project. After clicking OK, confirm with Yes both the appearing messages. Conditions First remove the inherited transferred boundary condition. Right-click the Transferred Boundary Condition1 item in the tree and select Delete. Next, copy the boundary conditions from the Zoom – Global - L4 configuration using the Copy Feature tool. 1 ActivateZoom – Global - L4 configuration. 2 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Copy Features. The Copy Features dialog box appears. 3 Switch to the Flow Simulation analysis tree tab, hold down the Ctrl key and in the Flow Simulation Analysis tree select Environment Pressure 1 and External Inlet Fan 1 items. These features appear in the Features to copy list. 4 Select LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 as the Target Project. 5 Click OK . 6 Activate LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 configuration. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-17
  • 184.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-18 Heat Sources To the already existing volume source of the 5W heat generation rate in the main chip, add the total 5W heat generation rate in the small chips. Solid Materials The following material definitions were inherited from the previous project so you do not need to create them again, but you need to edit the Silicon Solid Material 1 to include small chips and to edit Insulator Solid Material 1 to include inlet and outlet lids: a) the Main Chip and small chips are made of silicon; b) the MotherBoard, the Enclosure, the Inlet Lid and the Outlet Lids are made of insulator; c) PCB1 and PCB2 are made of user defined Tutorial PCB material, which is added to the Engineering Database in the First Steps - Conjugate Heat Transfer tutorial example. d) all other parts are made of the default aluminum. Goals Keep the cloned volume goals of maximum and average temperatures of the main chip and the heat sink. Level of Initial Mesh Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh to adjust the automatic initial mesh settings.
  • 185.
    Set the Levelof initial mesh to 3. Since heat conduction in solids is enabled, setting the Level of initial mesh to 4 together with the local mesh settings will produce large number of cells resulting in longer CPU time. To decrease the calculation time for this tutorial example we decrease the Level of initial mesh to 3. Note that the Result resolution level is still equal to 4 as it was specified in the Wizard. To see the value of the result resolution level, click Flow Simulation, Calculation Control Options, and then click Reset. To close the Reset dialog box, click Cancel. Click Flow Simulation, Project, Rebuild. Specifying Local Initial Mesh Settings To apply the local mesh setting to a region we need a component representing this region to be disabled in the Component Control dialog box. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Local Initial Mesh. 2 In the FeatureManager Design Tree, select the LocalMesh component. 3 Click the Disable solid components check box. 4 Clear the Automatic settings check box. 5 Go to the Narrow Channels tab and set the Characteristic number of cells across a narrow channel = 2 and Narrow channels refinement level = 4. 6 Click OK. The Narrow Channels term is conventional and used for the definition of the model’s flow passages in the normal-to-solid/fluid-interface direction. The procedure of refinement is applied to each flow passage within the computational domain unless you specify for Flow Simulation to ignore the passages of a specified height with the Enable the minimum height of narrow channels and Enable the maximum height of narrow channels options. The Characteristic number of cells across a narrow Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-19
  • 186.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming 8-20 channel (let us denote it as Nc) and Narrow channels refinement level (let us denote it as L) both influence the mesh in narrow channels in the following way: the basic mesh in narrow channels will be split to have the specified Nc number per a channel, if the resulting cells satisfy the specified L. In other words, whatever the specified Nc, a narrow channel’s cells cannot be smaller in 8L (2L in each direction of the Global Coordinate System) times than the basic mesh cell. This is necessary to avoid the undesirable mesh splitting in superfine channels that may cause increasing the number of cells to an excessive value. In our case, to ensure the 2 cells across a channel criterion, we increased the Narrow channels refinement level to 4. We perform these settings for both of the heat sinks under consideration. Flow Simulation Project for the Local Initial Mesh Approach (Sink No2) Clone the active LocalMesh – SinkNo1 - N2 to the existing LocalMesh – SinkNo2 - N2 configuration. While cloning confirm the message to rebuild the mesh. Using the Batch Run calculate both projects. Results The computational results obtained for both of the heat sinks are presented below in comparison with the results obtained with the EFD Zooming approach. It is seen that computations with the local mesh settings yield practically the same results as the EFD Zooming approach, therefore validating it. The computed maximum and average main chip and heat sink temperatures when employing the different heat sinks. He at sink N o.1 Zoom - S inkN o1 - L4 LocalMesh - S inkNo1 - N 2 Heat s ink N o .2 Zoom - SinkN o 2 - L4 LocalMesh - SinkN o 2 - N 2 Parameter tm ax, °F 111.1 114.1 96.4 99.4 tav er, °F 110.8 113.8 96.1 99.2 tm ax, °F 111 114.1 96.3 99.4 Ma in chip He at sink ta v e r , °F 1 10.6 113.7 95. 9 99
  • 187.
    EFD Zooming LocalMesh The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at Y=2.19 in (Top plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and Local Mesh (right) approaches. The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at Z= -0.32 in (Front plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and Local Mesh (right) approaches. The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.1 at X= -1.53 in (Right plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and Local Mesh (right) approaches. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 8-21
  • 188.
    Chapter 8 Applicationof EFD Zooming The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at Y=2.19 in (Top plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and Local Mesh (right) approaches. The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at Z=-0.32 in (Front plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) and Local Mesh (right) approaches. The temperature cut plots obtained for heat sink No.2 at X= -1.53 in (Right plane) with the EFD Zooming (left) an Local Mesh (right) approaches. 8-22
  • 189.
    9 Textile Machine Problem Statement The simplified textile machine used by this tutorial is described as a closed hollow cylinder having a cylindrical stator with a narrow inlet tube. A thin-walled cone rotates at a very high speed. The air flows over the rotating cone before leaving through the outlet pipe. Due to the shear stress, the rotating cone swirls the air. The swirling air motion orients the fibers, for the correct formation of yarn. In this example1 a hollow cylinder with the following dimensions were used: 32 mm inner diameter and 20 mm inner height. Air is injected into an inlet tube of 1 mm diameter at a mass flow rate of 0.0002026 kg/s. The cone thickness is 1 mm and the cone's edge is spaced at 3 mm from the bottom of the main cylinder. The cone rotates at a speed of 130000 RPM. The static pressure of 96325 Pa is specified at the cylinder's outlet tube exit. Flow Simulation analyzes the air flow without any fiber particles. The influence of the fiber particles on the air flow was assumed to be negligible. Small polystyrene particles were injected into the air stream using the postprocessor Flow Trajectory feature to study the air flows influence on the fibers. A 40 m/s tangential velocity of air is specified as an initial condition to speed up convergence and reduce the total CPU time needed to solve the problem. 1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-1
  • 190.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine Stator Outlet P = 96325 Pa Inlet mass flow rate of 0.0002026 kg/s SolidWorks Model Configuration 9-2 Housing Rotating wall ω = 130000 RPM 1mm Copy the Tutorial Advanced 2 - Rotating Walls folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Open the Textile Machine.SLDASM assembly.
  • 191.
    Project Definition Usingthe Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Create new: 130000rpm Unit system SI; select mm (Millimeter) for Length and RPM Analysis type Internal; Physical features No physical features are selected Fluid Air Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls Initial Conditions Default conditions Result and Geometry Resolution Result resolution level set to 4; Conditions (Rotations Per Minute) for Angular Velocity under Loads&Motion Exclude cavities without flow conditions Minimum gap size = 1 mm, automatic minimum wall thickness, other options are default Specify the inlet and outlet boundary conditions as follows: Inlet Boundary Condition Inlet Mass Flow = 0.0002026: Inlet mass flow rate of 0.0002026 kg/s normal to the inlet face of the Stator; To do this, you may need to hide the Initial Velocity 1 and Initial Velocity 2 components. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-3
  • 192.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine Outlet Boundary Condition Specifying Rotating Walls 9-4 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Boundary Conditions icon and select Insert Boundary Condition. 2 Select Wall , then Real Wall. 3 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the Rotor component. All the rotor’s faces are selected. However, the top face is out of the computational domain and must be excluded. 4 Click Filter Faces . Select Remove faces out of computational domain . 5 Click Filter. Outlet Static Pressure = 96325 Pa: Static pressure of 96325 Pa at the outlet face of the Housing (the other parameters are default).
  • 193.
    6 Select WallMotion. 7 Specify the Angular Velocity of 130000 RPM. 8 Select Y as the rotation Axis. 9 Click OK and rename the new Real Wall 1 item to Rotating Wall = 130 000 rpm. Initial Conditions - Swirl To speed up the convergence, a 40 m/s tangential velocity of air is specified as an initial condition within the housing. The Initial Velocity 1 and Initial Velocity 2 auxiliary components are used to define a fluid domain. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Initial Condition. 2 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the Initial Velocity 1 and Initial Velocity 2 components. 3 Select the Disable solid components option. Flow Simulation will treat these components as a fluid region. 4 Select Y in the Reference axis list. 5 Under Flow Parameters, click Dependency to the right of the Velocity in X direction box. The Dependency dialog box appears. 6 In the Dependency type list, select Formula Definition. 7 In the Formula box, type the formula defining the velocity in X direction: 40*cos(phi). Here phi is the polar angle ϕ defined as shown on the picture below. ϕ Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-5
  • 194.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine 9-6 8 Click OK. You will return to the Initial Condition PropertyManager. 9 Click Dependency to the right of the Velocity in Z direction box and specify formula for the Z component of velocity: -40*sin(phi). 10 Click OK. 11 Under Thermodynamic Parameters click the Pressure box and type 99800 Pa. 12 Click OK . 13 Click-pause-click the new Initial Condition1 item and rename it to vel = 40 ms. Specifying Goals Since the rotating cone swirls the air, it make sense to specify the air velocity as a goal to ensure the calculation stops when the velocity is converged. In addition, let us specify the static pressure surface goal at the inlet and the mass flow rate surface goal at the outlet as additional criteria for converging the calculation. Specify the following project goals: GOAL TYPE GOAL VALUE FACE/COMPONENT Global Goal Average Velocity Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Outlet face(click the outlet static pressure boundary condition item to select the outlet face) Surface Goal Average Static Pressure Inlet face(click the inlet mass flow rate boundary condition item to select the inlet face) Volume Goal Average Velocity Initial Velocity 1 (select the component in the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree)
  • 195.
    Volume Goal AverageVelocity Initial Velocity 2 Calculate the project. Results - Smooth Walls (select the component in the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree) The calculated flow velocity field and velocity Y-component field at Z = 0 (XY section) are shown in the pictures below. It can be seen that the maximum flow velocity occurs near the inlet tube and near the rotating cone's inner surface at the cone's edge. Velocity in the XY section at Z = 0. Flow velocity Y-component of flow velocity It is interesting that the vertical (i.e. along the Y axis) velocity in the region close to the rotating cone's internal and external surfaces is directed to the cylinder bottom. Also, this velocity component is nearly zero in the gap between the rotating cone and the bottom of the cylinder, and positive (i.e. directed to the top) in the vicinity of the cylinder's side walls. As a result, small particles carried by the air into the region between the lower edge of the rotating cone and the bottom of the cylinder cannot leave this region due to the small vertical velocity there. On the other hand, larger particles entering this region may bounce from the cylinder’s bottom wall (in this example the ideal, i.e. full reflection is considered) and fly back to the region of high vertical velocity. Then they are carried by the air along the cylinder's side walls to the cylinder's top wall where they remain in this region's vortex. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-7
  • 196.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine Displaying Particles Trajectories and Flow Streamlines 9-8 1 In the Flow Simulation Analysis tree, right-click the Flow Trajectories icon and select Insert. 2 Click the Flow Simulation Analysis tree tab and then click the inlet boundary condition icon (Inlet Mass Flow = 0.0002026) to select the inlet face from which the particles are injected. 3 Set the Number of Trajectories to 10. 4 Under Options select the Forward direction and set Draw Trajectories As to Lines with Arrows .
  • 197.
    5 Under Constraintsincrease the Maximum Length of trajectories to 15000 mm. The Maximum length option limits the length of the trajectory to the specified value. We increase this value to show better the flow vorticity. 6 Click OK do display flow streamlines. To display particles trajectories, we need to specify initial particle properties (temperature, velocity and diameter), particle's material, the wall condition (absorption or reflection) and, optionally, the gravity. 1 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Particle Studies icon and select Insert. 2 In the Injections tab, click Insert to specify an injection. The Injection dialog box appears. In the Injection dialog box you can specify injection as a group of particles of the same material and initial conditions such as velocity, diameter, temperature, etc. You can also specify mass flow rate produced by the injection. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-9
  • 198.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine 9-10 3 Click the inlet boundary condition icon (Inlet Mass Flow = 0.0002026) in the tree to select the inlet face from which the particles are injected. 4 Set the Number of points to 5. 5 Click Settings tab. 6 Double-click the Value cell to the right of the Particle Material. 7 Under Solids, Pre-Defined, Polymers select Polystyrene as particle’s material and click OK. 8 Expand the Initial Conditions item and type 0.005 for the particle Diameter. We leave unchanged the default zero values of relative velocity and temperature, which means that the velocity and temperature of particles are equal to those of the incoming flow. We also leave the default value of mass flow rate, since it is used only to estimate mass rates of erosion or accumulation, which we are not going to take into account. 9 Click OK to set the injection and return to the Particle Study dialog box. 10 Select Injection 1 and click Clone. Select Injection 2, click Edit and change the diameter of particles to 0.015 mm. Then click OK to return to the Particle Study dialog box. 11 Click Boundary Conditions tab. 12 Click Edit to edit boundary condition that are applied by default for all the models walls. 13 In the Boundary Condition dialog box, select Reflection. 14 Keep the other conditions and click OK to return to the Particle Study dialog box. Click Settings tab. 15 Increase the Maximum length of particles trajectories to 15000 mm. 16 Click Run to run the calculation and exit the Particle Study dialog box. 17 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Particle Study 1 icon and select View Results.
  • 199.
    18 In theParticle Study Results dialog box, select Injection 1 and click 3D-View Options. 19 Select to draw trajectories as Line with Arrow and click OK. 20 Select Injection 2 and specify the same type to draw trajectories. 21 Select Injection 1 and click Show to show particles trajectories. Then click OK to exit the Particle Study Results dialog box. 22 In the Analysis tree, right-click the Injection 2 icon and select Show. Modeling Rough Rotating Wall In the previous calculation zero roughness was used for the walls of the rotating cone's internal and external surfaces. To investigate an influence of the rotating cone wall's roughness, let us perform the calculation with the rotating cone's internal and external surfaces' at 500 μm roughness under the same boundary conditions. Create a new configuration by cloning the current project, and name it 130000rpm - rough wall. Adjusting Wall Roughness 1 Right-click the Rotating Wall = 130 000 rpm item and select Edit Definition. 2 Under Wall parameters, select Adjust Wall Roughness . 3 Specify the wall roughness of 500 micrometers. 4 Click OK . Run the calculation. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-11
  • 200.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine Results - Rough Walls 9-12 The calculated fields of flow velocity and Y-component of velocity in different section are shown below and reveal practically no change in the vertical velocity of the flow. As a result, the flying particles’ trajectories are nearly identical to those in the case of smooth walls. It is seen that increase in the roughness from 0 to 500 μm increases the vortex flow's tangential velocity. Velocity in the XY section at Z = 0 (roughness = 500 μm) Flow velocity Flow velocity's Y-component Velocity in the ZX section at Y = 2 mm roughness = 0 μm roughness = 500 μm
  • 201.
    Flow streamlines Smoothwall Rough wall Trajectories of 5 μm particles Smooth wall Rough wall Trajectories of 15 μm particles Smooth wall Rough wall Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 9-13
  • 202.
    Chapter 9 TextileMachine 9-14
  • 203.
    10 Non-Newtonian Flowin a Channel with Cylinders Problem Statement Let us consider a non-Newtonian liquid's 3D flow1 through a rectangular-cross-section channel encumbered with seven circular cylinders arranged asymmetrically with respect to the channel's midplane shown in Ref. 1. Following Ref. 1, let us consider the 3% aqueous solution of xanthan gum as a non-Newtonian liquid. Its viscosity approximately obeys the power law η = K ⋅ ( γ & )n − 1 with a consistency coefficient of K = 20 Pa×sn and a power-law index of n = 0.2, whereas its other physical properties (density, etc.) are the same as in water (since the solution is aqueous). The problem's goal is to determine the total pressure loss in the channel. Also, to highlight the influence of the 3% xanthan gum addition to water on the channel's total pressure loss, we will calculate the flow of water using the same volume flow rate within the channel. The Flow Simulation calculations are performed with the uniform liquid velocity profile at the channel inlet, the liquid’s volume flow rate is 50 cm3/s. The static pressure of 1 atm is specified at the channel outlet. The calculation’s goal is the channel’s resistance to the flow, i.e., the total pressure drop ΔРo between the channel inlet and outlet. 1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-1
  • 204.
    Chapter 10 Non-NewtonianFlow in a Channel with Cylinders SolidWorks Model Configuration 10-2 Copy the Tutorial Advanced 3 - Non-Newtonian Flow folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Open the Array of Cylinders.sldprt part. Specifying Non-Newtonian Liquid 1 Click Flow Simulation, Tools, Engineering Database. 2 In the Database tree, select Materials, Non-Newtonian Liquids, User Defined. 3 Click New Item in the toolbar. The blank Item Properties tab appears. Double-click the empty cell to set the corresponding property value. 4 Specify the material properties as shown in the table below: Name XGum Density 1000 kg/m^3 Specific heat 4000 J/(kg*K) Thermal conductivity 0.6 W/(m*K) Liquid model Power law model Consistency coefficient 20 Pa*sn Power law index 0.2 Save and exit the database. Project Definition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Create new: XGS Unit system CGS modified: Pa (Pascal) for the Pressure & Stress Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions Physical features No physical features are selected (default) Fluid XGum (non-Newtonian liquids); Flow type: Laminar only (default)
  • 205.
    Wall Conditions Adiabaticwall, default smooth walls, Initial Conditions Default conditions Result and Geometry Resolution Default result resolution level 3; Conditions Specify boundary conditions as follows: Inlet Boundary Condition Outlet Boundary Condition Specifying Goals Inlet Volume Flow1: 50 cm3/s Volume flow rate normal to face; default temperature (20.05 °C) at the face; Static Pressure1: Default value (101325 Pa) for the Static pressure at the face; Specify surface goals for the Average Total Pressure at the inlet and outlet. Specify an equation goal for the total pressure drop between the channel’s inlet and outlet. default slip condition Minimum gap size=0.25 cm, no other changes Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-3
  • 206.
    Chapter 10 Non-NewtonianFlow in a Channel with Cylinders 10-4 Run the calculation. When the calculation is finished, create the goal plot to obtain the pressure drop between the channel’s inlet and outlet. Array o f C ylinders.SLDPRT [XGS] Go a l Nam e Unit Va lue Ave ra ge d Va lue Minim um V a lue Ma x im um V a lue Progre ss [%] SG A v Total P res sure 1 [P a] 105622.4926 105622.4125 105620.3901 105627.4631 100 SG A v Total P res sure 2 [P a] 101329.0109 101329.0091 101329.0051 101329.0109 100 Pres sure Drop [P a] 4293.481659 4293.4034 4298.457377 4291.380166 100 It is seen that the channel's total pressure loss is about 4 kPa. Comparison with Water Let us now consider the flow of water in the same channel under the same conditions (at the same volume flow rate). Create a new configuration by cloning the current project, and name it Water. Changing Project Settings 1 Click Flow Simulation, General Settings. 2 On the Navigator click Fluids. 3 In the Project Fluids table, select XGum and click Remove. Answer OK to the appearing warning message. 4 Select Water in Liquids and click Add. 5 Under Flow Characteristics, change Flow type to Laminar and Turbulent. 6 Click OK. Run the calculation. After the calculation is finished, create the goal plot.
  • 207.
    Array o fC ylinders.SLDPRT [water] Go a l Nam e Unit Va lue Ave ra ge d Va lue Minim um V a lue Ma x im um V a lue Progre ss [%] SG A v Total P res sure 1 [P a] 101395.004 101395.0214 101394.8731 101395.1171 100 SG A v Total P res sure 2 [P a] 101329.3912 101329.3378 101329.3084 101329.3912 100 Pres sure Drop [P a] 65.6128767 65.68357061 65.76566097 65.55243288 100 As shown in the results table above, the channel's total pressure loss is about 60 Pa, i.e. 60...70 times lower than with the 3% aqueous solution of xanthan gum, this is due to the water's much smaller viscosity under the problem's flow shear rates. The XGS (above) and water velocity distribution in the range from 0 to 30 cm/s. 1 Georgiou G., Momani S., Crochet M.J., and Walters K. Newtonian and Non-Newtonian Flow in a Channel Obstructed by an Antisymmetric Array of Cylinders. Journal of Non-Newtonian Fluid Mechanics, v.40 (1991), p.p. 231-260. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 10-5
  • 208.
    Chapter 10 Non-NewtonianFlow in a Channel with Cylinders 10-6
  • 209.
    11 Heated Ballwith a Reflector and a Screen Problem Statement Let us consider a ball with diameter of 0.075 m, which is continuously heated by a 2 kW heat source. The ball radiates heat to a concentrically arranged hemispherical reflector with inner radius of 0.128 m and through a glass cover of the same inner diameter to a circular screen with radius of 1.5 m arranged coaxially with the reflector at 1 m distance from the ball. All parts except the glass cover are made from stainless steel. The ball’s surface and the screen’s surface facing the ball are blackbody. The screen’s reverse side is non-radiating. The tutorial’s goal is to see how the presence of reflector and its emissivity influence the ball and screen temperatures. To do that, the following three cases are considered1: • Case 1: the reflector’s inner surface (i.e. that one which faces the ball) is whitebody; • Case 2: all reflector surfaces are blackbody; • Case 3: the reflector is removed. The steady-state problem is solved with the Heat conduction in solids option checked, so that conduction within all parts is calculated. Considering the convective heat transfer negligibly low (as if, say, the whole construction was placed in highly rarefied air), we also check the Heat conduction in solids only option. With this option, we do not need to specify a fluid for the project, and it is calculated without considering any fluid flow at all, thus saving the CPU time and limiting the heat transfer between parts to radiation only. The initial temperature of the parts is assumed to be 293.2 K. Let us consider the solutions obtained with Flow Simulation for each of the cases under consideration. 1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-1
  • 210.
    Chapter 11 HeatedBall with a Reflector and a Screen SolidWorks Model Configuration 11-2 Copy the Tutorial Advanced 4 - Surface-to-surface Radiation folder into your working directory and ensure that the files are not read-only since Flow Simulation will save input data to these files. Open the Heated Ball Assembly.SLDASM assembly. The heated ball with the reflector and the screen.
  • 211.
    Case 1 ProjectDefinition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Create new: Case 1 Unit system SI Analysis type External Physical features Heat conduction in solids, Heat conduction in solids only, Radiation, Environment radiation: Environment Temperature = 293.2 K; Default Solid Alloys/Steel Stainless 321 Wall conditions Default wall radiative surface: Non-radiating surface; Initial and Ambient Default initial solid temperature of 293.2 K Conditions Result and Geometry Resolution Set result resolution level to 3; Automatic minimum gap size, Manual minimum wall thickness - 0.007 m; other options are default. Definition of the Computational Domain Specify the computational domain size as follows: X min = -0.2 m Y min = -1.6 m Z min = -1.6 m Xmax = 1.4 m Y max = 1.6 m Z max = 1.6 m Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-3
  • 212.
    Chapter 11 HeatedBall with a Reflector and a Screen Adjusting Automatic Mesh Settings 11-4 Click Flow Simulation, Initial Mesh. Clear the Automatic settings check box to switch off the automatic initial mesh settings, switch to the Solid/Fluid Interface tab and change the Curvature refinement level to 5. Click OK. Definition of Radiative Surfaces Follow the steps below to specify the radiative surfaces: 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Radiative Surface. 2 Under Type, expand the list of Pre-Defined radiative surfaces and select Blackbody wall. 3 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the Heated Sphere component. Next, select the surface of Screen facing the Heated Sphere. 4 Click OK . Rename the new Radiative Surface 1 item to Blackbody Walls. Click anywhere in the graphic area to clear the selection.
  • 213.
    5 Click FlowSimulation, Insert, Radiative Surface. 6 Under Type, expand the list of Pre-Defined radiative surfaces and select the Whitebody wall. 7 Select the Reflector’s inner surface. 8 Click OK . Change the name of the new radiative surface to Whitebody Wall. Specifying Bodies Transparent to the Heat Radiation Specify the glass cover as transparent to radiation. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Radiation Transparent Bodies. 2 Select the check box in the Thermal Transparency column for the Glass component. You can separately specify a component’s transparency for solar radiation and transparency for thermal radiation from all other sources, including heated bodies. Since there are no sources of solar radiation specified in the project, Thermal Transparency is the only available option. 3 Click OK. Flow Simulation now treats this component as a body fully transparent to the thermal radiation. Heat Sources and Goals Specification Specify the surface heat source of the heat generation rate at the sphere’s surface: Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-5
  • 214.
    Chapter 11 HeatedBall with a Reflector and a Screen 11-6 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Surface Source. 2 In the Flyout FeatureManager Design Tree, select the Heated Sphere component. 3 Select Heat Generation Rate as the source type and set its value to 2000 W. Specify surface goals of the maximum, average, and minimum temperatures at the Heated Sphere’s surface and the Screen's blackbody surface. In addition, specify the volume goal for the Heated Sphere’s average temperature. (Naturally, in all cases you should select Temperature of Solid as the goal’s parameter). You may rename the goals as shown to make it easier to monitor them during the calculation. Save the model and run the calculation. If you take a look at the goals convergence, you can see that the sphere’s temperature at the start of the calculation is high. This happens because the initial sphere’s temperature (293.2 K) is too low to take away by radiation the heat produced by the 2000 W heat source . To illustrate this better, in cases number 2 and 3 we will increase the initial temperature of the heated sphere to 1000 K, thus providing the greater amount of heat is being lost by the sphere starting from the very beginning of the calculation. Case 2 In contrast to the Case 1, in this case the reflector’s inner surface is blackbody and the reflector's other surfaces are also blackbody. Create a new Case 2 project by cloning the current Case 1. Changing the Radiative Surface Condition 1 Delete the Whitebody Wall condition. 2 Right-click the Blackbody Walls item and select Edit Definition. 3 Click the Reflector item in the Flyout FeatureManager Design tree in order to select all its surfaces. 4 Click OK .
  • 215.
    Goals Specification Specifythe additional surface goals for the maximum, average, and minimum temperatures of the Reflector's inner and outer surfaces. Specifying Initial Condition in Solid Specify the initial temperature of the heated sphere of 1000 K using Initial Condition. Save the model. Case 3 In contrast to Case 1 and Case 2, the reflector is removed in Case 3. Create a new Case 3 project by cloning the current Case 2. 1 Edit definition of the Blackbody Walls condition: delete all the Reflector’s faces. To delete a face from the list of Faces to Apply the Radiative Surface, select the face and press the Delete key. 2 Delete the surface goals related to reflector. 3 Disable the Reflector component in the Component Control dialog box. Using Batch Run, calculate the cases 2 and 3. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-7
  • 216.
    Chapter 11 HeatedBall with a Reflector and a Screen Results 11-8 In Case 1, due to the radiation returned by the reflector, the ball’s surface facing the reflector is hotter than the ball’s surface facing the screen (see pictures below). Therefore, screen temperature in Case 1 is higher than in the other cases. In Case 2, radiation coming from the ball to the reflector heats up the reflector and heat is radiated from the reflector’s outer surface to ambient, therefore being lost from the system. Since the heat returned to the ball by the reflector’s radiation is smaller, the ball’s temperature is lower, although distributed over the ball in the same manner as in Case 1. The heat coming from the reflector to the screen is also smaller. As a result, the screen’s temperature is lower than in Case 1. Since the reflector is removed in Case 3, there is no noticeable heat radiated back to the ball. The ball’s temperature is lower than in Case 2 and mostly uniform (the non-uniformity is lower than 1 K). Since the screen acquires radiation from the ball only, the screen’s temperature is the lowest among all the cases. The ball temperature distribution (front plane cross-section) in CASE 1 (left), CASE 2 (center) and CASE 3 (right) in the range from 1200 to 1220 K (the reflector is arranged at the left). The screen temperature distribution (surface plot of solid temperature) in CASE 1 (left), CASE 2 (center) and CASE 3 (right) in the range from 295 to 340 K.
  • 217.
    Case 1 Case2 Case 3 Maximum 1233.04 1206.31 1195.97 Average 1222.16 1203.30 1195.47 Minimum 1211.98 1200.38 1195.39 Maximum 345.93 324.89 313.60 Average 317.78 308.90 303.55 Minimum 306.74 302.52 299.51 Parameter The b all’s temperature, K The screen’s tempera ture , K Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 11-9
  • 218.
    Chapter 11 HeatedBall with a Reflector and a Screen 11-10
  • 219.
    12 Rotating Impeller Problem Statement Let us consider the air flow through a centrifugal pump having a rotating impeller (see below).1 This pump has a stationary axial inlet (an eye), a pipe section of 92 mm radius with a central body of circular arc contour, which turns the flow by 90o from the axial direction. At the inlet's exit the radial air flow is sucked by a rotating impeller, which has seven untwisted constant-thickness backswept blades with wedge-shape leading and trailing edges. Each blade is cambered from 65o at the impeller inlet of 120 mm radius to 70o at the impeller exit of 210 mm radius, both with respect to the radial direction. These blades are confined between the impeller shrouding disks rotating with the same (as the blades) angular speed of 2000 rpm. Downstream of the impeller the air enters a stationary (non-rotating) radial diffuser. To complete the problem statement, let us specify the following inlet and outlet boundary conditions: inlet air of 0.3 m3/s volume flow rate having uniform velocity profile with vectors parallel to the pump's axis; at the radial-directed outlet a static pressure of 1 atm is specified. 1.This example can be run in Flow Simulation PE only. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-1
  • 220.
    Chapter 12 RotatingImpeller Outlet Static Pressure Inlet Volume Flow The centrifugal pump with a rotating impeller. SolidWorks Model Configuration 12-2 Copy the Tutorial Advanced5 - Rotating Impeller folder into your working directory. Open the Pump.SLDASM assembly. Project Definition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project name Use current: Impeller Efficiency Unit system SI Analysis type Internal; Exclude cavities without flow conditions Physical features Rotation: Type - Global rotating, Rotation axis - Z axis of Global Coordinate system, Angular velocity=2000 RPM (209.43951 rad/s) Default fluid Air Wall Conditions Adiabatic wall, default smooth walls Initial Conditions Default conditions Result and Geometry Resolution Set the Result resolution level to 4; Minimum gap size = 0.04 m, minimum wall thickness = 0.01, other options are default Ω = 2000 rpm
  • 221.
    Conditions Specify theinlet and outlet boundary conditions as described below. Inlet Boundary Condition Inlet Volume Flow: Volume flow rate of 0.3 m^3/s (uniform velocity profile) normal to the inner face of the Cover in the absolute frame of reference (the Absolute option is selected); Relative to rotating frame. When the Relative to rotating frame option button is selected, the specified velocity (Mach number) is assumed to be relative to the rotating reference frame (Vr): Vspecified = Vr = Vabs −ω × r Here, r is the distance from the rotation axis and ω is the angular velocity of the rotating frame. The mass or volume flow rate specified in the rotating reference frame (the Relative to rotating frame option is selected) will be the same in the absolute (non-rotating) frame of reference if the tangential velocity component is perpendicular to the opening’s normal, thus not influencing the mass (volume) flow rate value, e.g. when the opening's normal coincides with the rotation axis. Outlet Boundary Condition Outlet Environment Pressure: Default value (101325 Pa) for the Environment pressure (in the absolute frame of reference - the Pressure potential is disabled) at the radial outlet face. Pressure potential. If you enable a rotating reference frame, you can select the Pressure potential check box. When the Pressure potential check box is selected, the specified static pressure is assumed to be equal to the rotating frame pressure (Pr) and may be calculated using following parameters: absolute pressure, density, angular velocity and radius: 2 2 1 2 specified r abs P = P = P − ρω ⋅ r When the Pressure potential check box is unchecked, the specified static pressure is assumed to be a pressure in terms of the absolute frame of reference (Pabs). Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-3
  • 222.
    Chapter 12 RotatingImpeller 12-4 When you specify a rotating reference frame, it is assumed that all model walls are rotated with the reference frame's angular velocity unless you set a specific wall to be stationary. To specify a non-rotating wall, the Stator moving wall boundary condition can be applied to this wall. Specifying the stator boundary condition is the same as specifying the zero velocity of this wall in the absolute (non-rotating) frame of reference. Note that stator face must be axisymmetric with respect to the rotation axis. Specifying Stationary Walls We will specify the stator condition at the corresponding walls of the pump’s cover. To easily select the necessary faces, hide the Impeller component by right-clicking the component name in the FeatureManager Design tree and selecting Hide components . In addition, check to see that the Enable selection through transparency option is enabled under Tools, Options, System Options, Display/Selection. 1 Select the inner faces of Cover as shown. 2 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary Condition. 3 Click Wall and keep the default Real Wall condition type. 4 Select Stator. 5 Click OK and rename the new Real Wall 1 condition to Stator Walls.
  • 223.
    Impeller’s Efficiency Engineersdealing with pump equipment are interested in the pump efficiency. For the pump under consideration the efficiency (η) can be calculated in the following way (F.M.White "Fluid Mechanics", 3rd edition, 1994): ( P − P ) ⋅ Q outlet inlet M η = Ω ⋅ where Pinlet is the static pressure at the pump’s inlet, Poutlet is the bulk-average static pressures at the impeller’s outlet (Pa), Q is the volume flow rate (m3/s), Ω is the impeller rotation angular velocity (rad/s), and M is the impeller torque (N·m). To obtain Poutlet, an auxiliary measure component was placed where the flow exits the impeller. The measure component is only used for the pressure measurement (the corresponding goal will be specified at the inner face of the measure thin ring), thus it should be disabled in the Component Control dialog box. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Component Control. 2 Select the Measure item and click Disable. 3 Click OK to close the dialog. Specifying Project Goals First, since the pressure and volume flow rate boundary condition are specified, it makes sense to set the mass flow rate surface goal at the pump’s inlet and outlet to inspect the mass balance as an additional criterion for converging the calculation. GOAL TYPE GOAL PARAMETER FACE Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Inlet face Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Outlet face Next, specify the goals that are necessary for calculating the impeller’s efficiency: GOAL TYPE GOAL PARAMETER FACE Surface Goal Av Static Pressure Inlet face Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-5
  • 224.
    Chapter 12 RotatingImpeller 12-6 Surface Goal Bulk Av Static Pressure The inner face of To avoid manual selecting of all impeller’s faces in contact with air (more than 150) we will use the Filter Faces feature. 1 Select the Impeller component by clicking on it in the graphic area or in the FeatureManager Design tree. 2 Right-click on Goals item in the Analysis tree and select Insert Surface Goals. All impeller faces (including those we do not actually need) appear in the Faces to Apply the Surface Goal list. 3 Click Filter Faces and select Remove outer faces and Keep outer faces and faces in contact with fluid options. When several options are selected in the faces filter, the filter options to exclude certain faces are combined with the use of logical AND, so that the combination of Remove outer faces and Keep outer faces and faces in contact with fluid leads to the removal of all faces but those in contact with fluid. 4 Click Filter. Rename the created goals as shown below: the Measure ring at the impeller's outlet. Surface Goal Z - Component of Torque All impeller faces in contact with air (see details below).
  • 225.
    Finally, specify thefollowing Equation goals: GOAL NAME FORMULA DIMENSIONALITY Pressure Drop {SG Av Static Pressure Inlet}-{SG Bulk Av Static Pressure Impeller's Outlet} Pressure & stress Efficiency {Pressure Drop}*{Inlet Volume Flow 1:Volume flow rate normal to face:3.000e-001}/209.44/ {Torque on Impeller} No units To add inlet volume flow value to the equation goal’s expression, click the Inlet Volume Flow 1 item in the Analysis tree and then click Volume flow rate normal to face in the Parameter list. Save the model and run the calculation. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-7
  • 226.
    Chapter 12 RotatingImpeller Results 12-8 The velocity vectors and static pressure distribution are shown below. To display vectors in the rotating reference frame select the Velocity RRF parameter under the Vectors tab of the View Settings dialog box. The flow velocity vectors in the frame rotating with the impeller (left) and in the stationary frame (right) at the impeller flow passage midsection (Z = - 0.02 m, Front plane, vector spacing = 0.02m, arrow size = 0.03m). The flow static pressure at the impeller flow passage midsection.
  • 227.
    The flow pressuredistribution For the impeller under consideration the obtained efficiency is 0.79. Goal Name Unit Value Averaged Value Minimum Value Maximum Value Efficiency [ ] 0.787039615 0.786371 0.784334 0.787117 Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 12-9
  • 228.
    Chapter 12 RotatingImpeller 12-10
  • 229.
    13 CPU Cooler Problem Statement Let us consider a CPU cooler consisting of a copper core and an aluminum heat sink with 62 fins. An eight-blade propeller generates a constant flow of air through the heat sink. The CPU is mounted on a socket installed on a PCB. Heat produced by the CPU is transferred through the core to the heat sink and then released into the air flow. To calculate the problem using Flow Simulation, it is convenient to use the concept of local rotating regions. In order to simplify the problem statement, we do not consider the thermal interface layer between the processor and the cooler. Also, we neglect the thermal conduction through the processor socket and PCB. A quantitative measure of the cooler efficiency is the thermal characterization parameter , where Tc is ΨCA = (TC – TA) ⁄ PD the temperature of the CPU cover, TA is the surrounding air temperature, and PD is the thermal design power (TDP) of the CPU. SolidWorks Model Fan Heat sink Copper core CPU An exploded view of the CPU cooler assembly. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-1
  • 230.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-2 Configuration Copy the Tutorial Advanced 6 - CPU Cooler folder into your working directory. Open the CPU Cooler.SLDASM assembly. Project Definition Using the Wizard create a new project as follows: Project Configuration Use current Unit system SI Analysis type External; Exclude cavities without flow conditions; Physical features Heat conduction in solids; Default fluid Gases / Air Default solid Glasses and Minerals / Insulator Wall Conditions Default smooth walls Initial and Ambient Conditions Thermodynamic parameters: Temperature=38°C; Result and Geometry Resolution Set the Result resolution level to 5; Minimum gap Computational Domain Exclude internal space Rotation: Type - Local region(s) Solid parameters: Initial solid temperature=38°C; other conditions are default size = 0.001 m, other options are default Specify the computational domain size as follows: X min = -0.095 m Y min = 0.0005 m Z min = -0.095 m X max = 0.095 m Y max = 0.1123 m Z max = 0.095 m
  • 231.
    Rotating Region TheRotating region is used to calculate flow through rotating components of model (fans, impellers, mixers, etc.) surrounded by non-rotating bodies and components, when a global rotating reference frame cannot be employed. For example, local rotating regions can be used in analysis of the fluid flow in the model including several components rotating over different axes and/or at different speeds or if the computational domain has a non-axisymmetrical (with respect to a rotating component) outer solid/fluid interface. Each rotating solid component is surrounded by an axisymmetrical rotating region which has its own coordinate system rotating together with the component. A rotaing region is defined by an additional component of the model. This additional component must meet the following requirements: • the rotating component must be fully enclosed by it, • it must be axisymmetric (with respect to the rotating component's rotation axis), • its boundaries with other fluid and solid regions must be axisymmetrical too, since the boundaries are sliced into rings of equal width and the flow parameters' values transferred as boundary conditions from the adjacent fluid regions are circumferentially averaged over each of these rings, • the components defining different rotating regions must not intersect. Specify the rotating region as follows: 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Rotating Region. 2 In the flyout FeatureManager design tree select Rotation Region component. Note that the Disable solid components check box is automatically selected to treat the Rotating Region as a fluid region. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-3
  • 232.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-4 A component to apply a rotating region must be a body of revolution whose axis of revolution is coincident with the rotation axis. This component must be disabled in the Component Control. The border of a component may intersect with the solid bodies, however, all those bodies must be also axisymmetrical. Since the flow on the boundary of the rotating region must be axisymmetrical as well, we must provide a reasonable gap between the rotating region boundary and the outer edges of the propeller blades in order to minimize the influence of local non-axisymmetrical perturbations. Due to the same reason, it is preferable to put the rotating region boundary inside the solid bodies whenever possible, rather than putting them in the narrow flow passages. Also, the supposed direction of the flow at the rotating region boundary should be taken into account when defining the shape of the rotating region. You should choose such shape of the rotating region that the flow direction will be as much perpendicular to the rotating region boundary as possible. The picture below provides an additional insight into how the rotating region shape was adapted to the actual geometry of the CPU cooler in this tutorial example (the rotation region boundary is denoted by red). These gaps are necessary for flow to be more axisymmetrical at the rotating region boundary By placing the rotating region boundary within a solid instead of putting it into a narrow channel between the fan and the attach clip we avoid the additional mesh refinement and the negative effects of the non-axisymmetrical flow in this narrow channel Here the rotating region boundary is placed within a solid to avoid unnecessary and non-realistic calculation of a swirled flow within the closed cavity, which may yield inaccurate results
  • 233.
    3 Under Parameter,in the Angular Velocity box, specify the angular rotation velocity of -4400 RPM. During the definition of a rotation region, heavy green arrows denoting the rotation axis and the positive direction of rotation speed can be seen in the graphics area. Since we want to define the rotation in the direction opposite to the arrow, we specify negative value of the angular velocity. 4 Click OK . When you specify a rotating region, it is assumed that all model walls within this region rotate with the region's angular velocity unless you set a specific wall to be stationary. To specify a non-rotating wall, the Stator real wall boundary condition should be applied to the wall. Specifying the stator boundary condition is the same as specifying the zero velocity of this wall in the absolute (non-rotating) frame of reference. Note that the stator face (or a part of the face that is located inside the rotating region in the case when the given face intersects with the rotating region boundary) must be axisymmetric with respect to the rotation axis. Specifying Stationary Walls We will specify the stator condition at the appropriate walls of the fan attach and the attachment clip. To easily select the necessary faces, hide the Fan and Rotation Region components. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Boundary Condition. 2 Under Type, click Wall and keep the default Real Wall condition type, then select Stator. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-5
  • 234.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-6 3 Select the two inner circular side faces and two top faces of Attach Clip as shown. 4 In the flyout FeatureManager Design Tree select the Fan Attach component. The Fan Attach component has a relatively complex shape with fine features, so it is preferable to select the whole component and then use the faces filter, rather than selecting manually each face we need. 5 Click Filter Faces and select Remove outer faces and Keep outer faces and faces in contact with fluid . Since we have specified the Exclude internal space option in the Wizard, the faces in contact with the cavity between the Fan Attach and the Copper Core are considered outer faces. Therefore we need to select the Remove outer faces option in Filter Faces in order to exclude them. 6 Click Filter. 7 Click OK . Solid Materials Specify the solid materials for the project as follows: a) the CPU and the Heat Sink are made of aluminum (Pre-Defined/Metals); b) the Copper Core, naturally, is made of copper (Pre-Defined/Metals); c) all other parts are made of default Insulator. Heat Source Define the volume source with the heat generation rate of 75 W in the CPU component. Initial Mesh Settings To resolve the complex geometry of the fan and heat sink better, let us define six additional control planes and specify the proper Ratios for the intervals between them to make the mesh denser in the central region containing the complex geometry and coarser near the computational domain’s boundaries.
  • 235.
    1 Click FlowSimulation, Initial Mesh. 2 Clear the Automatic settings check box. 3 On the Basic Mesh tab, under Control Intervals select the 0 m value (either as a Max of X1 interval or as a Min of X2 interval) and click Delete plane. 4 Click Add plane. In the Create Control Planes window make sure that Creating mode is set to Click on screen and Parallel to is set to YZ, click anywhere in the graphic area and enter manually -0.05 as a new value for X. Click OK to return to the Initial Mesh window. 5 Following the same procedure, add one more plane at X = 0.05. By default, Flow Simulation creates six control planes on the computational domain boundaries and a number of planes inside it. We now want to tune the set of control planes to our needs by removing the default planes inside the computational domain and adding new ones. 6 Click the Ratio cell of the X1 interval and enter the value of 2. In the same manner enter the values 1 and -2 for the intervals X2 and X3. Ratio is the ratio of cell sizes on the given interval. The cell sizes are changed gradually along the selected direction so that the proportion between the first and the last cells of this interval is close (but not necessarily equal) to the entered value of the Ratio. Negative values of the ratio correspond to the reverse order of cell size increase. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-7
  • 236.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-8 7 Delete the existing inner control planes perpendicular to Y and add new planes at Y = 0.042 m and Y = 0.047 m. Specify the Ratio values for Y1, Y2 and Y3 intervals as 1.5, 1 and -1.4, respectively. 8 Delete the existing inner control plane perpendicular to Z and add new planes at Z = -0.05 m and Z = 0.05 m. Specify the Ratio values for Z1, Z2 and Z3 intervals as 2, 1 and -2, respectively. 9 Check that the Numbers of cells per X, Y and Z are 26, 12 and 26, respectively. If the numbers are different, please correct them manually. 10 To avoid the unnecessary mesh refinement at the edges of the heatsink fins, go to the Solid/fluid Interface tab and set Small solid features refinement level to 3, Tolerance refinement level to 2, and Tolerance refinement criterion to 0.001 m, while leaving other options default. 11 Go to the Narrow Channels tab and set Characteristic number of cells across a narrow channel to 4 and Narrow channels refinement level to 1, leaving default values for other options. This will prevent the unnecessary mesh refinement in the narrow channels between heatsink fins. 12 Click OK.
  • 237.
    Specifying Project Goals Specify surface goals for maximum temperature on the CPU cover and mass flow rate for the flows entering the rotating region and exiting from it. To select the necessary faces, you will probably need to hide temporarily some components of the assembly. GOAL TYPE GOAL VALUE FACE Surface Goal Max Temperature of Solid Top face of the CPU cover. To set this goal you may need to hide the Heat Sink and Copper Core components. Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Top and side surfaces of the Rotation Region component. Surface Goal Mass Flow Rate Bottom face of the Rotation Region component. To set this goal you may need to hide the PCB component. Equation goal ({SG Mass Flow Rate 1}+{SG Mass Flow Rate 2})/{SG Mass Flow Rate 1} The disbalance of the inlet and outlet mass flow rates. We are using the "+" operand since the inlet and outlet mass flow rate values have opposite signs. Select No units for Dimensionality. To calculate the thermal characterization parameter we will need the temperature of the center of the CPU cover. To get more accurate value of the parameter we will specify a separate point goal. 1 Click Flow Simulation, Insert, Point Goals. 2 Click Point Coordinates . 3 Enter the coordinates of the point: X = 0m, Y = 0.009675 m, Z = 0m. Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-9
  • 238.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-10 4 Click Add Point . 5 In the Parameter table select the Value check box in the Temperature of solid row. 6 Click OK . Save the model and run the calculation.
  • 239.
    Results Use thegoal plot tool to obtain the value of the temperature of the center of the CPU cover. Now we can calculate the thermal characterization parameter of the heat sink: = (329.9-311.15)/75 = 0.25 °C/W. The second most important ΨCA = (TC – TA) ⁄ PD characteristic of the CPU Cooler is the velocity of the flow above PCB. We can assess the value of this parameter as well as the distribution of the temperature by looking at the cut plots made in the Front and Right planes (see below). Temperature field and velocity vectors distribution (Front plane, no offset, vector spacing = 0.003 m, uniform plot, projected vectors, arrow size = 0.015 m). Temperature field and velocity vectors distribution (Right plane, no offset, vector spacing = 0.003 m, uniform plot, projected vectors, arrow size = 0.015 m). Flow Simulation 2009 Tutorial 13-11
  • 240.
    Chapter 13 CPUCooler 13-12 Velocity distribution as a contour plot (Front plane, no offset). Velocity distribution as a contour plot (Right plane, no offset).